Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Eam Infor PDF
Eam Infor PDF
Important Notices
The material contained in this publication (including any supplementary information) constitutes and
contains confidential and proprietary information of Infor.
By gaining access to the attached, you acknowledge and agree that the material (including any
modification, translation or adaptation of the material) and all copyright, trade secrets and all other
right, title and interest therein, are the sole property of Infor and that you shall not gain right, title or
interest in the material (including any modification, translation or adaptation of the material) by virtue
of your review thereof other than the non-exclusive right to use the material solely in connection with
and the furtherance of your license and use of software made available to your company from Infor
pursuant to a separate agreement, the terms of which separate agreement shall govern your use of
this material and all supplemental related materials ("Purpose").
In addition, by accessing the enclosed material, you acknowledge and agree that you are required to
maintain such material in strict confidence and that your use of such material is limited to the Purpose
described above. Although Infor has taken due care to ensure that the material included in this publication
is accurate and complete, Infor cannot warrant that the information contained in this publication is
complete, does not contain typographical or other errors, or will meet your specific requirements. As
such, Infor does not assume and hereby disclaims all liability, consequential or otherwise, for any loss
or damage to any person or entity which is caused by or relates to errors or omissions in this publication
(including any supplementary information), whether such errors or omissions result from negligence,
accident or any other cause.
Without limitation, U.S. export control laws and other applicable export and import laws govern your
use of this material and you will neither export or re-export, directly or indirectly, this material nor any
related materials or supplemental information in violation of such laws, or use such materials for any
purpose prohibited by such laws.
Trademark Acknowledgements
The word and design marks set forth herein are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Infor and/or
related affiliates and subsidiaries. All rights reserved. All other company, product, trade or service
names referenced may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
Publication information
Release: Infor EAM User's Guide v11.0
Chapter 1: Basics..............................................................................................................................39
Understanding equipment................................................................................................................77
Setting up initial equipment information...........................................................................................78
Setting up equipment categories..................................................................................................78
Setting up closing codes..............................................................................................................78
Setting up departments................................................................................................................80
Setting up warranties....................................................................................................................81
Creating equipment profiles.........................................................................................................83
Defining equipment..........................................................................................................................84
Defining assets.............................................................................................................................85
Defining positions.........................................................................................................................89
Defining systems..........................................................................................................................92
Defining locations.........................................................................................................................95
Defining linear equipment.............................................................................................................96
Defining VMRS equipment...........................................................................................................97
Defining equipment using profiles................................................................................................97
Defining healthcare assets...........................................................................................................98
Defining healthcare properties...................................................................................................100
Defining healthcare systems......................................................................................................103
Creating equipment hierarchies.....................................................................................................106
Defining equipment hierarchies..................................................................................................106
Reorganizing equipment hierarchies..........................................................................................106
Viewing equipment hierarchies..................................................................................................107
Unlinking equipment...................................................................................................................107
Toggling cost rollup....................................................................................................................108
Viewing the parents of assets, positions, or systems.................................................................108
Viewing the parent of a location.................................................................................................108
Creating work orders..................................................................................................................109
Printing the WO repair costs chart for equipment..........................................................................109
Printing the PM repair costs chart for equipment...........................................................................110
Associating references with linear equipment...............................................................................110
Adding references to linear equipment.......................................................................................110
Defining objectives.........................................................................................................................161
Defining energy targets for objectives........................................................................................162
Viewing capital planning requests for objectives........................................................................163
Defining parameters for asset inventory .......................................................................................163
Viewing inventory results for assets...........................................................................................164
Adding assets to list...................................................................................................................164
Updating observed physical location of assets..........................................................................164
Creating work orders for assets.................................................................................................165
Approving sessions for asset inventory......................................................................................165
Canceling sessions for asset inventory......................................................................................165
Adding safety data to equipment...................................................................................................165
Defining lockout/tagout details for equipment................................................................................166
Importing lockout/tagout details from equipment...........................................................................167
Importing lockout/tagout details from permits to work...................................................................168
Viewing and modifying equipment information..............................................................................168
Viewing all equipment work orders.............................................................................................168
Viewing equipment costs............................................................................................................169
Viewing material usage..............................................................................................................170
Viewing purchase orders for equipment.....................................................................................170
Viewing structure details for equipment.....................................................................................171
Chapter 9: Reports..........................................................................................................................603
Generating reports.........................................................................................................................603
Specifying report parameters.....................................................................................................603
Specifying report fields layout....................................................................................................603
Specifying report sort order........................................................................................................604
Specifying report group order.....................................................................................................605
Saving report parameters..............................................................................................................605
Retrieving saved report parameters...........................................................................................605
Deleting saved report parameters..............................................................................................606
Asset reports..................................................................................................................................606
Annual energy reduction comparison.........................................................................................606
Annual energy use.....................................................................................................................607
Asset failures by service life.......................................................................................................607
Calibration equipment................................................................................................................608
Calibration history.......................................................................................................................608
Capital performance evaluation..................................................................................................609
CO2 analysis..............................................................................................................................610
CO2 emissions...........................................................................................................................610
CO2e emissions by greenhouse gas.........................................................................................611
Cost of WOs per equipment.......................................................................................................611
Downtime tracking report...........................................................................................................612
Energy Star ratings chart............................................................................................................612
Equipment depreciation..............................................................................................................613
Equipment hierarchies................................................................................................................613
Equipment history.......................................................................................................................614
Equipment performance by cost chart........................................................................................614
Equipment performance by downtime chart...............................................................................615
Equipment transfer log...............................................................................................................615
Fault trend analysis....................................................................................................................616
GAS index analysis....................................................................................................................616
List of categories per class.........................................................................................................617
Hazard chart...............................................................................................................................617
List of classes.............................................................................................................................617
List of equipment........................................................................................................................618
List of equipment details.............................................................................................................618
Mean time between failures.......................................................................................................619
Mean time between failures per equipment...............................................................................619
Meter history...............................................................................................................................620
PM repair costs chart.................................................................................................................620
Print maintenance pattern report................................................................................................621
Print reliability survey report.......................................................................................................621
Reliability calculations................................................................................................................622
Reliability chart...........................................................................................................................622
Table of equipment with custom fields.......................................................................................622
Total annual energy use.............................................................................................................623
Unreliability chart........................................................................................................................623
Warranty claims..........................................................................................................................624
Warranty claim vs. settlement chart...........................................................................................624
Weekly booked hours by department.........................................................................................625
Work order repair costs chart.....................................................................................................625
WO cost by equipment...............................................................................................................626
WO cost by type, cost code, or dept..........................................................................................626
WO cost of equipment per location............................................................................................627
WO cost summary......................................................................................................................627
Asset management services reports.............................................................................................628
Print customer charges..............................................................................................................628
Print customer contract..............................................................................................................629
Print invoice................................................................................................................................629
Budget reports...............................................................................................................................630
Budget analysis..........................................................................................................................630
Budget position details...............................................................................................................630
Budget summary........................................................................................................................631
Budgets consistency control.......................................................................................................631
List of budget structure codes....................................................................................................632
List of budgets (lower level)........................................................................................................632
List of budgets (top level)...........................................................................................................632
Calibrations reports........................................................................................................................633
Calibration analysis....................................................................................................................633
Calibration due report.................................................................................................................634
Calibration record report.............................................................................................................635
Calibration reverse traceability...................................................................................................636
Call Center reports.........................................................................................................................637
Customer request.......................................................................................................................637
Knowledge base articles............................................................................................................637
Penalty deduction detail.............................................................................................................638
Penalty deduction summary.......................................................................................................638
Contract reports.............................................................................................................................639
Contract classes.........................................................................................................................639
List of debit discounts.................................................................................................................639
List of existing contracts.............................................................................................................640
List of purchases under contract................................................................................................640
Print contract..............................................................................................................................640
Request discount based on purchases......................................................................................641
Fleet reports...................................................................................................................................641
Fleet billing report.......................................................................................................................641
Vehicle ticket report....................................................................................................................642
VMRS activities..........................................................................................................................643
Healthcare reports.........................................................................................................................643
Print healthcare work orders......................................................................................................643
Equipment list detail-healthcare.................................................................................................644
Labor productivity-healthcare.....................................................................................................645
Medical equipment work orders by criticality..............................................................................645
PM completion for life support equipment..................................................................................646
Work order list-detail-healthcare................................................................................................646
Hospitality reports..........................................................................................................................647
Actual labor hours against estimated - hospitality......................................................................647
Annual energy use-hospitality....................................................................................................647
CO2 emissions-hospitality..........................................................................................................648
Capital performance evaluation-hospitality................................................................................648
Degree day analysis-hospitality..................................................................................................649
GAS index analysis-hospitality...................................................................................................650
Heating and cooling degree days vs. energy consumption type analysis-hospitality.................650
Heating and cooling degree days vs. energy costs analysis-hospitality....................................651
Print hospitality work orders.......................................................................................................651
Incident response time chart-hospitality.....................................................................................652
Incident summary chart-hospitality.............................................................................................652
WO backlog hospitality report....................................................................................................653
WO cost list-hospitality...............................................................................................................653
WO cost summary-hospitality.....................................................................................................654
Inspection reports..........................................................................................................................654
Inspection route Rreport.............................................................................................................655
List of inspection results.............................................................................................................655
List of points to be inspected......................................................................................................656
Status of inspection points.........................................................................................................656
Materials reports............................................................................................................................656
Average monthly usage analysis................................................................................................657
Consignment activity..................................................................................................................657
Goods received note..................................................................................................................657
Goods return note......................................................................................................................658
Inventory standard......................................................................................................................658
Kit templates list.........................................................................................................................659
List of expired kits.......................................................................................................................659
List of kits...................................................................................................................................660
List of outstanding requisition items...........................................................................................660
List of stock................................................................................................................................661
Monthly usage trends.................................................................................................................661
Parts currently reserved/allocated..............................................................................................662
Part stockouts.............................................................................................................................662
Physical inventory discrepancy..................................................................................................662
Print build kit list.........................................................................................................................663
Print kit restock list.....................................................................................................................663
Print physical inventory list.........................................................................................................664
Print pick ticket...........................................................................................................................664
Print requisition...........................................................................................................................665
Purchase history per item/supplier.............................................................................................665
Return summary.........................................................................................................................666
Stock issues history by part........................................................................................................666
Stock transactions......................................................................................................................667
Scheduled activities....................................................................................................................699
Scheduled vs. actual - detail......................................................................................................699
Shift employee............................................................................................................................700
Short customer invoice...............................................................................................................700
Short term WO list (activities).....................................................................................................701
Short term WO list (WOs)...........................................................................................................701
Tool usage..................................................................................................................................702
WO backlog report.....................................................................................................................702
WO aging...................................................................................................................................703
WO cost list................................................................................................................................703
WO cost summary graph............................................................................................................703
WO on-time delivery by employee.............................................................................................704
WO on-time delivery by trade.....................................................................................................705
WO statistics..............................................................................................................................705
Work by employee......................................................................................................................706
Objectives
This guide contains procedures for basic operations, asset management, materials management, data
collection, purchasing management, work management, budget management, inspections management,
project management, reports, and call center management within Infor EAM.
Intended audience
This guide is intended for the Infor EAM user.
Chapter Description
Basics Instructions on basic operation of Infor EAM
Asset management Instructions on how to control the organization and
use of material equipment
Materials management Instructions on how to maintain materials inventory
using an online catalog of parts, stores, manufac-
turers, and suppliers
Purchasing management Instructions on how to facilitate the process of
purchasing goods
Work management Instructions on how to manage work by creating,
planning, and scheduling work orders
Inspection management Instructions on how to control preventive mainte-
nance (PM) functions within your organization
Calibration management Instructions on how to maintain calibration data to
ensure the accuracy of your equipment
Project management Instructions on how to define special projects in
addition to the work defined in the work manage-
ment and asset management modules
Reports Instructions on how to specify report parameters
and generate reports within Infor EAM
Chapter Description
GIS integration Instructions on how to show equipment spatially
via maps to better locate the equipment, directions
to the equipment, work history of the equipment,
and the surrounding area of the equipment
Fleet management Instructions on how to manage fleet motor pools
and the fleet billing process
Infor EAM Microsoft Project interface Instructions on how to facilitate work order
scheduling and resource assignment in MS Project
and the Infor EAM database
Asset management services Instructions on how to operate as a business unit
and charge the cost of maintenance work to the
customers for whom the work is performed
Budgets Instructions on how to define budgets to track ex-
penses and set spending limits for specified time
periods or items
Contracts Instructions on how to define purchasing contracts
for details on agreements for parts
Call Center Instructions on how to handle incoming customer
requests for action, information, or comments
Web service prompt execution Instructions on how to create user-defined screens
that utilize web services on which the system is
architected
Related documents
This guide references other documents. See these documents for more information about how to work
within Infor EAM.
• Infor EAM System Administrator's Guide
• Infor EAM Installation Guide
If you have questions about Infor products, go to the Infor Xtreme Support portal at www.infor.com/
inforxtreme .
If we update this document after the product release, we will post the new version on this Web site.
We recommend that you check this Web site periodically for updated documentation.
If you have comments about Infor documentation, contact documentation@infor.com.
This chapter describes Infor EAM features and outlines the procedures for basic operation.
1 Choose Start > Programs > Internet Explorer from the Windows taskbar.
2 Address—Enter the URL provided by your system administrator. Internet Explorer displays the
login page.
3 User ID—Enter your user ID.
4 Password—Enter your password.
Note: Users can change passwords at any time.
Periodically, the system requires that you change your password.
Header
Access basic functions on the header drop-down, which is displayed in the left-hand pane on all pages.
Additionally, click on the navigation tabs to access the major functional areas or modules within the
system.
See the following descriptions when accessing options on the header:
Option Function
START CENTER Displays the Start Center home page
MY ACCOUNT Displays the My Account page, which allows you
to view and change your e-mail address, system
language, login password, and success message
information
Menu bar
The system displays functions and menus that apply to a form or page on the menu bar. When you
position your mouse over the navigation menus on the menu bar, the system displays a "drop-down"
menu that lists the forms that apply to that navigation menu. Select an item from the drop-down menu
to open the corresponding form.
Click the drop-down menu to view the screens currently in the history queue. This includes most recently
viewed screens during a session, and the cached screen folder, with cached screens displaying
alphabetically. The entire history is cleared when you log out and therefore won't be available when
you log back in.
Toolbar
Access basic system functions on the toolbar. Hover the cursor over a button to view a pop-up description
of the button’s function.
See the following descriptions when accessing buttons on the toolbar:
Tabs
Some forms within the system include multiple tabs. Each tab displays a page on the form. Some tabs
are displayed by default, and others must be manually added to the form.
To add a tab to a form, click , and then choose the tab to add. The added tab will not be saved by
default after you log out of the system. Permanently adding a tab is a security function performed by
your system administrator. Contact your system administrator for more information.
Message bar
The system uses the message bar at the top of the window to quickly display messages, errors, and
options you must view or select after performing an action. The message bar can include any of the
following message types:
• Error—Indicates an error (e.g., a requisition must contain line items or the record has been modified
by another user)
• Warning—Warns the user of an impending action (e.g., password expiration or overwriting an
existing record)
• Question—Requires the user to select an option before taking an action (e.g., enter a reason for
rejection prior to rejecting a requisition or work request)
• Success—Indicates the action was successfully completed (e.g., clicking Submit successfully
created a requisition)
• Information—Displays informational text that is not the result of a user’s action (e.g., a system
message)
Keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts are keys or key combinations for functions within Infor EAM.
Function Shortcut
My Account CTRL+F9
Help CTRL+H
About CTRL+F10
Log Out CTRL+Q
Opens first listing in the Main Menu CTRL+M
Function Shortcut
Next record CTRL+Down Arrow
Previous record CTRL+Up Arrow
Function Shortcut
Copy record CTRL+F or F4
New record CTRL+N (not supported for Chrome)
or F6
Function Shortcut
Save layout CTRL+S
Open group selection CTRL+G
Switch to preview mode CTRL+W
Switch to screen designer mode ALT+E
Exit screen designer mode CTRL+I
Right-click options
The system includes two types of right-click menu options: system-level and screen-level. Right-click
menu options are available when inserting or updating records.
Screen-level options
Screen-level options are displayed at the top of the right-click menu. The screen-level options change
based on which screen is being accessed. A right-click menu option is displayed for each button that
appears on the screen.
System-level options
System-level options are displayed at the bottom of the right-click menu. System-level options are
common functions that are available on all screens, such as audit trail.
Fields
A field is a single topic of information in a record. Required fields (noted by a shaded color) must be
completed for a record to be valid.
Updating fields
Right-click in a field within a grid to update selected rows. Updating fields in Infor EAM follows the
standard Windows controls for selecting rows:
• CTRL+CLICK: Individually selects and unselects rows
• SHIFT+CLICK: Selects all rows between the clicked row and the most recently selected row.
Shift+Click also unselects all rows that do not meet the criteria above.
The header at the top of the form will not update for subsequent selections; it will always show the first
record selected. Therefore, if the List View page has multiple records selected, the system remains
on the record displayed in the header. The multi-selection is lost when you leave the page.
If you click off the record that is currently being displayed in the header, the system displays the top-most
selected record in the header.
Note: The update fields feature is available only on the following List View pages: Work Orders, Parts,
Equipment, Requisitions, Purchase Orders, and User ID.
To update fields:
Note: Not all fields are available for update in the right-click options. If a field is Protected or Hidden,
it is not included in the list. In addition, some fields with associated special business rules, i.e.,
prompting the user with a yes/no question, are excluded.
Hidden fields
The system only displays certain fields by default upon delivery. The user documentation includes
steps and procedures for all fields, even if they are hidden upon delivery. Your system administrator
has the rights to hide and unhide fields as necessary.
Drop-down list Click the drop-down list, and then select the value
from the displayed list.
Note: Begin typing in the field to quickly narrow
the list of selections.
Equipment Lookup Enter the value or click Lookup. The system dis-
plays the Equipment Lookup popup.
Task Lookup Enter the value or click Lookup. The system dis-
plays the Tasks popup.
Note: The system displays the task instructions
for the selected task.
Bin Lookup Enter the value or click Lookup. The system dis-
plays either the Bins popup or the Bin Lookup
popup depending on the calling form.
If the system displays the Bins popup, apply a filter
as necessary. Select a record from the Bins list,
and then click OK.
If the system displays the Bin Lookup popup, select
to view All Bins, Bins for Part, or Unassociated
Bins. Select a record from the Bins list, and then
click OK.
Comments Enter text directly into the comment field. Use the
scroll bar to scroll through a comment that extends
beyond the provided area.
2 Select the month and year from the drop-down lists on the top of the calendar.
Note: Click Previous Month next to the month or year drop-down lists to select the month or year
previous to the displayed value.
Click Next Month beside the month or year drop-down lists to select the month or year following
the displayed value.
3 Click the desired date. The system automatically populates the selected date in the field.
2 Select the month and year from the drop-down lists on the top of the calendar.
Note: Click next to the month or year drop-down lists to select the month or year previous to the
displayed value.
Click next to the month or year drop-down lists to select the month or year following the displayed
value.
3 Click the desired date, and then enter the desired time for Hour and Minute. The system automatically
populates the selected date and time in the field.
Note: Enter the first few characters of the value for which you are searching, and then click . The
system displays all values beginning with the characters you entered.
If you entered the first few characters of the piece of equipment and only one equipment record that
begins with those characters exists in the database, the system automatically displays the equipment
record on the Structure page. The system does not display any equipment records until you conduct
a search.
1 From any form containing user defined fields, click the Record View tab.
2 Enter information in the fields as necessary.
3 Click Save Record.
Note: Fields types available are text, date/time, number, and checkbox.
Lists
The system often displays information in tabular format, such as list view pages, the Asset Warranties
page containing a list of items, and any lookup. Select a row in a list to view record details or select
data from a list view. You can also quickly sort, filter, re-arrange or resize fields if the system defaults
do not suit your needs.
Note: The system applies the filter in addition to any filter criteria specified in a Dataspy that is applied
to the list.
Note: To filter multiple fields simultaneously on the list view, click Grid Menu, and then select Show
Filter Row. The system displays the filter row on the list view. Select the operators for multiple fields,
click Filter Menu, and then click Run Filter Menu. The system displays the records matching the filter
criteria.
To define quick filters on forms:
2 Filter—Select the field on which to filter from the first drop-down list.
Note: For forms that include custom fields, the custom fields are displayed at the end of the filter
drop-down list. Only custom fields associated to the entity of the screen AND associated to a class
with an organization for which the user has query rights will be displayed. If more than one entity
exists for the screen, then only the primary entity will be used.
The field being queried, which is the first field of the three, defaults to the first column in the grid
unless the first column is a non-data bound select checkbox. To change the default quick filter,
modify the grid layout then save the changes. See "Saving the list layout" on page 57. The operator
of the quick filter, which is the second field of the three, can default to Starts With or Contains. Set
the value of the QUICKDEF install parameter to S or C.
3 Select an operator from the second drop-down list. See the following table for operator options:
Operator Definition
Starts With Search for items with a description that begins
with the entered value.
Equals Search for items with a value equal to the entered
value.
Does Not Equal Search for items with a description that does not
equal the entered value.
Contains Search for items with a description that contains
the entered value.
Does Not Contain Search for items with a description that does not
contain the entered value.
Ends With Search for items with a description that ends with
the entered value.
Is Empty Search for items with a description that has no
entered value.
Is Not Empty Search for items with a description that has any
entered value.
Operator Definition
Less Than Search for items with a value less than the en-
tered value.
Greater Than Search for items with a value greater than the
entered value.
Less Than or Equals Search for items with a value less than or equal
to the entered value.
Greater Than or Equals Search for items with a value greater than or
equal to the entered value.
Selected Search for items where the checkbox is selected.
This applies to checkbox fields only.
Not Selected Search for items where the checkbox is not se-
lected. This applies to checkbox fields only.
Either Selected or Not Selected Search for items where the checkbox is either
selected or not selected. This applies to checkbox
fields only.
5 Click Run.
3 Select an operator from the second drop-down list. See the following table for operator options:
Operator Definition
Starts With Search for items with a description that begins
with the entered value.
Equals Search for items with a value equal to the entered
value.
Does Not Equal Search for items with a description that does not
equal the entered value.
Contains Search for items with a description that contains
the entered value.
Does Not Contain Search for items with a description that does not
contain the entered value.
Ends With Search for items with a description that ends with
the entered value.
Is Empty Search for items with a description that has no
entered value.
Is Not Empty Search for items with a description that has any
entered value.
Less Than Search for items with a value less than the en-
tered value.
Greater Than Search for items with a value greater than the
entered value.
Less Than or Equals Search for items with a value less than or equal
to the entered value.
Greater Than or Equals Search for items with a value greater than or
equal to the entered value.
7 Click ( or ) to add a parenthesis to the highlighted row. These parentheses are used when running
a query to group statements together when mixing AND and OR statements.
8 Enter additional conditions by which to filter as necessary.
9 Default Dataspy—Select to make the Dataspy the default Dataspy for the form.
10 Click Run.
Note: You can also press ENTER to display the records matching the filter criteria.
Sorting lists
Sort a list of records by any column in the list in ascending or descending order.
To sort lists:
4 Release the mouse button. The system arranges the column in the specified order.
Note: To save the order and sizes of the columns, click Save Record in the upper-right part of the
list view.
Copying records
Use the Copy Record toolbar button to copy information from one record to another record within the
same form. Copying a record creates an editable copy of the record that contains the same base data.
The Copy Record button is only available on forms that have List View and Record View pages, and
it is only enabled on the List View and Record View pages.
Note: To copy a record, you must have insert rights for the organization of the record you are copying.
To copy records:
Exporting records
Export records from to a Microsoft Excel file to extract information from the database without making
an external connection, e.g., from outside of the system, to the database. The file can be viewed using
Microsoft Excel.
To export records:
1 Open the form for which to display the total record count.
2 Click Show Total Record Count. The system displays a message indicating the total number of
records.
3 Click OK.
Associating documents
Associate documents with records using the Documents page and specify whether the system copies
and/or prints document attachments linked to work orders. For example, a technician who created an
equipment record needs to attach a document to the record, e.g., schematics, drawings, warranties,
etc.
The copy and print options displayed on the Documents popup change dynamically depending on the
record to which you are linking a document. Documents can be of any file type. The documents being
associated must have already been created using the Documents form.
Note: You can only print document attachments that are Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
(.PDF) files for work orders.
To associate documents:
• Print with Report—Select to enable the system to print document attachments when you print
reports. If selected, the system prints the .PDF attachments from the report.
Print with Report is not displayed for document attachments associated with assets, systems,
positions, work orders, parts, purchase orders, or customer requests.
Note: Although the Print with Report checkbox is available on all entities, only some reports
support the Print Attachments option.
Note: To view a document before you save the record, click View Document.
To upload a document after you save the document association, click Upload Document.See
"Uploading documents" on page 60.
Uploading documents
Upload a document from your local system to the web server. The system uploads the document and
creates a new document record. If the new document record is created from the Documents tab of a
form, the system associates the new document record to the selected record on the specific form. For
example, a foreman may create a piece of equipment and attach a document such as a drawing, a
warranty, or other schematic to the equipment by uploading the document to the equipment record.
To upload documents:
Entering comments
Enter comments for most modules in the system using the Comments page. You can also specify
whether the comment should print with the specified record.
Access the Add/Edit Comments page via the Add/Edit Comments link on certain forms. The procedures
for entering comments are the same, regardless of how you access the Add/Edit Comments page.
Adding comments
Enter comments on records.
To add comments:
1 From any form which supports comments, select the record for which to add comments, and then
choose one of the following options:
• Using the Comments tab—Click the Comments tab. The system displays the Comments page.
Click on Add/Edit Comments. At the bottom of the page, the system expands the Add/Edit
Comments section with HTML Editor Capabilities.
• Using the Add/Edit Comments link—Click Add/Edit Comments for a selected record on the
details tab of a form that supports adding comments, i.e., select a work order record, and then
click the Activities tab of the Work Orders form. The system displays the Comments page.
Click on Add/Edit Comments. At the bottom of the page, the system expands the Add/Edit
Comments section with HTML Editor Capabilities.
Note: Set HTMLCOMM to ON to view the HTML Editor toolbar. Contact your system administrator
for more information on installation parameters.
Crystal Clear Reports and Cognos Reports do not support HTML formatting. For Cognos Reports,
the system will display comments as text without formatting.
The Work Order Quick Close and Batch WO Update forms do not support adding HTML formatted
comments.
To access spell check functionality within the HTML Editor, download and install iSpell at www.
iespell.com.
4 Print with Document—Select to indicate that the comments print on the associated report.
5 Click Save.
Note: To save a comment, click Save Record. The system saves the comment.
To clear a comment, click Clear Comment.
To delete a comment, click Delete Comment.
Modifying comments
Modify comments on records.
Note: The Work Order Quick Close form does not support modifying HTML formatted comments.
To modify comments:
1 From any form which supports comments, select the record for which to modify comments, and
then choose one of the following options:
• Using the Comments tab—Click the Comments tab. The system displays the Comments page.
Click the comment to modify. At the bottom of the page, the system expands the Add/Edit
Comments section with HTML Editor Capabilities.
• Using the Add/Edit Comments link—Click Add/Edit Comments. The system displays the
Comments page. Click Expand/Collapse on Add/Edit Comments. At the bottom of the page,
the system expands the Add/Edit Comments section with HTML Editor Capabilities.
Note: To view or edit comments entered in another language, select the desired Language. The
system displays that language’s Comments. If no comments were entered for the selected language,
the system displays the comments for the user’s default language.
6 Click Close.
1 From any form associated with an entity, select the record you wish to translate, and then click the
Translations tab.
2 Select the description to translate.
3 Translated Description—Enter the translated description for the language. The system automatically
selects Translated.
4 Translated—Select to indicate that you have entered a translated description.
5 Click Submit.
Associating addresses
Associate mail, invoice, and delivery addresses with records and functions. Enter contact information
such as address, telephone, fax, and e-mail address.
To associate addresses:
1 From any form associated with an entity, select the record with which to associate or edit the address,
and then click the Addresses tab.
2 Click Add Address.
3 Address Type—Select one of the following options:
• Mail—Select to create a mailing address.
• Invoice—Select to create an invoice address.
• Delivery—Select to create a delivery address.
Associating parts
Associate parts with records and functions. For example, associate specific parts to an asset, position,
system, or location. You can also modify the quantity of an existing part or remove a part from the Parts
Associated page.
Note: Define parts on the Parts form.
To associate parts:
1 From any form associated with an entity, select the record with which to associate parts, and then
click the Parts Associated tab.
2 Click Add Part.
3 Part—Enter the part to associate with the record.
The system automatically populates the part description, Part Org.,Primary Manufacturer, Primary
Manufacturer Part Number and Component Location.
Note: Click Stock Info to view stock information.
Click Substitutes to view alternate part information.
Click Suppliers to view supplier information for the part.
Click Manufacturers to view manufacturer information.
Click Where Usedto view information on where the part is used.
4 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system automatically populates Condition.
5 Quantity—Enter the number of parts to associate with the record. This number must be greater
than zero.
6 Comments—Enter additional comments as necessary.
7 Click Submit. The system updates the Parts Associated list.
Note: To remove a part, select the part to remove, and then click Remove Part. The system updates
the Parts Associated list.
Dataspy
A Dataspy is a named, predefined view of a list of records or set of data that can be used on any page,
lookup, or data area that contains that same list of records.
A Dataspy consists of the following four basic components:
• Filter—Contains the conditional statements that make up a filter. For example, a Dataspy might
filter for all requisitions that have a Status "equal to" Approved, and a Creation Date "greater than"
last Friday.
• Sort—Specifies the order in which the records should be sorted. For example, a Dataspy might sort
the requisitions so that the most recently created requisitions are displayed at the top of the list in
descending order.
• Layout—Specifies the fields that are displayed in the list and the order in which those fields should
be displayed. For example, a Dataspy might specify that the Requisition Description column is
displayed to the left of the Requisition Number column and that the Storeroom field is not displayed
in the list.
• Advanced—Specifies an additional Where clause used for filtering data. The Where clause is
appended to the Where clause generated by the Dataspy Filter.
Note: You can also specify column order by arranging the columns in a list view.
If a custom field saved in a Dataspy is ever unassociated, then that custom field will no longer appear
in the Dataspy nor will it impact the Dataspy. If the same custom field is ever associated again, the
relationship in the Dataspy will automatically be restored.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
Note: You can select a different Dataspy name from the drop-down list on the Dataspy editor header.
3 Click Save. The system applies the Dataspy to the list view from which the Dataspy editor was
launched.
Note: You can only edit and save Dataspies that you created. If you edit a system-delivered Dataspy,
the system goes into Copy mode.
1 Open an existing Dataspy from a list view, and then click New.
2 Enter a title for the Dataspy in the text box.
3 Edit the Dataspy criteria as necessary.
Note: Click Run to apply the Dataspy to the list without saving changes.
Click Cancel New to cancel the creation of a new Dataspy and return to the previous view.
Select Default Dataspy to save the selected Dataspy as the default.
Note: You can also press ENTER to display the records matching the filter criteria.
4 Click Save. The system applies the Dataspy to the list view from which the Dataspy editor was
launched.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Copy.
3 Modify the title for the Dataspy in the text box as necessary.
4 Edit the Dataspy criteria as necessary.
Note: Click Cancel Copy to cancel the creation of a new Dataspy and return to the previous view.
Select Default Dataspy to save the selected Dataspy as the default.
5 Click Save. The system applies the Dataspy to the list view from which the Dataspy editor was
launched.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Delete.
Note: You can only delete Dataspies that you created.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Filter from the left-hand column of the Dataspy editor.
3 Select a field on which to filter from the first drop-down list.
4 Select an operator from the second drop-down list. See the following table for operator options:
Operator Definition
Starts With Search for items with a description that begins
with the entered value.
Equals Search for items with a value equal to the entered
value.
Does Not Equal Search for items with a description that does not
equal the entered value.
Contains Search for items with a description that contains
the entered value.
Does Not Contain Search for items with a description that does not
contain the entered value.
Ends With Search for items with a description that ends with
the entered value.
Operator Definition
Is Empty Search for items with a description that has no
entered value.
Is Not Empty Search for items with a description that has any
entered value.
Less Than Search for items with a value less than the en-
tered value.
Greater Than Search for items with a value greater than the
entered value.
Less Than or Equals Search for items with a value less than or equal
to the entered value.
Greater Than or Equals Search for items with a value greater than or
equal to the entered value.
Selected Search for items where the checkbox is selected.
This applies to checkbox fields only.
Not Selected Search for items where the checkbox is not se-
lected. This applies to checkbox fields only.
6 Click the AND/OR hyperlink to select one of the following join operators:
• Include records that include all joined conditions—Select AND.
• Include records that contain one or the other condition—Select OR.
7 Click ( or ) to add a parenthesis to the highlighted row. These parentheses are used when running
a query to group statements together when mixing AND and OR statements.
8 Enter additional conditions by which to filter as necessary.
Note: Click Add Line to add additional lines to the filter.
To remove a filter line, choose the blank selection from the first drop-down list.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Sort from the left-hand column of the Dataspy editor.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Layout from the left-hand column of the Dataspy editor.
3 Available Fields lists all fields that are available but not visible in the list of records, while Visible
Fields lists all fields displayed as columns in the list of records.
4 See the following table when selecting or ordering fields:
Function Procedure
Add a field Select the field in Available Fields, and then
click Add a field.
Remove a field Select the field in Visible Fields, and then click
Remove a field.
Add all fields Click Add all fields.
Remove all fields Click Remove all fields.
Function Procedure
Reorder fields Select the field in Visible Fields, and then click
either Reorder up or Reorder down to move
the field up or down in the order.
5 Number of data rows to retrieve—Enter the number of rows that the system will retrieve in the list
view before it downloads another set of rows.
6 Click the field to select, and then see the table above when selecting or ordering fields.
7 Click Save.
1 On any list view page, select the Dataspy to edit from the drop-down list on the filter bar, and then
click Edit.
2 Click Advanced from the left-hand column of the Dataspy editor.
3 Where Clause—Enter an additional Where clause as necessary. The Where clause is appended
to the Where clause generated by the Dataspy Filter. The Where clause will be appended with an
"AND" statement if a Filter has been specified.
4 Click Test Where Clause. If the SQL statement compiles without error, the system displays a
confirmation message.
Note: Click Display SQL Statement to view the entire SQL statement. The SQL Statement field
is read-only.
3 Select the inbox entry for which to modify the display sequence, and then enter a new value for
Sequence Number.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Close.
Note: The system automatically queries for and retrieves the records associated with the KPI entry
to the called screen if you defined a Dataspy for the called screen when defining the KPI entry.
The equipment module controls the organization and use of material equipment. Track equipment and
their associated costs by defining them as assets, positions, systems, or locations; create equipment
profiles to use as templates when defining new equipment records, and place equipment in hierarchical
relationships. Define equipment records as vehicles, linear equipment, and/or VMRS equipment to
thoroughly track information pertinent to each distinct equipment record.
In addition, define meter information, and then associate a logical meter with a piece of equipment.
Meter readings allow you to track equipment usage and more effectively manage preventive
maintenance.
Manage equipment warranties, file claims when necessary, and schedule preventive maintenance to
safeguard against costly equipment failures. Finally, track the value of your equipment’s depreciation
expense.
Understanding equipment
Pieces of equipment are entities for which you store data and create work orders. Equipment can be
of many different types, but the four main types are locations, systems, positions, and assets.
• Locations —Physical locations of systems, positions, and assets. For example, a pumping system
is located in Room 104.
• Systems —Collections of positions and/or assets that work together so that when one part goes
down, all parts are affected. For example, if a pump stops working, you must turn off the entire water
line to repair it.
• Positions —Functions performed by a general kind of asset. For example, the pump that moves
water from one tank to another is a functional position, which can be filled by any number of actual,
physical pumps (assets). Positions are also called "functional positions."
• Assets —Generally, physical objects. Assets are the base unit of equipment information and the
smallest tracking unit for capital investments.
Locations, systems, positions, and assets form a hierarchy of equipment information, with locations at
the top of the hierarchy and assets at the bottom. Data is shared among the levels of the equipment
hierarchy. For example, data for a work order performed on an asset is also stored in the position,
system, and location equipment to which the asset belongs. This data sharing allows you to track assets
and their performance in detail and under differing conditions, to evaluate the performance of entire
systems, and to assess the effect that locations and positions have on systems and assets.
For example, you might have a pump (PU-9476-96) working in a functional position (PUMP-03) in a
system on the first floor (FLOOR-01). The pump fails, and you remove it from the system to repair it
and place another pump (PU-4854-93) in that position. The work order data for the failed pump is stored
not only with the pump equipment (PU-9476-96) but also with the position equipment (PUMP-03) and
the location equipment (FLOOR-01). When the pump is repaired, you place it in a different functional
position (PUMP-02) on the second floor (FLOOR-02). After the pump is in that position for a while, you
can compare
• the performance of PU-9476-96 to the performance of PU-4854-93 in position PUMP-03 in location
FLOOR-01 and
• the performance of PU-9476-96 in position PUMP-03 at location FLOOR-01 to its performance in
position PUMP-02 at location FLOOR-02.
to a pump). Cause codes identify what caused the component or type of component to fail, i.e., the
root cause of the problem. Failure codes identify the reason the equipment failed. Finally, problem
codes identify the observed equipment failure (e.g., a leak from a faucet or the overheating of a pump).
To set up closing codes:
8 Enable for Work Orders—Select to display this closing codes for work orders.
9 Enable for Part Failures—Select to display this closing code for part failures.
10 Click Save Record.
Setting up departments
A department is the center or area that is responsible for the maintenance of equipment, such as an
asset, a position, a system, or a location. The department coordinates the work, assigns the appropriate
crew, plans the work, and approves respective work orders.
When defining equipment, assign it to a department. The department can be modified if needed on
work orders. When creating work orders (for maintenance or repairs to equipment), the system rolls
up the associated costs to the department of the work order. Set up a default store for each department
as well as a default supervisor. When reserving parts for a work order, the system stores them in the
specified store.
Note: You cannot delete departments if they have already been used elsewhere in the system.
To set up departments:
Setting up warranties
Define warranty documents to set up supplier and/or manufacturer information for the warranty and
enter general warranty information. Specify the duration of the warranty and the percentages indicating
how much the warranty covers for different material and labor expenses.
You may view documents previously associated with the warranty. Click View Document to open and
view the document.
To set up warranties:
6 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the component associated with the vehicle.
The system automatically populates Description based on the System Level, Assembly Level,
and Component Level combination.
Note: You cannot enter a Component Levelunless you entered an Assembly Level.
7 Click Submit.
9 Category—Enter the category of the equipment to define with this profile. The system automatically
populates Manufacturer and custom fields based on the information you entered on the Categories
form.
10 GIS Profile—Select to flag the profile as a GIS profile.
Note: Once you create a GIS profile, associate it with a GIS layer. See "Defining preferences for
the creation of Infor EAM equipment (ESRI)" in Chapter 6 GIS Integration of the System
Administrator’s Guide. GIS and Infor EAM use the GIS profile and layer information to create
equipment records in the respective systems.
11 Equipment Value—Enter the value of the equipment to define with this profile.
12 Meter Unit—Enter the meter unit of the equipment to define with this profile.
13 Manufacturer—Enter the manufacturer of the equipment to define with this profile.
14 Revision—Enter the revision of the equipment to define with this profile.
15 Model—Enter the model of the equipment to define with this profile.
16 Part—Enter the part code of the equipment to define with this profile. The system automatically
populates Part Org.
17 Store—Enter the store of the equipment to define with this profile.
18 Variable 1, Variable 2, Variable 3, Variable 4, Variable 5, and Variable 6—Enter any additional
information to be included on the equipment to define with this profile.
19 Click Save Record.
Defining equipment
Define your organization’s assets, positions, systems, and locations as equipment.
Note: You can only delete equipment records that do not have histories or other associated records.
If you have purchased the GIS integration, automatically define ESRI GIS features as you define Infor
EAM assets, positions, or systems. See Defining GIS features (Infor EAM) Chapter 10 GIS integration.
In addition, view equipment on a GIS map from the Assets, Positions, or Systems forms. See Viewing
GIS maps from equipment records (Infor EAM) in Chapter 10 GIS integration for more information.
As you define an equipment record, specify that it is subject to the United States Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) Current Good Manufacturing Practices (cGMP) standards as necessary. Depending
on your system configuration, the system creates electronic records and/or requires signatures for any
work performed on cGMP equipment. Contact your system administrator for more information.
Create a large number of identical equipment records quickly with equipment profiles. See "Defining
equipment using profiles" on page 97.
Define linear equipment records for equipment that spans a length of space, e.g., a bridge. See "Defining
linear equipment" on page 96.
Define Vehicle Maintenance Reporting System (VMRS) equipment as necessary. See "Defining VMRS
equipment" on page 97.
Define equipment before associating parts or permits with that equipment or before setting up parent/child
relationships. See "Defining equipment hierarchies" on page 106.
Note: When the selected equipment is dependent on a parent, the equipment inherits its location from
that parent. Equipment cannot be dependent on more than one parent.
When equipment is directly associated with a location, the relationship is automatically a dependent
one.
Multiple system parents can exist for assets, positions, and systems; therefore, this relationship cannot
be established or maintained on the Record View pages of these forms.
Because equipment records are central to all functionality, the system allows you to perform a number
of functions directly from the Assets, Positions, or Systems forms. Right-click to access the functionality.
See the following table, which displays the functionality available from the Assets, Positions, and
Systems forms and directs you to the section and chapter within this guide that provides instructions
for use:
Defining assets
Define your organization’s assets as equipment.
Note: The installation parameter ASSETASS determines whether assets are recognized at purchase
order creation or upon receipt. See "Defining installation parameters".
To define assets:
5 Department—Enter the asset’s department. The system automatically populates GIS ID, Layer,
Location X, Location Y, Map, and Map Org.
6 Type—Select the equipment type.
7 Status—Select the asset status. See the following list for default status values:
• Awaiting purchase—Interacts with the purchasing module. If assets are recognized at purchase
order creation, then an asset must be created at time of purchase order generation. The
ASSETASS installation parameter determines when assets are recognized: at receipt (R) or at
purchase order creation (P).
• In store—Reserved for new assets received into a firm’s store. Select the Status value In store
only when defining an asset in the inventory store.
• Installed—Assigned when an asset is in place and operating within the business organization.
• Withdrawn—Assigned when an asset is no longer available for use. This status is not available
during initial asset creation. The system automatically populates Withdrawal Date.
Note: If you enter a category for which calibration data has been defined, the system copies the
calibration and test point data to the asset.
23 Withdrawal Date—Enter the date on which the equipment is withdrawn from service.
24 Change Notice—Enter the change notice for the asset.
Note: If you enter or change the value for Change Notice, the system will change State to CN
Pending if State is not populated. If you clear Change Notice, the State changes to Good.
44 Vehicle Status—Select the status of the vehicle. Enter the following Call Center Details:
45 Calendar Group—Enter the calendar group for the asset. The system automatically populates
Calendar Group Org.
46 Penalty Factor—Enter the penalty factor for the asset.
47 Service Delivery Matrix—Select to restrict work orders for this equipment to a pre-defined service
delivery matrix.
Note: Service Delivery Matrix must be selected for Service Problem Code Validation on the
Call Center Setup form.
56 Equipment Length, Equip. Length UOM, Linear Ref. UOM, Ref. Precision, and Geographical
Ref.—Enter the linear equipment information. Enter the following Facility Condition Index (FCI)
Details:
Note: The values of the FCI details should be entered based on the planning budget and investment
figures from a third party audit.
57 Cost of Needed Repairs—Enter the cost of necessary repairs. The system automatically populates
the currency, and defaults Eligible for Energy Star Label to unselected.
58 Replacement Value—Enter the current replacement value for the equipment. The system
automatically populates the currency.
59 Facility Condition Index—Enter the resultant FCI based on the maintenance details. Cost of
Needed Repairs/Current Replacement Value=FCI
60 Utility Bill Level—Select to mark the asset as having capabilities to record utility bills.
61 GAS Tracked—Select to set the equipment as GAS (Global Asset Sustainability) Tracked.
Note: If data exists on the Design Consumptionor Actual Consumption forms, the equipment
must remain as GAS Tracked.
62 Floor Area—Enter the floor area, and then enter the unit of measure for the floor area.
63 Estimated Revenue—Enter the estimated revenue the piece of equipment can generate.
64 Region—Enter the region for the equipment. The system automatically populates Region Org.
65 Primary Use—Enter the primary use for the equipment.
66 Year Built—Enter the year built for the equipment.
67 Service Life (years)—Enter the service life of the equipment.
68 Lock Reliability Ranking Values—Select to lock the reliability ranking values for the equipment
on the Reliability Survey tab of the Equipment screen.
Note: If Lock Reliability Ranking Values is selected, the system will not allow the user to modify
the reliability survey answers and calculate reliability ranking values for the equipment. The system
also prevents the selection of equipment for update on the Batch Update Reliability Ranking
Values form.
69 Reliability Ranking—Enter the reliability ranking code for the equipment. The system automatically
populates Reliability Ranking Index, Reliability Ranking Score, Reliability Ranking Values Out
of Sync, Reliability Ranking Values Last Calculated, Reliability Survey Last Updated, and
Reliability Ranking Setup Last Updated, after answering the reliability survey.
70 Target Power Factor—Enter the target power factor that has been determined for the asset.
71 Target Peak Demand (W)—Enter the target peak demand in watts for the asset.
72 Start Billing Period—Enter the date that the billing period begins. The Peak Demand measurements
are relevant after this date.
Note: The Peak Demand alert will update this field based on the specified Bill Every, but manual
changes may be required depending on the actual utility invoices received.
73 Bill Every—Enter the length of the interval of time to pass before the system expects the next bill,
and then select the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
74 Eff. Loss 1% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 1 percent imbalance.
75 Eff. Loss 2% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 2 percent imbalance.
76 Eff. Loss 3% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 3 percent imbalance.
77 Eff. Loss 4% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 4 percent imbalance.
78 Eff. Loss 5% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 5 percent imbalance.
79 Performance Manager—Enter the energy performance manager who is responsible for the
equipment.
80 Electric Sub-meter Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time in minutes indicating how
frequently the electric sub-meter is read.
81 Electric Usage Threshold—Enter the current in amps above which the equipment is considered
running (on).
82 Click Save Record. If a review has been performed on the Safety tab, the system automatically
populates Safety Date Review Required and Safety Reviewed By. If a review has been performed
on the Permits tab, the system automatically populates Permit Date Review Required and Permit
Reviewed By. If a review has been performed on the LOTO tab, the system automatically populates
LOTO Date Review Required and LOTO Reviewed By. The system automatically populates
Equipment Configuration, Equipment Configuration Org., and Equipment Configuration
Revision.
Defining positions
Define your organization’s functional positions as equipment.
To define positions:
5 Department—Enter the position’s department. The system automatically populates GIS ID, Layer,
Location X, Location Y, Map, and Map Org.
6 Type—Select the equipment type.
7 Status—The system defaults Status to Installed; this value cannot be changed. Enter the following
Equipment Details:
8 Class—Enter the class of the position.
9 Category—Enter the position’s category.
Note: If you enter a category for which calibration data has been defined, the system copies the
calibration and test point data to the position.
43 Cost of Needed Repairs—Enter the cost of necessary repairs. The system automatically populates
the currency.
44 Replacement Value—Enter the current replacement value for the equipment. The system
automatically populates the currency.
45 Facility Condition Index—Enter the resultant FCI based on the maintenance details. Cost of
Needed Repairs/Current Replacement Value=FCI
46 Utility Bill Level—Select to mark the asset as having capabilities to record utility bills.
47 GAS Tracked—Select to set the equipment as GAS (Global Asset Sustainability) Tracked.
Note: If data exists on the Design Consumptionor Actual Consumption forms, the equipment
must remain as GAS Tracked.
48 Facility— Select this checkbox to add the facility record in the ENX Suite list of facilities.
Note: Facility is available for Oracle installations only.
49 Floor Area—Enter the floor area, and then enter the unit of measure for the floor area.
50 Estimated Revenue—Enter the estimated revenue the piece of equipment can generate.
51 Region—Enter the region for the equipment. The system automatically populates Region Org.
52 Country—Select the country.
Note: Country is available for Oracle installations only.
57 Reliability Ranking—Enter the reliability ranking code for the equipment. The system automatically
populates Reliability Ranking Index, Reliability Ranking Score, Reliability Ranking Values Out
of Sync, Reliability Ranking Values Last Calculated, Reliability Survey Last Updated, and
Reliability Ranking Setup Last Updated, after answering the reliability survey.
58 Target Power Factor—Enter the target power factor that has been determined for the asset.
59 Target Peak Demand (W)—Enter the target peak demand in watts for the asset.
60 Start Billing Period—Enter the date that the billing period begins. The Peak Demand measurements
are relevant after this date.
Note: The Peak Demand alert will update this field based on the specified Bill Every, but manual
changes may be required depending on the actual utility invoices received.
61 Bill Every—Enter the length of the interval of time to pass before the system expects the next bill,
and then select the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
62 Eff. Loss 1% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 1 percent imbalance.
63 Eff. Loss 2% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 2 percent imbalance.
64 Eff. Loss 3% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 3 percent imbalance.
65 Eff. Loss 4% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 4 percent imbalance.
66 Eff. Loss 5% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 5 percent imbalance.
67 Performance Manager—Enter the energy performance manager who is responsible for the
equipment
68 Electric Sub-meter Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time in minutes indicating how
frequently the electric sub-meter is read.
69 Electric Usage Threshold—Enter the current in amps above which the equipment is considered
running (on).
70 Click Save Record. If a review has been performed on the Safety tab, the system automatically
populates Safety Date Review Required and Safety Reviewed By. If a review has been performed
on the Permits tab, the system automatically populates Permit Date Review Required and Permit
Reviewed By. If a review has been performed on the LOTO tab, the system automatically populates
LOTO Date Review Required and LOTO Reviewed By. The system automatically populates
Equipment Configuration, Equipment Configuration Org., and Equipment Configuration
Revision.
Note: Click Linear Equipment Search to locate linear equipment for the selected position.
Defining systems
Define your organization’s systems as equipment.
To define systems:
Note: If the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to YES, the system automatically assigns the
system number if the System code is not entered.
5 Department—Enter the system’s department. The system automatically populates GIS ID, Layer,
Location X, Location Y, Map, and Map Org.
6 Type—Select the equipment type.
7 Status—The system defaults the Status to Installed; this value cannot be changed. Enter the
following Equipment Details:
8 Class—Enter the class of the system.
9 Category—Enter the system’s category.
Note: If you enter a category for which calibration data has been defined, the system copies the
calibration and test point data to the system.
31 Variable 1, Variable 2, Variable 3, Variable 4, Variable 5, and Variable 6—Enter the variables of
the system. Enter the following Call Center Details:
32 Calendar Group—Enter the calendar group for the system. The system automatically populates
Calendar Group Org.
33 Penalty Factor—Enter the penalty factor for the system.
34 Minimum Deduction/Currency—Enter the minimum deduction allowed.
Enter the following Hierarchy:
35 Location—Enter the location of the system.
36 Equipment Length, Equip. Length UOM, Linear Ref. UOM, Ref. Precision, and Geographical
Ref.—Enter the linear equipment information. See "Defining linear equipment" on page 96
Enter the following Facility Condition Index (FCI) Details:
Note: The values of the FCI details should be entered based on the planning budget and investment
figures from a third party audit.
37 Cost of Needed Repairs—Enter the cost of necessary repairs. The system automatically populates
the currency.
38 Replacement Value—Enter the current replacement value for the equipment. The system
automatically populates the currency.
39 Facility Condition Index—Enter the resultant FCI based on the maintenance details.
Cost of Needed Repairs/Current Replacement Value=FCI
40 Utility Bill Level—Select to mark the asset as having capabilities to record utility bills.
41 GAS Tracked—Select to set the equipment as GAS (Global Asset Sustainability) Tracked.
Note: If data exists on the Design Consumptionor Actual Consumption forms, the equipment
must remain as GAS Tracked.
42 Floor Area—Enter the floor area, and then enter the unit of measure for the floor area.
43 Estimated Revenue—Enter the estimated revenue the piece of equipment can generate.
44 Region—Enter the region for the equipment. The system automatically populates Region Org.
45 Primary Use—Enter the primary use for the equipment.
46 Year Built—Enter the year built for the equipment.
47 Service Life (years)—Enter the service life of the equipment.
48 Lock Reliability Ranking Values—Select to lock the reliability ranking values for the equipment
on the Reliability Survey tab of the Equipment screen.
Note: If Lock Reliability Ranking Values is selected, the system will not allow the user to modify
the reliability survey answers and calculate reliability ranking values for the equipment. The system
also prevents the selection of equipment for update on the Batch Update Reliability Ranking
Values form.
49 Reliability Ranking—Enter the reliability ranking code for the equipment. The system automatically
populates Reliability Ranking Idex, Reliability Ranking Score, Reliability Ranking Values Out
of Sync, Reliability Ranking Values Last Calculated, Reliability Survey Last Updated, and
Reliability Ranking Setup Last Updated, after answering the reliability survey.
50 Click Save Record. If a review has been performed on the Safety tab, the system automatically
populates Safety Date Review Required and Safety Reviewed By. If a review has been performed
on the Permits tab, the system automatically populates Permit Date Review Required and Permit
Reviewed By. If a review has been performed on the LOTO tab, the system automatically populates
LOTO Date Review Required and LOTO Reviewed By. The system automatically populates
Equipment Configuration, Equipment Configuration Org., and Equipment Configuration
Revision.
Defining locations
Locations are the top level of the equipment hierarchy and, like other equipment, can have parents
and children with many sublevels. For example, a facility can be a parent to children such as wings,
floors, and levels.
Locations can also mean two different things. One location can tell you a piece of equipment’s physical
location, e.g., the pump in Boiler Room 2. Another location can be equipment itself, e.g., Boiler Room
2. Keep in mind that equipment keeps its location until it is moved; in other words, it can only be in one
place at one time.
Note: Set up parent locations before setting up child locations. You cannot delete parent locations if
child locations exist.
To define locations:
on the Permits tab, the system automatically populates Permit Date Review Required and Permit
Reviewed By. If a review has been performed on the LOTO tab, the system automatically populates
LOTO Date Review Required and LOTO Reviewed By.
27 OEM Site/System ID—Enter the site and/or system identification for service companies and original
equipment manufacturer for the asset.
28 Vendor—Enter the vendor.
29 Coverage Type—Select the maintenance coverage type for the asset. Select Calendar to indicate
that the warranty is based on number of days used or Usage to indicate that the warranty is based
on actual usage.
30 X Coordinate—Enter the X Coordinate for which GIS features should appear.
31 Y Coordinate—Enter the Y Coordinate for which GIS features should appear.
32 Z Coordinate—Enter the Z Coordinate for which GIS features should appear. Enter the following
Part Association Details:
33 Part—Enter the asset's part number.
Note: Only enter parts that are track by asset.
53 Purchase Order #—Enter the purchase order number for which the part was received. The system
automatically populates Purchase Order-Line.
54 Purchase Date—Select the purchase order date.
55 Purchase Cost—Enter the purchase cost of the part.
56 Install Date—Select the date the equipment was installed.
57 Commission Date—Enter the commission or startup date of the asset. Commission Date defaults
to the current date when you create an asset.
58 Cost of Needed Repairs—Enter the cost of necessary repairs. The system automatically populates
the currency, and defaults Eligible for Energy Star Label to unselected.
59 Replacement Value—Enter the current replacement value for the equipment. The system
automatically populates the currency.
60 Facility Condition Index—Enter the resultant FCI based on the maintenance details. Cost of
Needed Repairs/Current Replacement Value=FCI
61 Disposal Type—Enter the manner in which the asset was disposed.
62 Disposal Date—Enter the date on which the asset is sold, scrapped, or disposed. Enter the following
Facility Details:
63 Primary Use—Enter the primary use for the asset.
64 Year Built—Enter the year the asset was built.
65 Floor Area—Enter the floor area, and then enter the unit of measure for the floor area.
66 Service Life (years)—Enter the service life of the asset. Enter the following Risk Assessment
Details:
67 Lock Risk Assessment Values—Select to lock the reliability ranking values for the equipment on
the Risk Assessment tab of the Equipment screen.
Note: If Lock Risk Assessment Values is selected, the system will not allow the user to modify
the risk assessment survey answers and calculate risk assessment values for the equipment. The
system also prevents the selection of equipment for update on the Batch Update Risk Assessment
Values form.
30 Z Coordinate—Enter the Z Coordinate for which GIS features should appear. Enter the following
Compliance Association Details:
31 Lockout/Tagout—Select if the property equipment complies with OSHA regulations on lockout/tagout
procedures. This regulation ensures machines are properly shut down and locked so that they do
not start again until service or maintenance on the machine is completed.
32 Personal Protective Equipment—Select if OSHA requires the use of personal protective equipment
when operating the equipment to reduce exposure to hazards or injury.
33 Confined Space—Select if the equipment is located in an area defined as a confined space as per
OSHA regulations.
34 Statement of Conditions—Select to indicate the property relates to the Statement of Conditions
as required by The Joint Commission.
35 Building Maintenance Program—Select to indicate the property equipment is inventoried in the
building maintenance program.
36 HIPAA Confidentiality—Select to indicate the property equipment contains confidential patient
health information and the equipment must comply with regulations. Enter the following Hierarchy
Details:
37 Parent Property—Enter the parent property of the equipment and/or property.
38 Dependent—Select if the property is dependent on the parent property.
39 Cost Roll-up—Select if costs should roll up to the parent property.
40 Asset—Enter the asset to categorize as a child of the property in the parent/child hierarchy.
41 Dependent—Select if the asset is dependent on the property.
42 Cost Roll-up—Select if costs should roll up to the parent property of the child asset.
43 Location—Enter the location of the asset. Enter the following Financial and Disposition Details:
44 Ownership Type—Select the ownership details of the property equipment, e.g., select Lease if the
equipment is leased.
45 Inventory Verification Date—Select the date the equipment was last verified for inventory purposes.
46 Equipment Value—Enter the value of the equipment to define with this property.
47 Purchase Order #—Enter the purchase order number for which the part was received. The system
automatically populates Purchase Order-Line.
48 Purchase Date—Select the purchase order date.
49 Purchase Cost—Enter the purchase cost of the part.
50 Install Date—Select the date the equipment was installed.
51 Commission Date—Enter the commission or startup date for the property. Commission Date
defaults to the current date when you create a property.
52 Cost of Needed Repairs—Enter the cost of necessary repairs. The system automatically populates
the currency, and defaults Eligible for Energy Star Label to unselected.
53 Replacement Value—Enter the current replacement value for the equipment. The system
automatically populates the currency.
54 Facility Condition Index—Enter the resultant FCI based on the maintenance details. Cost of
Needed Repairs/Current Replacement Value=FCI
55 Disposal Type—Enter the manner in which the equipment was disposed.
56 Disposal Date—Enter the date on which the equipment is sold, scrapped, or disposed. Enter the
following Facility Details:
57 Primary Use—Enter the primary use for the equipment.
58 Year Built—Enter the year the equipment was built.
59 Floor Area—Enter the floor area, and then enter the unit of measure for the floor area.
60 Service Life (years)—Enter the service life of the equipment. Enter the following Risk Assessment
Details:
61 Lock Risk Assessment Values—Select to lock the reliability ranking values for the equipment on
the Risk Assessment tab of the Equipment screen.
Note: If Lock Risk Assessment Values is selected, the system will not allow the user to modify
the risk assessment survey answers and calculate risk assessment values for the equipment. The
system also prevents the selection of equipment for update on the Batch Update Reliability Ranking
Values form.
2 Select the equipment for which to reorganize a hierarchy, and then click the Structure tab.
3 Choose one of the following options:
• Change the order in which child equipment records appear—Drag and drop an equipment record
from its current location in the Structure Details to the blue flag icon next to the sibling record
under which you want the equipment to appear.
• Move a piece of equipment under a new parent—Drag and drop the equipment record from its
current location in the Structure Details to its new parent record. The system transfers cost and
meter roll-up data for the equipment record to its new parent.
Unlinking equipment
Unlink equipment records from the Structure Details tree view by unlinking the equipment record from
other equipment records.
To unlink equipment:
3 Select the parent or child equipment record for which to toggle cost rollup, and then click Toggle
Cost Rollup.
5 Click Submit.
5 Click Submit.
6 Enter the information necessary to add the first activity to the work order.
7 Click Submit.
Note: Reference types are linked to the LRTP entity for which you must define your reference type
codes. Depending on your system configuration, the codes listed below are not the codes that
appear in the dropdown. Contact your system administrator for more information.
5 Linear reference system—Select to indicate that this reference denotes the measurement system
by which to locate a point, line, or piece of equipment along the linear equipment record, e.g., mile
markers on an interstate.
6 Related equipment—Select to indicate that this reference denotes equipment that is located along
the linear equipment record, e.g., exit ramps along an interstate.
7 Point of interest—Select to indicate that this reference denotes any point along the linear equipment
record that is important to track, but is not defined as an equipment record within the system, e.g.,
road signs.
Note: If you select Related equipment, the system enables Equipment.
8 Equipment—Enter the equipment record to add as the reference if you selected Related equipment
as the Type. The system automatically populates Ref. Description, Equipment Org., and
Geographical Reference.
9 Ref. Description—Enter a description of the reference.
10 From Point—Enter the point on the linear equipment record from which to begin the reference.
11 To Point—Enter the point on the linear equipment record to end the reference.
12 Geographical Reference—Enter a geographical reference point for the reference.
13 Click Submit.
3 Right-click, and then select Linear Equipment Search. The system automatically populates
Originating Point with the midpoint of the equipment record, i.e., the length of the equipment record
divided by 2 and rounded to the equipment record’s defined precision. The system automatically
populates the Search Parameters with the class of the equipment record for which you are searching
for linear references.
Note: If the equipment record on which you are basing your search does not contain a Linear
Reference UOM, the system protects and populates Originating Point with 0 and the Linear
Distance unit of measure with Feet.
4 Originating Point—Enter the point on the Originating Equipment from which to begin your search.
5 Linear Distance—Enter the distance from the Originating Point of the Originating Equipment
within which to search.
6 UOM—Enter the unit of measure for the entered Linear Distance.
7 Enter filter criteria, and then click Run. The system displays linear references that fall on or within
the specified distance and meet the filter criteria. The system calculates each linear reference’s
distance from the Originating Point in the unit of measure of the Linear Distance and displays
the linear distance in the list.
Note: The system displays each linear reference’s linear parent, linear parent organization, and
linear parent description if the linear parent equipment also falls on or within the specified distance.
The linear parent is the linear equipment record on which the equipment record is a reference.
3 Organization—Enter the organization to which the meter belongs if you use multi-organization
security.
4 Meter—Enter a unique code identifying the meter, and then enter a description of the meter in the
adjacent field.
5 Meter Unit—Enter the meter’s unit of measure.
6 Maximum Value—Enter the maximum value the meter can reach before it exceeds its physical
count limit and resets to zero. Leave Maximum Value blank if the meter cannot reset to zero when
it reaches its physical count limit.
7 Last Value—Enter the last meter reading as necessary.
8 Class—Enter the class of the meter. The classes shown belong to the MET entity.
Note: When defining a physical meter, Service Point is a read-only field. You can enter the Service
Pointof a piece of equipment when editing a meter record.
6 Total Usage—Enter the total usage of the logical meter. The system automatically updates Usage
Since Install and Usage Since Last WO.
7 Usage Since Install—Enter the usage of the logical meter since the last change in the equipment
hierarchy.
8 Est. Daily Usage—Enter the estimated amount of the daily usage.
9 Readings for Calc.—Enter the number of readings used to calculate the average daily usage. The
system automatically updates Avg. Daily Usage.
10 Physical Meter—Enter the code of the physical meter, if any.
11 Last Reading Date—Enter the date of the last meter reading.
12 Click Submit.
5 Work Order—Enter the work order. The system automatically populates Related Work Order if a
related work order exists.
6 Click Submit.
2 Select the equipment for which to delete meter readings from history, and then click the Meters tab.
3 Select the meter, and then click View Meter History.
4 Select the meter reading to delete, and then click Delete Reading.
5 Click Cancel.
7 Threshold—Enter the number of days prior to expiration at which the system should notify you that
the warranty is about to expire.
8 Start Date—Enter the start date of the warranty.
9 Expiration Date—Enter the Expiration Date. The system automatically populates Expiration Date
based on Start Date + Duration. Modify the Expiration Date as necessary.
Note: The system automatically adjusts Duration if you modify the Start Date or Expiration Date.
5 Work Order—Enter the work order with which to associate the warranty claim. The system
automatically populates Equipment based on the information provided on the Work Orders form
and Serial Number, Commission Date, Part Details, and VMRS Code Details based on the
equipment record. The system automatically populates WO Labor, WO Hired Labor, WO Services,
WO Stock Items, WO Direct Purchases, WO Tools, WO Claim Amount, and Total Claim Amount
based on the warrantable costs for the selected work order.
Note: If the selected Work Order is a multiple equipment or MEC work order, then the system
automatically populates Equipment with the equipment on the work order, and it is protected. The
system enables you to create warranty claims for the parent multiple equipment work order or any
related work order(s). See "Adding equipment to work orders to split work order costs" on page 398.
If no Equipment is selected, the system displays all work orders, including MEC work orders.
If an Equipment is selected, then the system displays only the work orders for which the work order
equipment is the same as the equipment on the claim.
6 Activity—Enter the work order activity with which to associate the warranty claim. The system
automatically updates WO Labor, WO Hired Labor, WO Services, WO Stock Items, WO Direct
Purchases, WO Tools, WO Claim Amount, and Total Claim Amount based on the warrantable
costs for the selected work order activity.
7 Equipment—Enter the piece of equipment with which to associate the warranty claim. The system
automatically populates Serial Number, Commission Date, Part Details, and VMRS Code Details.
8 Commission Date—Enter the equipment’s commission date.
9 Commissioning WO—Enter the work order that commissioned the installation of the equipment
associated with this warranty claim.
10 Warranty—Enter the warranty with which the claim is associated. The system automatically populates
Supplier.
11 Usage—Enter a value to indicate the usage of the equipment when it failed under warranty.
12 UOM—Enter the unit of measure for the usage.
13 Top Parent—Enter the highest-level parent of the equipment associated with this warranty claim.
14 Top Parent Usage—Enter the usage value of the highest-level parent piece of equipment.
15 Status—Select the status of the claim if you are authorized to do so. Changing the status of a
warranty claim may affect additional system checks and field changes as follows:
• Approved—The system verifies that an attached work order has a system status of Completed.
If the work order does not have a system status of Completed, the system verifies whether you
want to continue. Click Yes to change the status to Approved. Any future costs added to or
subtracted from the work order will not reflect on the warranty claim.
• Canceled—The system protects all fields on the Claims form except Status.
• Completed—The system protects all fields on the Claims form except Status.
• Response received—The system allows you to enter Settlement Details. See "Entering settlement
details for warranty claims" on page 118.
• Unfinished—The system refreshes WO Labor, WO Hired Labor, WO Services, WO Stock
Items, and WO Direct Purchases based on an attached work order each time the unfinished
claim record is selected for display on the Record View page.
16 Class—Enter the class of the claim. The system automatically populates Class Org.
17 Supplier—Enter the supplier of the warranty claim.
18 Date Filed—Enter the date the warranty claim is filed.
19 Date Reported—Enter the date the warranty claim is reported.
20 Other Claim Amount—Enter the work order costs not included in WO Claim Amount. The system
automatically updates Total Claim Amount with the total of WO Claim Amount and Other Claim
Amount.
21 Click Save Record.
2 Select the equipment with which to associate permits, and then click the Permits tab.
3 Click Add Permit.
4 Permit—Enter the permit to associate with the equipment, and then enter a description of the permit
in the adjacent field.
5 Mandatory—Select to indicate that the permit is mandatory to complete work.
6 Click Submit.
4 PM—Enter the PM schedule. The system automatically populates the description, PM Org., Test
Point Set, PM Type, Work Order, WO Class, WO Class Org., Supervisor, Meter Interval, and
Meter #2 Interval if available.
5 Department—Enter the department.
6 Location—Enter the location. The system automatically populates Loc. Org.
7 Route—Enter the equipment route.
8 Perform Every—Enter the length of the interval of time to pass before the system generates the
next PM routine work order, and then select the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
9 Due Date—Enter the due date of the first work order.
Note: Each work order determines the due date of the following work order. If you update the Due
Date on the PM Schedules page, the system updates the work order Due Date so that this due
date is later than the last work order completion date. The system adds the interval to the entered
Due Date on the PM Schedules page until a date later than the last completion date is reached.
Future due dates are accepted without validation.
10 Dormant Start—Enter the date on which the dormant period for any PM work orders for the
equipment begins.
11 Dormant End—Enter the date on which the dormant period for any PM work orders for the equipment
ends.
12 Reuse Dormant Period—Select to use the same specified dormant period for any PM work orders
for the equipment on a yearly basis. The system automatically updates the specified Dormant Start
and Dormant End dates to future dates after the dormant period for the equipment has elapsed.
Additionally, the specified dormant period will be the default dormant period for any new PM
equipment records.
13 Test Point Set—Enter the test point set for calibration of the equipment.
Note: If the work order is a calibration work order, the system copies the test points for the specified
equipment record to the work order when it is released. The system copies the test points related
to the selected Test Point Set.
15 WO Class—Enter the class of the work order. The system automatically populates WO Class Org.
16 Cost Code—Enter the cost code associated with the PM.
17 Assigned To—Enter the person responsible for the equipment.
18 Supervisor—Enter the supervisor for the equipment.
19 Date Deactivated—Enter a date beyond which to discontinue generation of future PM Work Orders.
20 Meter Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time indicating how frequently the PM is to be
performed, and then enter the unit of measure for the meter interval.
21 Meter Due—Enter the reading due value for the first work order.
Note: Each work order determines the due reading of the following work order. If you update Meter
Due on the PM Schedules page, the system updates the work order Meter Dueso that this due
reading is higher than the reading on the last work order completed. The system adds the interval
to the entered Meter Due on the Equipment page until a reading higher than the reading on the
last work order completed is reached. Future due readings are accepted without validation.
22 Meter # 2 Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time indicating how frequently the PM is to
be performed, and then enter the unit of measure for the meter interval.
23 Meter # 2 Due—Enter the reading due value for the first work order.
Note: Specify more than one meter interval for a PM. For example, change the oil in a truck every
3000 miles, according to Meter Interval and change the oil in the same truck after 720 hours of
running time according to Meter #2 Interval. You must enter a value for Meter Interval to enter a
value for Meter #2 Interval.
24 Perform On—Enter the week of the month and the day of the week on which to perform the work
on the equipment, e.g., 2nd Tuesday of the month due. Select Last to handle scenarios in which
there are five weeks in a month. The system sets the due date to the last week of the month.
Note: Perform On is only available for duplicate PMs, and is not available for daily or weekly
frequencies.
25 Enter Linear Reference Details. See "Defining standard work order headers" on page 383.
26 Click Submit.
• Translations
• Warranties
The system does not automatically copy all data associated with an equipment record during the
transfer. See the following list of data that the system does not copy to the equipment record within the
new organization:
• Account Details
• Electronic signatures
• Electronic records
• Audit trail information
• Preventive Maintenance records
• Inspections data
• Physical Meters that belong to specific organizations
Transferring equipment
To transfer equipment:
63 Bill Every—Enter the length of the interval of time to pass before the system expects the next bill,
and then select the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
64 Eff. Loss 1% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 1 percent imbalance.
65 Eff. Loss 2% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 2 percent imbalance.
66 Eff. Loss 3% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 3 percent imbalance.
67 Eff. Loss 4% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 4 percent imbalance.
68 Eff. Loss 5% Phase Imb.—Enter the efficiency loss per 5 percent imbalance.
69 Performance Manager—Enter the energy performance manager who is responsible for the
equipment.
70 Electric Sub-meter Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time in minutes indicating how
frequently the electric sub-meter is read.
71 Electric Usage Threshold—Enter the current in amps above which the equipment is considered
running (on).
72 Revision Reason—Enter the reason for revision. The system automatically populates the revision
number, Requested By, Date Requested, Approved By, and Date Approved.
73 Click Save Record.
6 Click Submit.
8 Threshold UOM—Enter the amount of usage quantity prior to expiration at which the system should
notify you that the warranty is about to expire.
9 Click Submit.
24 Top Level Only—Select this checkbox to generate equipment records for the top-level of the
equipment configuration structure only.
25 All Dependent—Select this checkbox to generate an equipment structure where all of the children
are dependent on their parent.
26 All Cost Roll-up—Select this checkbox to generate an equipment structure where all of the children
roll up their costs to their parent.
27 Comments—Select this checkbox to copy the comments added to the equipment configuration.
28 Documents—Select this checkbox to copy the documents attached to the equipment configuration.
29 Custom Fields—Select this checkbox to copy the custom fields added to the equipment configuration.
30 Meters—Select this checkbox to copy the meters added to the equipment configuration.
31 Parts Associated—Select this checkbox to copy the parts associated with the equipment configuration.
32 Warranties—Select this checkbox to copy the warranties added to the equipment configuration.
33 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Created By, Date Created, and Updated
By.
Specify the depreciation method that the system should use to calculate the annual depreciation
expense on the Depreciation page of the Assets, Positions, or Systems form. See "Entering depreciation
data" on page 137 for more information. The system provides four asset depreciation methods: Straight
Line, Sum of Years Digits, Double Declining Balance, and Units of Output.
Note: The ASDEPTYP installation parameter determines the default depreciation method for the
system; however, you can also set the depreciation method on the organization or equipment level.
Setting the depreciation method at the organization level supersedes the setting of the ASDEPTYP
installation parameter. Setting the depreciation method at the equipment level supersedes the setting
of ASDEPTYP and/or the depreciation method specified for the organization.
Note: Quickly determine the Sum of Years Digits value by adding together the numbers representing
the years of an asset's useful life, e.g., if an asset is expected to have a useful life of five years, the
digits representing that useful life are: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. To determine the Sum of Years Digits value,
add the digits: 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 = 15.
The system determines an asset's remaining years of life based on its expected useful life, e.g., for an
asset whose expected useful life is five years, the remaining years of life is 5 for the first year, 4 for the
second year, 3 for the third year, etc.
The system then calculates the Sum of Years Digits depreciation based on the following equation:
(Original Value - Residual Value) x Remaining Years of Life / Sum of
Years Digits = Annual Depreciation Expense
Note: If you view depreciation calculations based on fiscal years, the system may have to further divide
each period into two segments to calculate the depreciation expense. If an asset’s year of life, as
defined by its Commission Date, and fiscal year do not coincide, the system must calculate two periodic
depreciation expenses for each year of the asset’s life, e.g., your asset’s Commission Dateis 5/1/02.
Therefore, its first year of life runs from 5/1/02 through 4/30/03. The fiscal year of the asset runs from
11/1 through 10/31. Therefore, the system must calculate the asset’s depreciation expense from 5/1/02
to 10/31/02 and then again from 11/1/02 to 4/30/03.
If you select Double Declining Balance as your Depreciation Method, the calculated periodic
depreciation expense for the last period of an asset’s life may cause the Book Value of the asset to
be less than its Residual Value. In this case, the system adjusts the depreciation expense of the last
period so the asset’s Book Value equals its Residual Value.
Example:
See the following information to determine an asset’s periodic depreciation expense for the years 2003,
2004, and 2005:
• The fiscal year of the asset’s organization begins September 1 and ends August 31.
• The Commission Date for the asset is 02-JUL-2003.
• The Sold/Scrap Date of the asset is 02-SEP-2005.
• The daily depreciation expense of the asset is 17.60 USD.
To determine the depreciation expense for the year 2003, the system performs the following calculation:
2003 Depreciation Expense = Daily Depreciation Expense x Number of Days
Between Commission Date and Period End Date
2003 Depreciation Expense = 17.60 USD * 61
2003 Depreciation Expense = 1,073.60 USD
To determine the depreciation expense for the year 2004, the system performs the following calculation:
2004 Depreciation Expense = Daily Depreciation Expense x Number of Days
in Period
2004 Depreciation Expense = 17.60 USD * 366
2004 Depreciation Expense = 6,441.60 USD
Note: Because 2004 is a leap year and February 2004 occurs within the organization’s 2004 fiscal
year, the number of days in the period is 366.
To determine the depreciation expense for the year 2005, the system performs the following calculation:
2005 Depreciation Expense = Daily Depreciation Expense x Number of Days
Between Period Start Date and Sold/Scrap Date
2005 Depreciation Expense = 17.60 USD * 2
2005 Depreciation Expense = 35.20 USD
Example
See the following information to determine an asset's book value at the end of the 2003, 2004, and
2005:
• The Original Value of the asset is 10,000 USD.
• The depreciation expense for 2003 is 1,073.60 USD; the depreciation expense for 2004 is 6,441.60
USD; and the depreciation expense for 2005 is 35.20 USD as taken from the example in "Calculating
Periodic Depreciation Expense" earlier in this chapter.
To determine the asset's book value at the end of 2003, the system performs the following calculation:
2003 Book Value = Original value - 2003 Periodic Depreciation Expense
Book Value = 10,000 USD - 1073.60 USD
Book Value = 8,926.40 USD
To determine the asset's book value at the end of 2004, the system performs the following calculation:
2004 Book Value = 2003 Book Value - 2004 Periodic Depreciation Expense
Book Value = 8,926.40 USD - 6,441.60 USD
Book Value = 2,484.80 USD
To determine the asset's book value at the end of 2005, the system performs the following calculation:
2005 Book Value = 2004 Book Value - 2005 Periodic Depreciation Expense
Book Value = 2,484.80 USD - 35.20 USD
Book Value = 2,449.60 USD
method. Create one depreciation schedule for the CHILLER using the GAAP type and Straight Line
method and a second depreciation schedule using the state agency type and the Double Declining
Balance method.
If you update Original Value, Est. Useful Life, the unit of measure, or Residual Value, the system
automatically recalculates depreciation values.
Note: You can also manually recalculate depreciation values for all the equipment records in an
organization for which you have defined depreciation data by clicking the Recalculate Depreciation
Data on the Fiscal Years page of the Organizations form. See Defining fiscal years for asset
depreciation Chapter 2 System security of the System Administrator’s Guide.
To enter depreciation data:
7 Residual Value—Enter the estimated value of the asset at the end of its useful life.
8 Est. Lifetime Output—Enter the units of output you estimate the equipment will produce over its
lifetime if you selected Units of output as the Depreciation Method.
9 Depreciation Type—Select a depreciation type.
Note: Depreciation types are linked to the DETP entity for which you must define your depreciation
type codes. Contact your system administrator for more information.
10 Click Submit.
Depreciation (Period To Date) Daily Depreciation Rate x Num- See equation in Depreciation
ber of Days Between First Day (To Date) above fore more infor-
in the Current Period and the mation on calculating deprecia-
Current Date tion in current period.
Book Value (To Date) Original Value – Depreciation Original Value – Depreciation
(To Date) (To Date)
5 Click Close.
5 Start Date—Enter the fiscal year for which to enter units of output. The system automatically
populates End Date.
Note: If the fiscal year’s End Date is later than today’s date, the system calculates Depreciate (To
Date), Depreciation (Period To Date), and Book Value (To Date) based on the entire length of
the fiscal year. See "Viewing depreciation details" on page 139
6 Class—Enter the class of the change notice. The system automatically populates Class Org.
7 Manufacturer—Enter the manufacturer of the assets affected by the change notice.
8 Start Date and End Date—Enter the dates during which the manufacturer repairs or replaces assets
affected by the change notice. The system automatically populates Close Date when Statuschanges
to Closed.
9 Filter Assets by Manufacturer—Select to include only equipment with the entered manufacturer
on the list of equipment for the change notice.
5 Part—Enter the part number for the part affected by the change notice. The system automatically
populates Part Org.
6 Click Submit.
4 Location—Enter the location for which assets can be included. The system automatically populates
the location description.
5 Click Submit.
4 Commodity—Enter the commodity to associate with the equipment. The system populates the
Commodity UOM from the selected Commodity.
If a record is inserted and the Date Effective and Date Expired of the new record overlap with the
Date Effective and Date Expired of another record with the same Commodity, the system updates
the Date Expired of the new record with the oldest Date Effective to avoid having an overlap. See
"Understanding effective and expiration date calculations for design consumption" on page 145
5 Design Usage UOM—Enter the unit of measure to be used for the energy consumption design,
e.g., hours. The system populates Design Consumption UOM in the format Commodity
UOM/Design Usage UOM.
6 Default Load Factor—Enter the number to default for the maximum factor for the load ranges. This
value is used as the default when entering entering records on the Actual Consumption page. The
system automatically populates Range-1 Low.
7 Range-1 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 1.
8 Range-1 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
9 Range-2 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 2.
10 Range-2 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 2.
11 Range-2 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
12 Range-3 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 3.
13 Range-3 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 3.
14 Range-3 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
15 Range-4 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 4.
16 Range-4 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 4.
17 Range-4 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
18 Range-5 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 5.
19 Range-5 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 5.
20 Range-5 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
21 Range-6 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 6.
22 Range-6 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 6.
23 Range-6 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
24 Range-7 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 7.
25 Range-7 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 7.
26 Range-7 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
27 Range-8 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 8.
28 Range-8 High—Enter the maximum load range for range 8.
29 Range-8 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
30 Range-9 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 9.
31 Range-9 High—Enter the minimum load range for range 9.
32 Range-9 Design Consumption Rate—Enter the energy consumption rate for the equipment. This
indicates the amount of the commodity, e.g., electricity, that is consumed in the Design Usage
UOM, e.g., hours. For example, an equipment can be designed to use 10KW of electricity per hour.
33 Range-10 Low—Enter the minimum load range for range 10.
Note: Date Expired is protected. The system defaults 12/31/2199 as the Date Expired for the
record to be inserted.
The record to be inserted shares the same Commodity as the existing records, and the Date
Effective of the record to be inserted overlaps with the Date Effective and Date Expired of the
existing records. The system locates the existing record with the same Commodity based on the
Date Effective and updates the Date Expired for the second existing record with a new Date
Effective as follows:
Example 2
In this example, there are two existing design consumption records, and you are inserting a new
record. At the time of insert, the date information for the design consumption records is as follows:
Note: Date Expired is protected. The system defaults 12/31/2199 as the Date Expired for the
record to be inserted.
The record to be inserted shares the same Commodity as the existing records, and the Date
Effective of the record to be inserted overlaps with the Date Effective of the existing records. The
system locates the existing record with the same Commodity based on the Date Effective and
updates the Date Expired of existing record one and the Date Effective of existing record two and
the data inserted is as follows:
3 Commodity—Enter the commodity to associate with the actual consumption reading. The system
populates the Actual Consumption UOM from the selected Commodity and the Actual Usage
UOM from the Design Usage UOM on the Design Consumption page. See "Designing energy
consumption for equipment" on page 143
Note: When the Commodity is updated for the actual consumption reading, the system automatically
updates Actual Consumption UOM, Actual Usage UOM, and Actual Consumption Rate UOM
by searching for a date range on the Design Consumption page.
5 Actual Usage—Enter the actual usage. This indicates the amount time that was used to consume
the value entered for Actual Consumption. The system automatically calculates the Actual
Consumption Rate.
6 Load Factor—Enter the load factor for this actual consumption record, overriding the default value
defined on the Design Consumption page.
7 Click Save Record.
4 Click Submit. The system closes the popup, sends a Get Pending Authorization message to ABS
by web service, and receives a response from ABS by web service. The system displays the Energy
Star Setup page. The system automatically populates Energy Star Customer ID, Energy Star
Building ID, Energy Star Building Name, Energy Star Building Address, Energy Star Building
City, Energy Star Building State, Energy Star Building Zip Code, Energy Star Building Year
Built, Energy Star Meter ID, Energy Star Meter Name, Confirmed, and Energy Star Energy
Type.
5 EAM Building ID—Enter the Infor EAM building ID that corresponds to the Energy Star building
ID.
Note: You must indicate that this facility is Utility Bill Level in the Facility Details section of the asset
record.
6 EAM Meter ID—Enter the Infor EAM meter ID that corresponds to the Energy Star meter ID.
Note: The meter must have been defined for this building in the Meters tab of the asset.
On this form, view Energy Star ratings and associated information on energy consumption and
greenhouse gas emissions.
Note: Energy Star's service level commitment states that the response may take up to 24 hours for
asynchronous messages to be viewable; however, the response time from Energy Star may be
considerably less.
To view Energy Star ratings:
Adding levels
Add levels to the decision tree to create a structure for calculating reliability rankings.
A level can be a node in the tree where a formula is executed or it can be a question. A question always
means the lowest level in the tree has been reached. If the level is a question, one or more answers
must be supplied for the question level. Levels that are not questions may have child levels.
To add levels:
1 On the Decision Tree tab, expand the tree, select the level for which to add to, and then click Add
Level.
2 Level—Enter the unique code identifying the level, and then enter a description in the adjacent field.
3 Question Level—Select to indicate the level is a question with which an answer will be associated.
4 Question—Enter the question the system will ask if this level is a question level.
5 Click Submit.
Note: To translate the selected level description and/or question, select the level, and then click
Translations or Question Translations. The system opens the Translations popup. Select the
language record, enter the Translated Description, and then select Translated.
Adding answers
Add answers to a selected question level in the decision tree to create a structure for calculating
reliability rankings.
To add answers:
1 On the Decision Tree tab, select a question level, and then click Add/Edit Answers.
2 Click Add Answer.
3 Answer—Enter a unique code identifying the answer, and then enter the answer in the adjacent
field.
Note: Enter as many answers as necessary for a selected Question Level.
5 Click Submit.
Note: To translate the selected answer description, select the answer, and then click Translations.
Select the language record, enter the Translated Description, and then select Translated.
Adding formulas
Add, edit, or delete a formula for a selected non-Question level.
Note: The system does not allow formula associations to question levels.
To add formulas:
1 On the Decision Tree tab, select a non-question level for which to add a formula, and then click
Add/Edit Formula. The system automatically populates Level and the level description of all the
children.
2 Formula—Enter the formula. Use the child levels in the formula by adding a colon ":" in front of the
level code. The formula also supports any SQL numeric functions.
Example: Where the score for the level is determined by the average of the environmental level
and 2 times the safety level:
(:ENVIRONMENT + 2* :SAFETY) / 2
3 Click Submit.
Note: To clear the formula, click Clear Formula.
1 On the Decision Tree tab, select a non-Question level, and then click Normalize Level.
2 Click Add Value.
3 Minimum Value—Enter the minimum value for the range.
4 Maximum Value—Enter the maximum value for the range.
5 Normalized Value—Enter the normalized value for the range.
6 Click Submit.
Ordering questions
Update the sequential order of questions for reliability rankings.
To order questions:
1 On the Decision Tree tab, click Order Questions. The system automatically populates Question,
Description, and Level.
2 Sequence Number—Enter the number for each Question to define the sequential order in which
the questions should appear on the reliability ranking survey.
3 Click Submit.
7 Click Submit.
3 Select—Select the equipment records for which to copy reliability ranking values.
4 Click Copy Reliability Ranking Values to Selected Equipment. The system updates the Equipment
list and automatically populates Reliability Ranking Index, Reliability Ranking Score, Reliability
Ranking Values Out of Sync, Reliability Ranking Values Last Calculated, Reliability Survey
Last Updated, and Reliability Ranking Setup Last Updated.
Creating rooms
Create rooms that are accessible in Infor EAM and Infor HMS when the two products are integrated.
Note: If the rooms were created in Infor EAM you may edit the rooms on this form. However if the
rooms were created in Infor HMS you cannot edit the rooms on this form. To edit the rooms access
the room records on the Rooms form in Infor HMS.
To create rooms:
8 Commission Date—Select the room's installation date, or date the room will be counted in inventory.
9 Maximum Guest Count—Select the maximum number of guests the room will accommodate.
10 Phone Number—Enter the phone number of the room.
11 Key Number—Enter the key number of the room.
12 Assigned To—Enter the person responsible for the room, this is typically housekeeping or building
maintenance personnel.
13 Out of Service—Select to exclude the room from being displayed in lookups.
14 Accessible—Select if the room is accessible to persons with disabilities.
15 Non-Smoking—Select if the room is designated as a non-smoking room.
16 Name—Enter the first, middle, and last name of the guest.
Note: Guest information such as Name, VIP Status, Email Address, and Guest Phone Number
is only editable from Infor HMS when operating in an integrated environment with Infor EAM. This
guest information cannot be manually entered when operating in standalone Infor EAM.
Creating facilities
Create facilities to identify and maintain buildings, floors, elevators, HVAC units, etc. for associated
properties.
To create facilities:
Note: If Lock Reliability Ranking Values is selected, the system will not allow the user to modify
the reliability survey answers and calculate reliability ranking values for the facility. The system also
prevents the selection of facility for update on the Batch Update Reliability Ranking Values form.
24 Reliability Ranking—Enter the reliability ranking code for the facility. The system automatically
populates Reliability Ranking Index, Reliability Ranking Score, Reliability Ranking Values Out
of Sync, Reliability Ranking Values Last Calculated, Reliability Survey Last Updated, and
Reliability Ranking Setup Last Updated, after answering the reliability survey.
25 Click Save Record.
Creating vehicles
Create and maintain vehicles for hospitality properties.
To create vehicles:
Defining policies
Define your organization's corporate initiatives as policies. For example, a policy can be a corporate
initiative to improve energy performance.
To define policies:
Defining strategies
Strategic initiatives help organizations meet long-term goals. For example, a strategic initiative can be
your organization's corporate commitment to reducing electrical consumption. Define your organization's
strategic initiatives as strategies.
To define strategies:
4 Policy—Enter the policy to associate with the strategy. A policy can be associated with multiple
strategies. The system automatically populates the policy description.
5 Strategy Statement—Enter a strategy statement that explains how your organization plans to
achieve the goal. The strategy statement cannot contain more than 4,000 characters.
6 Approved By—Enter the name of the person responsible for approving the strategy.
7 Date Approved—Enter the date the strategy was approved.
8 Out of Service—Select if the strategy is currently not being used. If you select Out of Service, the
strategy will not display in the lookups for strategies on other forms.
9 Click Save Record.
Defining objectives
Define your organization's tactical initiatives as objectives. Tactical initiatives are short-term goals that
help an organization achieve its strategic, long-term goals. The expected results and when the results
are expected will be specifically stated. For example, an objective can be a tactical initiative to reduce
electrical consumption at a facility by a specific amount and by a particular date.
To define objectives:
10 Out of Service—Select if the objective is currently not being used. If you select Out of Service,
the objective will not appear in the lookups for objectives on other forms.
11 Target Type—Select the target type for the objective.
12 Target Subtype—Select the target subtype. You can select target subtypes for these target types:
asset performance, energy, and waste.
13 Reliability Calculations—Select the reliability calculations. If the target subtype is reliability, you
can select the reliability calculations.
14 Parameters—Select the parameters. You can select parameters for these reliability calculations:
Crow-AMSAA Individual Events, Crow-AMSAA Cumulative Events, Weibull Individual Events, and
Weibull Cumulative Events.
15 Conversion Type—Select one of the following options:
• EPA 2007—Select if the objective was designed to help reduce factors that contribute to
environmental damage as a result of the EPA 2007 plan.
• Defra 2009—Select if the objective was designed to help reduce factors that contribute to
environmental damage as a result of the Defra 2009 plan.
1 Open the Asset Inventory form. The system automatically populates Status, Created By, and
Date Created.
2 Parameter List—Select the parameter list.
3 Session ID—The session ID will be created after Create Session is clicked. Enter a description of
the session in the adjacent field.
4 Asset Organization—Enter the organization to which the asset belongs.
5 Department—Enter the department to which the asset belongs.
6 Asset Class—Enter the class to which the asset belongs. The system automatically populates
Class Org.
7 Asset Status—Enter the status of the asset.
8 Assigned To—Enter to whom the asset counting is assigned.
9 Physical Location Parent—Enter the physical location parent for the asset. The system automatically
populates Physical Location Parent Org.
10 Physical Location Type—Select the physical location type for the asset.
11 Standard WO—Enter the standard work order.
12 Blind Inventory—Select if the Inventory Results tab should not be synched to the mobile device.
13 Allow Move WO(s)—Select to give the iPad user permission to create Move WO(s).
14 Allow Physical Location Updates—Select to give the iPad user permission to make structural
changes.
15 Click Create Session. The system displays the results on the Inventory Results tab for the selected
Physical Location Parent and asset children with a status of "I" if a specific status is not entered.
Note: When Create Session is clicked, the system saves and protects all fields except Session
ID.
performing repairs on electrical equipment. After adding the safety data, review and verify the record
by clicking the Reviewed By icon. The review fields will be automatically populated after you review
the record.
To add safety data to equipment:
7 Isolation Point—Enter the isolation point or area the equipment can be isolated from its energy
sources to prevent injury from unexpected startup. The system automatically populates the description
of the isolation point, Isolation Point Org., Equipment, the description of the equipment, Equipment
Org., Location, and Location Org.
8 Location Note—Enter any additional notes on the location of the equipment as necessary.
9 Energy Source—Select the equipment's source of energy, e.g., electrical power.
10 Isolation Method—Enter the method by which to isolate the equipment from its energy source.
The system automatically populates the description of the isolation method.
11 Number of Tags—Enter the number of tags required to properly lock and tag the equipment so
that automatic startup of the equipment is prevented.
12 Residual Energy—Select the secondary source of residual energy to the equipment if any..
13 Secondary Residual Energy—Select the secondary source that stores residual energy for the
equipment. This source supplies energy to the equipment when the equipment is disconnected from
its primary energy and secondary energy sources.
14 Delete Pending—Select to delete the lockout/tagout details record during the next review.
15 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
To add or edit comments to the lockout/tagout details record, select an isolation record, and then
click Add/Edit Comments. Enter or edit comments as necessary.
To add or edit documents to the lockout/tagout details record, select an isolation record, and then
click Add/Edit Documents. View, associate, or edit documents to the record.
To copy lockout/tagout details from equipment, click Import From Equipment. See "Importing
lockout/tagout details from equipment" on page 167.
To copy lockout/tagout details from a permit to work, click Import from PTW. See "Importing
lockout/tagout details from permits to work" on page 168.
6 Click Submit.
6 Click Submit.
For linear equipment records, the system populates From Point and To Point based on the entire
length in the linear reference unit of measure of the equipment. Complete the following steps to
view events for a segment or point of the linear equipment record.
4 From Point—Enter the point of the linear equipment record from which to view events.
5 To Point—Enter the point of the linear equipment record to which to view events.
6 Click Run. The system displays events that intersect at any point with the segment, e.g., the system
displays a work order if its To Point intersects with the segment’s From Point or if its From Point
intersects with the segment’s To Point.
You want to view costs for a segment of I-85. WO 1, WO 2, WO 3, WO 4, and WO 5 all fall on or
within the defined From Point and To Point. Therefore, the system displays all five work orders on
the Costs page. The system displays WO 3 and WO 4 because they intersect at some point with
the segment’s From Point and To Point; however, the system displays their costs as $0. The
system calculates and displays the segmented costs for WO 1 and WO 2. The system displays the
full cost of WO 5 because its length coincides exactly with the segment’s length.
2 Select the asset, system, or position for which to view purchase orders, and then click the Purchase
Orders tab.
Note: By default the system displays all purchase order lines for the equipment that have not been
completely received.
If a purchase order line contains a multiple equipment work order, the system also displays information
about how the purchase order is split among the equipment and related work order(s).
3 View the purchase order information. See "Creating purchase order headers" on page 321 for more
information about the information displayed in the Purchase Orders list.
The materials management module maintains materials inventory by providing an online catalog of
parts, stores, manufacturers, and suppliers. You can issue and return materials, create pick tickets,
perform physical inventories, manage the entire purchase order process from creating requisitions to
receiving parts, and automatically generate requisitions and purchase orders based on low stock levels.
Defining currencies
In international markets, organizations are required to monitor the various currencies used and the
different exchange rates. The system contains many predefined currencies. Define additional currencies
as necessary.
Note: Various parts of the system rely upon currency for computing transactions. Therefore, even if
you do not intend to use the system to calculate currencies for international markets, you must at least
enter a base currency and attach an exchange rate of "1" to it.
To define currencies:
Defining lots
Define lots for materials as necessary. Manufacturers often produce items in volume batches, called
lots. Lots are a numeric or alphanumeric method of indicating that an item is a member of a group of
items that are produced at the same time.
Depending on the setting of the LOTNRG installation parameter, the system can automatically generate
lot numbers when you receive items. Set the installation code LOTNRG to one of the following values:
T—The system generates a lot code for each receipt (Transaction).
P—The system generates a lot code for each part checked by lot. These items are designated by
having Track by Lot selected on the Parts form.
Note: The SHOWLOT installation parameter determines whether lots are used for stock information
for parts. The default setting for SHOWLOT is Y. If SHOWLOT is set N, the system disables Lot and
it is not displayed on forms.
- (dash)—No parts are lot-controlled.
The default setting for lot numbering is P. In most cases, this is the ideal lot number method. Items
requiring lot tracking receive your lot assignment; those items that do not need lot tracking are simply
placed in the stock system as is. Infor EAM recommends setting the value to T for companies whose
incoming parts and supplies should be lot-tracked at all times for safety, regulatory, and quality control
purposes.
The lot numbers assigned by the system are internal numbers. Cross-reference the internal numbers
assigned by the system to the manufacturer’s lot numbers to track defective parts when notified by the
manufacturer.
Define lot codes to identify the exact lot or batch number when stocking parts in stores.
After defining a lot, you can update the lot record as necessary; however, you cannot modify the Lot
or Organization for an existing lot record.
To define lots:
3 Tax Rate Type—Enter a unique code identifying the tax rate type, and then enter a description of
the tax rate type in the adjacent field.
4 Click Save Record.
3 UOM—Enter a unique code identifying the measurement, and then enter a description of the
measurement in the adjacent field.
4 Class—Enter the class of the unit of measurement.
5 SOA UOM—Enter the Infor SOA unit of measurement for which to associate to this unit of
measurement.
6 Out of Service—Select to prevent the UOM from being displayed in lookups.
Note: You cannot delete a unit of measurement if it is being used elsewhere in the system. If you
want to hide the UOM in the system lookups, select Out of Service. This feature is especially useful
for discarding many of the predefined ISO units that you may never use.
LIFO and FIFO are both storeroom price types that require you to set your pricing level on the store
level. Pricing level is defined by the PRICELEV installation parameter, which must be set to S for
store-level pricing.
You can set LIFO or FIFO as your pricing method for each store created on the Stores form; however,
you can still modify price types for parts within a LIFO/FIFO store using a price type other than
LIFO/FIFO, e.g., average price, last price, or standard price. The default price type for a store is
determined by the PRICETYP installation parameter.
Note: You can set PRICETYP on the Install Parameters form; however, the parameter only determines
the default price type that the system automatically displays for Price Type when you are creating a
store on the Stores form. Modify the price type for each store as necessary.
When you create stock with any price type using the Parts form or the Equipment forms (for equipment
defined with In store status), the system updates the R5BINSTOCK table with the increase in quantity,
and it also creates a receipt transaction in the R5TRANSACTIONS and R5TRANSLINES tables. You
can view the receipt transaction on the PO Receipts form. Because all receipt transactions require a
supplier, the system automatically inserts an asterisk (*) as the supplier for the receipt, and the default
description for each of these receipt transactions is ‘Stock initialization.’ If you are using LIFO/FIFO as
your pricing method, the system also creates a record for all stock initialization in the R5FIFO table to
ensure that it uses the appropriate price for all future issues of stock items from stores.
The R5FIFO table stores the part, price, quantity, store, and transaction date for each receipt transaction,
as well as the purchase order and purchase order line for all LIFO/FIFO stock received from a purchase
order. The transaction date indicates the date the stock is inserted into inventory upon which future
LIFO/FIFO transactions are based. For every transaction that increases stock, the system inserts a
new record in the R5FIFO table. For every transaction that decreases stock, the system locates the
appropriate record(s) to update or delete based on the transaction date. For FIFO pricing, the system
locates the record that was inserted into inventory first. For LIFO pricing, the system locates the record
that was most recently inserted into inventory.
The system revalues the price of materials based on LIFO/FIFO pricing as transactions involving stock
occur. The system displays the current price for LIFO/FIFO stock in Stock Value on the Store page
of the Parts form. See the following scenarios for more information about how the system prices for
different types of inventory transactions for the LIFO/FIFO pricing methods.
Note: FIFO pricing is used in the examples for each of the following scenarios. If you are using LIFO
pricing, the system handles LIFO pricing for each example in the same manner; however, it locates
the record that was inserted into inventory most recently to calculate the appropriate price, rather than
locating the record that was inserted into inventory first.
and issue the parts from the R5FIFO table, issuing the oldest parts first until the requested quantity of
the part is fulfilled for the work order.
The system records the transaction price of the LIFO/FIFO issue to the work order using the price of
the appropriate part inserted into the R5FIFO table. If the system uses more than one record from the
R5FIFO table to fulfill the quantity of the issue, then it calculates the price of the issue using the weighted
average of the price of the R5FIFO records used to fulfill the issue. However, the system inserts a
record of the original issue price and quantity of the part issued in the R5ISSUES table to preserve a
record of the original issue price of a part should the issued part need to be returned to store in the
future. See the example below for more information about how the system handles LIFO/FIFO pricing
for issuing parts to work orders.
Example
Your pricing method is FIFO. You have created a work order that creates demand for 10 air filters.
Presently you have 19 air filters in stock with different insertion dates and prices. At the time of issue,
the R5FIFO table contains the following information:
Note: The Insertion date column in the table above indicates the date the stock was received into
inventory.
To fulfill the requested quantity of the air filters for the work order, the system locates the 4 parts inserted
into stock on 1-APR-2002 at 7 USD each, inserts a record of 4 parts at 7 USD into the R5ISSUES
table, and then deletes the record of the 4 parts at 7 USD from the R5FIFO table. The system then
locates the 3 parts inserted into stock on 7-MAY-2002 at 8 USD each, inserts a record of the 3 parts
at 8 USD into the R5ISSUES table, and then deletes the original record of the 3 parts from the R5FIFO
table. The system then locates the 8 parts inserted into stock on 10-JUN-2002 at 16 USD, inserts a
record of 3 parts into the R5ISSUES table, and updates the quantity of the 10-JUN-2002 record to 5
in the R5FIFO table. The system then creates the issue to the work order and calculates the transaction
price of the issue using the following equation:
[(4 air filters @ 7 USD) + (3 air filters @ 8 USD) + (3 air filters @
16 USD)] / 10 = 10 USD
After completing the issue to the work order, the R5ISSUES and R5FIFO tables contain the following
information:
R5ISSUES R5FIFO
4 air filters @ 7 USD 5 air filters @ 16 USD
3 air filters @ 8 USD 4 air filters @ 18 USD
3 air filters @ 16 USD
Note: The date displayed in the R5ISSUES column in the table above indicates the date the stock was
received into inventory, e.g., 4-MAY-2002.
To cover the return quantity, the system locates the 5 parts inserted into R5ISSUES on 1-APR-2002
at 10 USD each, returns them from the work order to store, inserts a record of 5 parts at 10 USD into
the R5FIFO table, and deletes the record of the 5 parts at 10 USD from the R5ISSUES table. The
system then locates the 3 parts inserted into R5ISSUES on 4-MAY-2002 at 8 USD each, returns them
from the work order to store, inserts a record of the 3 parts at 8 USD into the R5FIFO table, and deletes
the original record of the 3 parts from the R5ISSUES table.
There are no equivalent issues remaining from which to fulfill the return quantity, and 2 parts are still
needed to fulfill the return quantity of 10, so the system then locates the records that existed in the
R5FIFO table before the return and calculates the weighted average price of the parts using the following
equation:
[(1 air filter @ 8 USD) + (2 air filters @ 7 USD) + (2 air filters @ 9
USD)] / 5 = 8 USD
The system returns the remaining 2 parts using the price of 8 USD and inserts a new record of 2 parts
at 8 USD in the R5FIFO table.
The system calculates the transaction price of the return using the following equation:
[(5 air filters @ 10 USD) + (3 air filters @ 8 USD) + (2 air filters @
8 USD)] / 10 = 9 USD
After completing the return from work order to store, the R5ISSUES and R5FIFO tables contain the
following information:
R5ISSUES R5FIFO
5 air filters @ 10 USD 1-APR-2002
3 air filters @ 8 USD 4-MAY-2002
1 air filter @ 8 USD 7-MAY-2002
2 air filters @ 7 USD 29-MAY-2002
2 air filters @ 9 USD 1-JUN-2002
The system automatically populates Price with the average LIFO/FIFO price of the part in the issuing
store. You can modify Price as necessary. The price of the issue transaction in the issuing store is
equal to the average price of the records in the R5FIFO table that are affected by the transfer.
If the part being transferred does not already exist in the receiving store, then the system inserts a new
record of the part and the receiving store in the R5FIFO table priced at the value entered for Price on
the Quick Store-to-Store Transfer form or on the PO Receipts form. The system also creates a
receipt transaction for the quantity transferred and the value entered for Price.
Note: The Insertion date column in the table above indicates the date the stock was received into
inventory.
The system locates the 9 parts at 8 USD from the original purchase order 10003 for the return and
deletes this record from the R5FIFO table, because there is no remaining quantity of this part for this
R5FIFO record.
There are no matching records of the part on a purchase order line from which to fulfill the return
quantity, and 1 part is still needed to fulfill the return quantity of 10, so the system then locates the first
record of 2 parts at 18 USD that were received into inventory and inserted into the R5FIFO table on
1-APR-2002. The system updates the quantity from 2 to 1 for the return. The last part is returned at
the price of 18 USD.
The system calculates the price of the return using the following equation:
[(9 air filters @ 8 USD each) + (1 air filter @ 18 USD each)] / 10 = 9
USD
After completing the return from store to the supplier, the R5FIFO table contains the following information:
Note: For scrapped repairable spare parts, the system does not update the price for external or internal
repairs.
Creating stores
Create stores to define specific locations for storing parts. When creating stores, the system automatically
populates the Price Type for the store with the value specified for the PRICETYP installation parameter,
but you can modify the price type for each store as necessary.
You can set the store pricing method to Average price, Last price, Standard price, First in first out
(FIFO), or Last in first out (LIFO). However, you can only set Price Type to FIFO or LIFO if the
PRICELEV installation parameter is set to S.
To create stores:
4 Store—Enter a unique code identifying the store, and then enter a description of the store in the
adjacent field.
5 Class—Enter the class of the store. The classes shown belong to the STOR entity.
6 Enterprise Location—Enter an enterprise location for the store.
Note: You can only associate Enterprise Location to one Store.
which to copy the parent reorder details, and the DEFSTOCK installation parameter must be set to
YES.
12 Out of Service—Select to indicate that the store is no longer in use. If you select Out of Service,
the system retains the store record, but it will no longer appear in the lookups for stores on other
forms. However, you can continue to modify information on the store record as necessary.
Note: Selecting Out of Service will not affect any unfinished transactions for the store, such as
requisitions, purchase orders, purchase order receipts, part issues and returns, etc.
13 Parts Tax Code—Enter the tax code for the part used on the Parts tab of the PO line.
14 Services Tax Code—Enter the tax code for the service used on the Services tab of the PO line.
15 Sun., Mon., Tues., Wed., Thurs., Fri., and Sat.—Select to indicate the working days for the store
that are to be included when the system is counting the number of days for which to generate
demand-based requisitions based on the Reserved Parts Buffer (Days).
For example, if you select Mon., Tues., Wed., Thurs., and Fri. as the working days for the store,
then the system will only count those days, and Saturdays and Sundays will be excluded from the
count. If the Reserved Parts Buffer (Days) is set to 60 and you select Mon., Tues., Wed., Thurs.,
and Fri. as the working days for the store, the system will actually be including part-demand on
generated requisitions for a period that is longer than 60 days in actuality but only 60 days in terms
of the selected working days for the store.
16 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the number of days needed internally for inventory deliveries or transfers
at the store. Lead Time (Days) is only used for store-to-store requisitions.
Note: If you also define or have defined Lead Time (Days) on the Stores page of the Parts form,
that value overrides the value entered here on the Record View page of the Stores form.
17 Internal Lead Time (Days)—Enter the number of days needed internally for inventory deliveries
or transfers at the store. Internal Lead Time (Days) is used for store-to-store requisitions that have
automatically generated from a batch report.
Specifying an Internal Lead Time (Days) enables you to factor in an additional lead time required
for approvals or processing that must be considered when calculating the time needed to receive
inventory. The value specified for Internal Lead Time (Days) will be considered in conjunction with
the Lead Time (Days) specified for the supplier on the Record View page of the Suppliers form.
If you know that you require three days for a purchase order to be approved internally for this store,
you can enter 3 as the value for Internal Lead Time (Days) to accommodate the lead time when
generating demand-based requisitions for this store.
18 Reserved Parts Buffer (Days)—Enter the maximum number of days for the system to consider
when generating requisitions for reserved parts. Reserved Parts Buffer (Days) is only used for
automatic requisition generation.
For example, if you specify 60 as the value for Reserved Parts Buffer (Days), then the system will
only include parts for which there is demand within 60 days of the date on which the requisitions
are generated.
To further illustrate the function of the Reserved Parts Buffer (Days): A scheduler within your
organization creates and releases a preventive maintenance work order on which there are part
reservations that create demand for the parts on the work order. However, because the due date
for the work order is six months from the date on which you are generating requisitions, the demand
for the parts will also be six months. Therefore, since the Reserved Parts Buffer (Days) is set to
60, the system will not consider the part demand created by the released preventive maintenance
work order when generating requisitions even though the released work order has already created
demand for the parts required for the work order, because the demand for the parts on the work
order extends beyond the specified buffer of 60 days.
19 Label Printer—Enter the default printer for printing barcoding labels.
20 Label Template (Issue)—Enter the default label template for printing barcoding labels for issues.
21 Label Template (Receipt)—Enter the default label template for printing barcoding labels for purchase
order receipts.
22 Label Template (Non-PO Receipt)—Enter the default label template for printing barcoding labels
for non-purchase order receipts.
23 Label Server—Enter the server for printing barcoding labels.
24 Click Save Record.
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a bin, select the bin to delete, and then click Delete Bin. You can only delete a bin
if there are no existing part records associated with the bin.
Creating parts
Create parts to identify parts, assets, and tools that can be entered into inventory. When creating parts,
you can classify and categorize parts; identify serialized parts; and specify tax codes, warranty
information, tracking methods, buyers, and preferred suppliers to facilitate the requisition and purchasing
process. You can also designate parts as core tracked parts. Core tracked parts are issued and returned
like regular parts; however, a core tracked part can also be repaired or reconditioned like a piece of
equipment. When a part is flagged as core tracked, you can set up repair details on the Parts form to
indicate how the part is to be repaired. Core tracked parts can be repaired internally on work orders or
externally on purchase orders.
The pricing level of a part is set at either the part level or the stock level, but the prices are always set
on the Part form. Price level determination is defined by the PRICELEV installation parameter. If the
PRICELEV installation parameter is set to P, then define prices on the part level. If PRICELEV is set
to S, then define prices on the store level.
If PRICELEV is set to P and you are not using multi-organization security (MOS), you can set prices
on the Record View page of the Part form. If you have set the PRICELEV installation parameter to P
and you are using MOS, you must set prices on the Prices page of the Part form.
If the PRICELEV is set to S, you must set prices on the Stores page of the Part form regardless of
whether you are using MOS.
If you are using FIFO or LIFO as your pricing method, PRICELEV must be set to S. For LIFO/FIFO
pricing, the system creates a receipt transaction that automatically updates and inserts records into
the R5BINSTOCK and R5FIFO tables when you receive a part to store to ensure that the appropriate
unit price is used for each subsequent issue transaction. Because receipt transactions require a supplier,
the system automatically inserts an asterisk (*) as the supplier for the receipt. See "Understanding
time-based inventory valuation (LIFO/FIFO)" on page 180.
The PRICETYP installation parameter is a fixed parameter that determines the default price type that
the system uses to process storeroom transactions for parts. The default value for PRICETYP is A
(Average price); however, the system administrator can set PRICETYP to S (Standard price), L (Last
price), LIFO (Last in first out price), or FIFO (First in first out price) depending on the setting of the
PRICELEV installation parameter.
To create parts:
5 Class—Enter the class of the part. The classes shown belong to the PART entity.
6 Category—Enter the category.
7 Tool—Enter a tool for the part to identify the part as a tool. Identifying a part with a Tool enables
you to issue and return tools and track tool usage for the part. Tools are defined on the Tools form.
Note: If Track by Asset is selected for the part, then the tool is also equipment. If Track by Asset
is not selected, then the tool is only considered a part.
12 Track by Lot—Select to track parts by lot number. If you select a Lot, then a lot number will be
required for all material transactions involving the part.
16 Out of Service—Select if you do not want the part to appear in the parts lookup elsewhere in the
system.
17 Tax Code—Enter the tax to apply to the part. The values in this lookup come from a previously
defined tax structure.
18 Insp. Method—Enter the inspection method for the part.
19 Insp. Required—Select to indicate that an inspection is required for the part when it is received on
the PO Receipts form
20 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system level for the part.
21 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the assembly level for the part.
Note: You cannot enter an Assembly Level unless you entered a System Level.
22 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the component level for the part.
Note: You cannot enter a Component Level unless you entered an Assembly Level.
37 Preferred Supplier—Enter the part’s primary supplier if the system automatically generates
requisitions for this part. The system automatically populates Supplier Price, Supplier UOM, and
Qty. per UOP if they have been added to the supplier’s catalog. If you enter a Preferred Supplier
with no catalog records, the system automatically creates a record of the part in the supplier’s
catalog. You can update part details for the supplier on the Suppliers page.
Note: If the MULTIORG installation parameter is set to YES, part pricing is organization specific,
and Price Type, Average Price, Last Price, Standard Price, and Core Value are read-only.
If the PRICELEV installation parameter is set to S, part prices are recorded at the stock level on the
Stores page of the Parts form, and Price Type, Core Value, Average Price, Standard Price, and
Last Price are read-only. Part pricing at the stock level enables you to maintain different prices for
the same part in different stores.
If the PRICELEV installation parameter is set to P, part prices are recorded at the part level. Complete
steps 32-36.
38 Price Type—Select the price type for the part. The system automatically populates Price Type
depending on the setting of the PRICETYP installation parameter.
Note: If PRICETYP is set to LIFO or FIFO, the system does not display Last in First Out or First in
First Out as a price type because LIFO/FIFO is not available for part pricing when prices are set at
the part level. You must select Average price, Last price, or Standard price as the price type for the
part.
44 Part Condition Template—Enter the part condition template for the part. The system automatically
populates Part Condition Template Org..
45 Click Save Record. If a review has been performed on the Safety tab, the system automatically
populates Safety Date Review Required and Safety Reviewed By.
When you are using MOS, you can enter multiple prices for a part that belongs to a common organization.
However, you can only enter one price for a part that belongs to a specific organization.
If PRICELEV is set to P and MULTIORG is set to NO, then set prices on the Record View page of the
Parts form. If PRICELEV is set to S, set prices on the Stores page of the Parts form regardless of the
setting of the MULTIORG parameter. The PRICELEV installation parameter is fixed.
To define multiple prices of parts (MOS):
4 Manufacturer—Enter the manufacturer for the part. The system automatically populates
Manufacturer Org.
5 Manufacturer Part Number—Enter the manufacturer’s part number for the part.
6 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. The system automatically
populates Part and Part Org. If the part is a condition tracked child part, the system automatically
populates Condition,Part, and Part Org.
7 Drawing Number—Enter the drawing number if a drawing of the part is available.
8 Out of Service—Select if you do not want the system to display the manufacturer part number in
the manufacturer part number lookups.
9 Primary—Select to indicate that the manufacturer is the primary manufacturer of the part.
10 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a manufacturer, select the manufacturer to delete, and then click Delete
Manufacturer. The system does not delete the record if the manufacturer and the manufacturer
part number are selected on the Stores page of the Parts form as the Primary Manufacturer or
Primary Manufacturer Part Number.
7 Catalog Reference—Enter the supplier’s part number. It may be identical to the existing part number.
8 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the cost of the part.
9 Gross Price—Enter the supplier’s price for the part without discounts or additional fees.
10 Repair Price—Enter the supplier’s repair price for the part if the part is core tracked.
Note: Repair Price is only enabled if the Part for which you are entering a supplier record is core
tracked.
If you entered an Internal Repair Price for a part on the Repair Details page of the Parts form,
the system retrieves the Repair Price from the repair details for the part. If you did not specify an
Internal Repair Price, the system retrieves the Base Price of the part for the Repair Price.
11 Preferred—Select to indicate that the supplier is the preferred supplier of the part.
12 Minimum Order Qty.—Enter the supplier’s minimum order quantity for the part.
13 UOP—Select the supplier’s unit of purchase for the part.
14 Qty. per UOP—Enter the conversion factor if the purchase unit of measure is different from the
inventory unit of measure.
15 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the average number of days that the supplier needs to provide the ordered
goods.
16 Repair Part Number—Enter the supplier’s repair part number for the part if the part is core tracked.
Note: Repair Part Number is only enabled if the Part for which you are entering a supplier record
is core tracked.
17 Expiration Date—Enter the expiration date for the part and supplier. This is just a "catalog" date,
and the date entered indicates the date on which the supplier’s catalog information for the part
should be replaced with a new catalog entry (new price, number, etc.).
18 Tax Code—Enter the tax code for the supplier.
19 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Net Price.
Note: The system calculates the Net Price by adjusting the Gross Price for any discounts or
additional fees for the part.
The system inserts the current date in Date Last Updated and calculates Local Price based on
the currency of your organization with the following equation:
(Gross Price / Exchange Rate) / Qty. per UOP = Local Price
To delete a supplier, select the supplier to delete, and then click Delete Supplier.
To add iProcure item association, click Add iProcure Item Association.
To update iProcure items in the parts catalog, click Update iProcure Items.
To update selected iProcure items in the parts catalog, click Update Selected iProcure Items.
To view iProcure sync errors, click View iProcure Sync Errors. View the errors, and then click
Close.
system clears WO Equipment, Department, and Standard WO. The system enables Supplier,
Lead Time (Days), and Min. Repair Qty.
5 WO Equipment—Enter the work order equipment for the core tracked part.
6 Department—Enter the department for the repair work order.
Note: If you enter a value for WO Equipment, the system automatically populates Department.
Modify Department as necessary.
7 Standard WO—Enter the standard work order for repairing the part.
8 Internal Repair Price—Enter the cost of repairing the part internally. The system automatically
populates Core Value with the value entered on the Stores tab.
9 Default Core Bin—Enter the default core bin to which to return the broken core tracked part.
If you specify a Default Core Bin, the system automatically returns the broken core tracked part to
the specified bin location when you return it for repair from any form on which you can return a part
for repair.
Note: Infor strongly recommends using the Default Core Bin feature to reduce the number of
manual steps required to manage your core tracked data. Specifying a Default Core Bin in the
repair details eliminates the need to manually enter a bin location for returning the broken part when
you actually return the part for repair.
10 Use Stock Method—Select to generate the quantity to repair based on the default stock method
specified for the part in the store.
If you select Use Stock Method, the system calculates the Qty. to Repair based on the stock
replenishment method specified for the part in the holding store. For example, you selected Min/Max
as the stock method for the part and you specified 5 as the Minimum Qty. and 10 as the Maximum
Qty. for the part. The current Quantity of the part on hand is 4 and the Core Qty. is 9. When you
generate an internal repair work order for the part, the system calculates the Core Qty. as 6 parts
rather than 9 to update the Qty. on Hand of the part in stock to the specified maximum of 10.
TheCore Qty. represents the total number of core parts that are currently in a store. The system
calculates the Qty. to Repair, which is the total number of parts that must be repaired and can be
less than the Core Qty. depending on the current stock/repair levels for the part.
11 Auto-Assign—Select to indicate that the system automatically assign parts for repair from the
specified Default Core Bin when generating a repairable core work order or requisition.
If you select Auto-Assign, the system attempts to assign the number of parts in Qty. to Repair
from the specified Default Core Bin when generating repair work orders or requisitions. If there are
parts to be repaired in the Default Core Bin, the system automatically assigns the parts from the
bin location to the work order or requisition first. When the system assigns all of the parts for repair
located in the Default Core Bin or if no parts are located in that bin, the system then checks other
bin locations for the parts to assign to the work order or requisition.
Note: The assignment process for a core tracked part denotes a bin location from which a part is
to be taken for repair, not a location in which to place a part for repair.
12 Click Submit.
Note: If you are using LIFO/FIFO as your pricing method and the RPPRCCAL installation parameter
is set to NO, the system protects the internal repair price and records the base price of the part in
the R5FIFO table.
6 Preferred Supplier—Enter the preferred supplier for which to generate the requisition for repair.
7 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the lead time for the core tracked part in days. The specified lead time
is added to the date requested (system date) to determine the amount of additional lead time
necessary for processing the repair.
8 Min. Repair Qty.—Enter the minimum quantity for repair that will trigger the generation of a requisition
for the core tracked part.
9 Auto-Assign—Select to indicate that the system automatically assign parts for repair from the
specified Default Core Bin when generating a repairable cores work order or requisition.
If you select Auto-Assign, the system attempts to assign the number of parts in Qty. to Repair
from the specified Default Core Bin when generating repair work orders or requisitions. If there are
parts to be repaired in the Default Core Bin, the system automatically assigns the parts from the
bin location to the work order or requisition first. When the system assigns all of the parts for repair
located in the Default Core Bin or if no parts are located in that bin, the system then checks other
bin locations for the parts to assign to the work order or requisition.
Note: The assignment process for a core tracked part denotes a bin location from which a part is
to be taken for repair, not a location in which to place a part for repair.
10 Click Submit.
Note: If you are using LIFO/FIFO as your pricing method and the RPPRCCAL installation parameter
is set to NO, the system protects the internal repair price and records the base price of the part in
the R5FIFO table.
Scrapping parts
Scrap parts that are beyond repair.
Note: Parts must be repairable spares to scrap.
To scrap parts:
If you remove a substitute that was specified as Fully Compatible, the system removes the association
for both parts, e.g., Part A is not a substitute for Part B and Part B is not a substitute for Part A.
6 Use Auto-number—Select to have the system automatically assign the next available part number
as the new part number.
Note: If you select Use Auto-number, the system protects New Part. You cannot enter a new part
number.
7 Click Submit.
5 Class—Enter the class of the manufacturer. The classes shown belong to the MANU entity. The
system automatically populates Class Org.
6 Supplier—Enter the manufacturer’s supplier. The system automatically populates Supplier Org.
7 Out of Service—Select if the manufacturer is out of service.
8 Click Save Record.
You can also create a supplier hierarchy to establish parent/child relationships between suppliers.
When creating a supplier hierarchy, you cannot designate a supplier as a parent supplier if the supplier
is already designated as a child in a supplier hierarchy. Additionally, a supplier cannot have multiple
parent suppliers, nor can a supplier be parent supplier to itself within a supplier hierarchy. For example,
you create supplier records for the following three suppliers: AMG INC, HARTFORD BOILERS, and
SOUTHEASTERN. To create a supplier hierarchy, you select AMG INC as the parent supplier for both
HARTFORD BOILERS and SOUTHEASTERN. Because HARTFORD BOILERS and SOUTHEASTERN
are designated as children of AMG INC, neither can be selected as a parent supplier in any other
supplier hierarchy, nor can they be designated as a child to any other supplier in another supplier
hierarchy.
After defining supplier information, you can update information for both suppliers and their catalogs as
necessary; however, you cannot delete a supplier record or a record from a supplier’s catalog if they
have been associated with another record within the system.
Defining suppliers
Define suppliers to create records for the suppliers in your supplier network.
Purchase Site and Service Provider indicate whether you can purchase materials and/or services
from the supplier. If you unselect Purchase Site, you cannot select the supplier for purchase orders
for materials. Likewise, if you unselect Service Provider, you cannot select the supplier for purchases
for services or labor.
Additionally, you can specify minimum and maximum order values for the supplier to establish limits
for purchasing from this supplier. The system prevents you from creating purchase orders or requisitions
for the supplier if you exceed the specified maximum or fail to meet a minimum order value for purchasing
materials or services.
To define supplier:
14 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the average number of days the supplier needs to provide the ordered
goods or services.
15 Real-time Info—Select to indicate that the supplier provides real-time information for the items they
supply via iProcure.
16 Service Provider—Select to indicate that the supplier provides services. Unselect to indicate that
the supplier is only for purchasing materials. If unselected, the supplier cannot be selected for
purchasing or requisitioning labor.
17 Min. Order Value—Enter the minimum order amount.
18 FOB Point—Enter the supplier’s free on board shipping point.
19 Ship Via—Enter the supplier’s method of shipping.
20 Payment Method—Enter the supplier’s preferred method of payment.
21 Max. Order Value—Enter the maximum order amount.
22 Payment Terms—Enter the supplier’s payment terms.
23 Freight Terms—Enter the supplier’s freight terms.
24 Buyer—Enter the primary buyer for this supplier.
25 Contact Name—Enter the primary supplier contact.
26 Telephone and Fax Number—Enter the supplier’s phone and fax numbers.
27 E-mail Address—Enter the supplier contact’s e-mail address.
28 Our Contact—Enter the supplier’s primary contact for your organization, which is generally the
corporate buyer.
29 EDI Number—Enter the supplier’s electronic data interchange (EDI) number for processing electronic
transaction information.
30 Customer—Select to indicate the supplier is a customer. Selecting Customer inserts the supplier
into the lookup from which you select customers on any other forms within the system. If Customer
is unselected, the supplier cannot be selected for customer contracts or rentals.
31 Customer Account Code—Enter the supplier's customer account code.
32 Customer Cost Center—Enter the supplier's customer cost center.
33 Tax Code—Enter the supplier's tax code.
34 Click Save Record.
Copying suppliers
Copy a supplier including all details to a new supplier.
To copy suppliers:
1 Create a supplier.
2 Right-click, and then select Copy Supplier.
3 New Supplier—Enter the name of the new supplier. The system automatically populates the New
Supplier description.
4 Select the record types to copy, and then click Submit.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
6 Supplier Part Desc.—Enter the supplier’s description of the part.
7 Catalog Reference—Enter the supplier’s part number. It may be identical to the existing part number.
8 Gross Price—Enter the supplier’s price for the part without discounts or additional fees. After
adjusting gross price for discounts and additional fees, the system updates Net Price and calculates
Local Price based on the currency of the organization with the following equation:
(Price / Exchange Rate) / Qty. per UOP = Local Price
9 Repair Price—Enter the supplier’s price for repairing the part.
Note: Repair Price is only enabled if the Part is core tracked.
10 Tax Code—Enter the tax code for the part that identifies the tax structure to apply all of the applicable
taxes to purchases of this part.
11 Preferred Supplier—Select to indicate that this supplier is the preferred supplier of the part.
12 Expiration Date—Enter the expiration date indicating the date on which the supplier’s catalog
information should be replaced with a new catalog entry (new price, part number, etc.).
13 Comments—Enter comments for the supplier/part combination as necessary.
14 Minimum Order Qty.—Enter the minimum quantity of the part that you can order from this supplier.
15 UOP—Enter the unit of measure of purchase for the part.
16 Qty. per UOP—Enter the conversion factor if the purchase unit of measure is different from the
inventory unit of measure.
17 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the average number of days that the supplier needs to provide the ordered
goods.
18 Repair Part Number—Enter the number/code for the supplier who will actually be repairing the
part.
Note: Repair Part Number is only enabled if the Part is core tracked.
19 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a part, select the part to delete, and then click Delete Part.
The system automatically populates the Date Last Updated with the system date of the most recent
changes to the part record.
To add iProcure item association, click Add iProcure Item Association.
To update iProcure items in the parts catalog, click Update iProcure Items.
To update selected iProcure items in the parts catalog, click Update Selected iProcure Items.
To view iProcure sync errors, click View iProcure Sync Errors.
To create an alternate supplier catalog reference, click Alternate Catalog Reference.
11 Qty. per UOP—Enter the quantity per unit of purchase for the service.
Note: If you enter Purchase UOM, enter Qty. per UOP to indicate the unit of purchase in relation
to the unit of measure that the supplier has defined for the service, e.g., you hire a supplier to
landscape. The supplier defines his services in hours. It will take the supplier 5 hours to landscape.
Enter the code for hours in Purchase UOM, and then enter 5 in Qty. per UOP.
12 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the average number of days that the supplier needs to provide the service.
13 Click Submit.
The system inserts the current date in Date Last Updated and calculates Local Price based on
the currency of your organization with the following equation:
(Price / Exchange Rate) / Qty. per UOP = Local Price
Note: To remove a service, select the service to remove, and then click Remove Service.
9 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a rate, select the rate to delete, and then click Delete Rate.
Depending on your system configuration, set the stock replenishment method for the part in stock and
specify minimum and maximum quantities, a reorder level, and/or an order quantity as necessary.
The INVMETH installation parameter determines the default stock method for new parts in stock in all
stores as Reorder Level (-). Modify the stock method for a part in stock in any store as necessary. If
you have not modified the INVMETH parameter or do not specify a stock method for a stock record,
the system automatically sets the stock method to Reorder Level.
Additionally, the system does not implement any of the stock methods for a part until you enter the
information required to implement the stock method for the part. For example, if you set the stock
method of a part in stock to Min/Max, you must enter a value Minimum Qty. and Maximum Qty. to
implement the stock method for the part.
To associate stores with parts:
5 Core Value—Enter the core value of the part at the store level. The core value is the value of the
part while it is in stock awaiting repair (for both external and internal repairs). For example, you have
a part CS-ST-SPROCKET-249x284 IN part (a carbon steel skip tooth sprocket .249" x .284" thickness)
valued at $200. The core value of CS-ST-SPROCKET-249x284 IN is $70. You issue one
CS-ST-SPROCKET-249x284 IN valued at $200 to a piece of equipment. You also return one
CS-ST-SPROCKET-249x284 IN taken off of the piece of equipment for repair. Because the
CS-ST-SPROCKET-249x284 IN must be sent to the machine shop for repair, the system does not
issue an inventory credit of $200. Instead, the system issues a credit of the $70 core value to your
inventory.
6 Stock Class—Enter the stock class for the part.
7 Preferred Supplier—Enter the preferred supplier for the part.
8 Preferred Store—Enter the preferred store for the part.
Note: You cannot enter a value for both Preferred Supplier and Preferred Store. Preferred
Supplier and Preferred Store are both used for automatically generating requisitions from low
stock to provide different information for the requisition. Entering a Preferred Supplier for the part
in store indicates that the requisition type for the part is Goods Requested. Entering a Preferred
Store indicates that the requisition type for the part in store is a Store-to-Store transfer.
9 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the average number of days that the store needs to provide the part.
The Lead Time (Days) indicates a number of days that are needed internally for inventory deliveries
or transfers of the part from the store. Lead Time (Days) is only used for store-to-store requisitions.
Note: You can also enter Lead Time (Days) on the Record View page of the Stores form. The
setting of Lead Time (Days) on the Stores page of the Parts form overrides the setting of Lead
Time (Days) on the Record View page of the Stores form.
10 ABC Class—Select the class (A, B, or C) with which to associate the stock items. The system uses
this information to perform ABC analysis.
11 Stock Method—Select one of the following stock method types:
• Min/Max—Select to replenish low stock based on a specified minimum and maximum quantity
of a part to keep in stock. When the quantity of a part in stock reaches a level that is less than
the specified minimum level, the system reorders the necessary quantity of the part to replenish
the quantity to the specified maximum level.
Reorder Level and Order Qty. are read-only when Stock Method is Min/Max.
• Reorder Level—Select to replenish low stock based on a specified reorder level and order
quantity. When the quantity of a part in stock reaches the reorder level, the system reorders the
part in increments of the specified order quantity until the quantity of the part in stock reaches a
level that is greater than or equal to the reorder level.
Maximum Qty. is read-only when Stock Method is Reorder Level.
• On Demand—Select to replenish low stock only when there is a demand for it on a work order
or store-to-store requisition.
Reorder Level and Maximum Qty. are read-only when Stock Method is On Demand.
• Reorder Level—Enter the quantity at which the system is to reorder the part. The value entered
for Reorder Level specifies the quantity of a part that, when reached, triggers a purchase action
for acquiring more of that part.
12 Prevent Issue from Default Return Bin—Select this checkbox to prevent the part from being
issued from the default return bin.
13 Order Qty.—Enter the standard quantity of this part ordered at one time.
14 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. The system automatically
populates Part and Part Org. If the part is a condition tracked child part, the system automatically
populates Condition,Part, and Part Org.
Note: If the asterisk (*) condition is entered, store records will be created for each condition tracked
child associated with the part. Also, the system will automatically populate Part and Part Org. for
each store record with the values of the condition tracked child part and part org. The condition for
each store record will be the same as the condition for each condition tracked child. If the condition
entered is not an asterisk (*), Part and Part Org. will be automatically populated with the part and
part org. of the child part condition associated with the selected condition.
15 Conditions to Include in Reorder—Enter the conditions to include when the part is reordered if
the part is tracked by condition. Only Qty. on Hand for part conditions listed in the Conditions to
Include in Reorderwill be considered.
16 Record Stockouts—Select to enable the system to create a record of the part, store, and date on
which the inventory level for this part reached zero. You can view this information on a separate
form.
17 Label Printer—Enter the default printer for printing barcode labels.
18 Label Template (Issue)—Enter the default label template for printing barcode labels for issues.
19 Label Template (Receipt)—Enter the default label template for printing barcode labels for purchase
order receipts.
20 Label Printing Default—Select the default method for printing labels when the part is received to
the selected store.
21 Default Bin—Enter the default bin for the part. The system automatically populates the Default Bin
Qty. with the quantity of the parts located in the selected bin.
22 Label Template (Non-PO Receipt)—Enter the default label template for printing barcode labels
for non-purchase order receipts.
23 Label Template (Core Return)—Enter the default label template for printing barcode labels for
core returns.
24 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a store, select the store to delete, and then click Delete Store. You cannot delete
a store associated with a part if a stock record exists for the part in that store.
Click Add/Edit Comments to enter comments.
To add, edit, view, or associate a document to the STOC entity, click Add/Edit Documents. See
"Viewing and Modifying Associated Documents," "Defining Documents," or "Uploading Documents."
each store record will be the same as the condition for each condition tracked child. If the condition
entered is not an asterisk (*), Part and Part Org. will be automatically populated with the part and
part org. of the child part condition associated with the selected condition.
10 Click Submit.
Note: If you enter a value greater than zero for Qty. on Hand, the system also creates a receipt
transaction of type RECV for the part. However, if you enter zero as the quantity or do not enter a
value for Qty. on Hand, the system creates a stock record for the part but does not create a receipt
transaction for the part.
The system does not create a receipt transaction for the part when you enter a value for Core Qty.,
nor does it make any price updates.
The system treats the stock information entered for this part as a stock receipt and updates the Last
Price of the part.
To delete a stock, select the stock to delete, and then click, Delete Stock Record. You cannot
delete a stock record for a part if the quantity on hand of the part is greater than zero.
The system displays an Asset ID if the part is tracked by asset.
The system populates Price based on the setting of the PRICELEV installation parameter. If
PRICELEV is set to P, the system populates Price with the base price of the part from the Prices
tab of the Parts form. If PRICELEV is set to S, the system populates Price with the base price of
the part from the Stores tab of the Parts form, and you can change the price as necessary.
To record a stockout for a store, select the store, and then click Record Stockouts.
EOQ=
• Fixed Value—Select to calculate EOQ with a fixed value. Skip step 10.
Note: The system uses this equation to calculate EOQ based upon Fixed Value.
Holding Cost is required.
EOQ =
the Transaction Quantity and Available Quantity, and displays the asset number by which the
part is tracked for Asset ID.
Note: You cannot enter a Transaction Quantity greater than 1 when issuing parts tracked by
asset. If you want to issue multiple quantities of a part tracked by asset, you must transfer the part
with a Transaction Quantity of 1 until you have transferred the total number of the part tracked by
asset that you wish to transfer from the sending bin to the receiving bin.
6 Click Submit. The system transfers the specified quantity of the part from the sending bin to the
receiving bin, and updates the Qty. on Hand of the selected bins in the Stock list.
Note: The value displayed for On Hand Qty. indicates the current quantity of the part that is available
for the specified To Bin and Lot, which is equal to the On Hand Qty. minus any quantity of the part
that is currently allocated to any work orders.
If you delete the From Bin, the system clears Lot and then calculates the On Hand Qty. and Core
Qty. for the From Store, which is the sum of the quantities of the part in all the bins in the From
Store.
The system calculates the Core Qty. as the difference between quantity for repair in the From Bin
and the number parts that are assigned on the Repair Parts page of a Repairable Core work order
and the number of parts that are currently on External Repair requisitions.
7 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
8 From Bin—Modify the bin from which to transfer the part if necessary. If you modify From Bin, the
system removes the part.
9 To Bin—Modify the bin to which to transfer the part if necessary. If you modify To Bin, the system
removes the part.
10 Lot—Modify the lot of the part to transfer if necessary. If you modify Lot, the system removes the
part.
11 Price—Modify the price of the part to transfer if necessary. If you modify Price, the system removes
the part.
Note: When PRICELEV is set to S, the system automatically populates Price with the base price
of the part in the receiving store.
12 Asset ID—Enter the code identifying the asset associated with the part to transfer. If the part is
tracked by asset, the system enables Asset ID and you must enter an asset ID number for the part
before you can enter values for Transfer On Hand Qty. or Transfer Core Qty.
13 Transfer On Hand Qty.—Enter the number of parts to transfer from the quantity of the parts available
in the From Store.
Note: If the part is an asset part, you can only transfer one part at a time. The system automatically
displays a transfer quantity of "1" for asset parts. On Hand Qty. shows how many parts are available
in the store or store, bin, and lot.
14 Transfer Core Qty.—Enter the number of parts to transfer from the quantity of the parts designated
for repair in the From Store.
Note: You can only enter a value for Transfer On Hand Qty. or Transfer Core Qty., but not both.
When you enter a value for either Transfer On Hand Qty. or Transfer Core Qty., the system
protects the other field.
If you enter a Transfer Core Qty., the system clears the From Bin, To Bin, Asset ID, Serial
Number, Lot, and Expiration Date, and you must enter values for these fields manually.
If a Default Bin is defined for the To Store and you have not entered a value for Transfer Core
Qty., the system populates To Bin with the Default Bin.
If no Default Bin is defined for the part in the To Store and you have not entered a value for Transfer
Core Qty., the system populates To Bin depending on whether more than one bin stock record is
defined for the part in the To Store. If more than one bin-stock record is defined for the part in the
To Store, the system leaves the To Bin blank. If only one bin-stock record is defined for the part in
the To Store, the system populates To Bin with the Bin from the bin-stock record.
Generating requisitions
Generate requisitions from low stock levels to automatically create requisitions based on a stock
replenishment method and specified generation options. The system provides three stock replenishment
methods: Min/Max, Reorder Level, and On-Demand. The system also enables you to generate
requisitions for external repairs of core tracked parts.
To generate requisitions from low stock, the system examines current stock levels in stores, reserved
parts, and parts specified on requisitions, purchase orders, and in transit. The system then generates
a default requisition for all parts below the acceptable level to reach the specified stock level for the
parts. The system will either generate a requisition for a standard order quantity until the specified stock
level is reached, or it will simply order the necessary number of parts depending on the information
you have entered for the stock record.
Note: If you are using the On-Demand method, there is no minimum quantity of the part to maintain.
The system generates a requisition for the part when there is demand for the part, e.g., there is a
reservation for the part, but there is not enough of the part in stock to fill the reservation. If you make
reservations for an event in the distant future, the system generates a requisition for the required
materials. Infor EAM recommends the implementation of company policies to restrict reservation usage
to a reasonable time frame in order to minimize excessive inventory.
To implement a stock replenishment method, you must specify a stock method for the part and enter
a Minimum Qty., Maximum Qty., Order Qty., and/or a Reorder Level on the stock record, depending
on the stock method you have selected. You also must enter a Preferred Supplier.
Set Auto Req. Status on the Stores form to Approved, and all stock requisitions automatically
generated for that store are created with a status of Approved. Otherwise, you must manually approve
all purchase requisitions generated with a status of Unfinished.
When generating requisitions, the system may generate more than one requisition. Based on the
parameters you enter on the Generate Requisitions form, the system may select part lines with multiple
store, supplier, and/or buyer combinations. When you click Generate, the system generates a different
requisition for each individual store/supplier/buyer combination. The following table illustrates this
concept.
To generate external repair requisitions for core tracked parts, the core tracked parts must meet
the specified parameter criteria. The following information must also be true or set up for a core
tracked part on the Repair Details page of the Parts form to generate a requisition for the part:
Core Qty. must be greater than 0, External Repair must be selected, you must have entered a
Supplier for the part, and the Core Qty. must be greater than or equal to the Min. Repair Qty.
If you set up a Preferred Supplier on the Repair Details page of the Parts form, but you have not
on the Stores page of the Part form, the system only generates lines of type External Repair
regardless of whether you selected both Generate Purchase Requisitions and Generate External
Repair Requisitions. If you have set up a Preferred Supplier on the Stores page of the Parts
form, but not on the Repair Details page of the Parts form, the system only generates lines of type
Stock Purchase regardless of whether you selected both Generate Purchase Requisitions and
Generate External Repair Requisitions.
If you specified a Min. Repair Qty. on the Repair Details page of the Parts form, the system only
generates repair requisitions if the Core Qty. is greater than the Min. Repair Qty.
If you selected Auto-Assign for a part on the Repair Details page of the Parts form, the system
will assign repair details for external repair parts automatically.
19 Include Child Store(s) Qty.—Select to include the quantities for all child stores of the selected
Store in the requisition generation process.
20 Print Requisition—Select to print the generated requisitions.
21 Click Process. Depending on the generation options you have selected, the system retrieves part
lines for low stock items and/or core tracked parts to be repaired externally that are not listed on an
existing requisition.
The system calculates the parts to be added to the requisition based on the following equation and
the generation options you have selected:
(Qty. on Hand + Qty. at Shop + Qty. at Supplier + the quantity of the
part on requisitions + the quantity of the part on purchase order
without requisitions + in transit Qty. without requisitions) – (Reserved
Qty. + Qty. Requisitioned from store) = Quantity
If you are using the reorder level method—The system generates a requisition if the Quantity is
less than or equal to the Reorder Level. The system calculates the Requested Qty. as a multiple
of the Order Qty. that is necessary for the Quantity to reach a stock level greater than the Reorder
Level.
If you are using the min/max method—The system generates a requisition if the Quantity is less
than the Minimum Qty. The system calculates the Requested Qty. as the difference of the Maximum
Qty. and the Quantity.
If you are using the on-demand method—The system generates a requisition if the Quantity is less
than the quantity demanded. The system calculates the Requested Qty. as being equal to the
difference of the qty. demanded and the Quantity.
22 Select the part lines for which to generate requisitions. The system automatically selects all of the
part lines. You may remove individual lines from the list by unselecting the line. The system does
not generate requisitions for unselected lines. The system automatically selects all of the part lines.
You may remove individual lines from the list by unselecting the line. The system does not generate
requisitions for unselected lines.
Note: To select all the lines at once, check Select. To unselect all the lines at once, uncheck Select.
The system never generates a requisition line for parts if Prevent Reorders is selected on the Parts
form.
23 Click Generate.
Note: Depending on your system configuration, the system may require an electronic signature to
authorize status initiations for requisitions. The system displays the eSignature popup when assigning
a status for each requisition created.
Creating requisitions
Create requisitions on the Requisition form to request materials or services from outside vendors. A
requisition consists of a requisition header and requisition lines. You can create a requisition for stock
items, direct materials, or services. Stock items are materials that are kept in store and are tracked for
inventory. Direct materials are items that you requisition specifically for work orders.
The life cycle of a requisition is controlled by the requisition status. When you create a requisition, the
system assigns Unfinished as the status of the requisition. After adding all of the necessary line items
to the requisition, you can update requisition status as necessary based on your status change
authorization privileges. Status change authorizations are set up on the Status Authorizations form.
When updating requisition status, you can also update other information on the requisition. However,
the system enables and/or protects the fields available for update based on whether or not lines have
been added to the requisition, as well as the status to and from which you are updating.
In addition to having the appropriate status change authorization to change the status of a requisition,
a user must also be granted sufficient monetary approval limits for requisitions on the User form to
approve a requisition. The LIMITLEV installation parameter determines whether the system validates
requisition approval limit authorizations on the header level or at the line level, and if the total value of
a requisition exceeds a user’s requisition approval at either the header or the line level, then the user
cannot approve the requisition.
The system automatically sets the currency of the requisition header and lines based on the currency
of the organization for which the requisition is being created. You can modify the currency of a requisition
line to enable you to requisition specific materials in a different currency than the organization of the
requisition header, as long as a valid exchange rate has been defined for the currency to which you
are changing the requisition line.
Once the requisition has been reviewed and updated as necessary, change the status to Ready for
printing and print the requisition if necessary. Then, change the status to Approved/active to make the
requisition available for purchasing. After the requisition is approved, you can add it to a purchase order
to be forwarded to a supplier.
11 Class—Enter the class of the requisition. The classes shown belong to the REQ entity.
12 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the cost of the requisition.
13 Work Order–Activity—Enter the work order and activity for which the items are being requisitioned.
Note: When you specify a work order and activity at the requisition header level, the system
automatically assigns the selected work order and activity to each of the requisition lines, and you
cannot modify the work order or activity for requisition line items.
Additionally, you can only select work orders of type JOB or PPM with a status of Released or Closed
for which the Date Completed on the work order is earlier than the number of days set in the
REQDAYS installation parameter.
If the selected Work Order–Activity is a multiple equipment work order, the system enables
Equipment and it is required.
14 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the requisition.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the requisition to each equipment record on
the work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the requisition to the equipment on the
work order header only.
15 Default Approver—Enter the name of the person who will approve the requisition.
16 Click Save Record.
Note: The system populates and/or updates the following fields as parts and services are added to
the requisition, or when the status of the requisition is changed or approved: Part Lines, Service
Lines, Requisition Lines, Total Part Value, Total Service Value, Total Req. Value, Approved
By, and Date Approved.
If the status of the requisition is set to Rejected, Reject Reason becomes required, and you must
enter a reason for why the requisition was rejected.
After you have added the requested parts/services to the requisition, click Generate PO to manually
generate a requisition.
The system automatically selects Printed if you print the requisition.
Note: If the requisition line is generated from an RFQ, the system populates RFQ, RFQ Org.,
Quotation, Quotation Org., and Quotation Line when the line is created.
If an RFQ is generated from the requisition, the system populates RFQ, RFQ Org., and RFQ Line
once the RFQ line is created. When a Quotation line is awarded for an associated RFQ line, the
Quotation information is populated.
7 Manufacturer Part Number—Enter the manufacturer part number for the part. If you enter a
Manufacturer Part Number, the system populates the Manufacturer and the part description.
Note: If you have entered a Manufacturer and you also enter a new Manufacturer Part Number,
the system creates a new part record for the manufacturer.
8 Part—Enter the part to add to the requisition. The system automatically populates the part description
and Part Org. and New Orders Not Allowed if the system is flagged to prevent reorders of this
part. If the part has been flagged to prevent reorders, select a substitute part to continue.
9 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
10 Type—Select the part type for the requisitioned line.
Note: If you select Direct materials as the Type for the requisition line, you must enter a value for
Work Order–Activity.
11 Line—Modify the line number of the part on the requisition if necessary. The system automatically
assigns the next incremental line number based on the setting of the INCRLINO installation parameter.
Note: You can only edit the Line number when inserting a record. After the record is saved, the
system protects Line and it is read only.
14 Status—Enter the status of the part. The system automatically assigns Unfinished as the status
of the part, or the equivalent user code status.
15 Requested Before—Enter the date before which the requisitioned part must be received.
16 Attention To—Enter the name or department that is receiving the part.
17 Exchange Rate—Enter the exchange rate for the part on the requisition.
18 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the cost of the requisition.
19 Work Order–Activity—Enter the work order and activity for which the items are being requisitioned.
Note: If a work order and activity are entered on the requisition header, the system also populates
Work Order–Activity with the work order and activity from the requisition header and automatically
set the Type for the requisition line to Direct Purchase (PD). However, you can change the Type
to Stock Purchase (PS), and the system automatically clears the Work Order – Activity.
If the selected Work Order – Activity is a multiple equipment work order, the system enables
Equipment and it is required.
20 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the part.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the part to each equipment record on the
work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the part to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: If the selected Part is tracked by asset, then the system clears Equipment, Equipment
Org., and Related Work Order because you cannot distribute a part tracked by asset across multiple
equipment.
21 Blanket Order–Line—Enter the blanket order line to associate with the part.
Note: If you select a Blanket Order–Line, the system automatically populates the Supplier, Supplier
Catalog Reference, Part, Description, Part Org., Requested Qty., Price, UOM, Currency, and
Buyer from the blanket order line. Part and Description are protected.
If you enter a Part and then select a Blanket Order–Line, the system overwrites the selected Part
with the part from the blanket order line.
• Price quote requested before PO—Select if a quotation is preferred but not required prior to
purchasing the part.
set the Type for the requisition line to Direct Purchase (PD). However, you can change the Type
to Stock Purchase (PS), and the system automatically clears the Work Order – Activity. If the
selected Work Order – Activity is a multiple equipment work order, the system enables Equipment
and it is required.
13 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the part.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the part to each equipment record on the
work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the part to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: If the selected Part is tracked by asset, then the system clears Equipment, Equipment Org.,
and Related Work Order because you cannot distribute a part tracked by asset across multiple
equipment.
14 Exchange Rate—Enter the exchange rate for the part on the requisition.
15 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the cost of the requisition.
16 Blanket Order–Line—Enter the blanket order line to associate with the part.
Note: If you select a Blanket Order–Line, the system automatically populates the Supplier,
Supplier Catalog Reference, Part, Description, Part Org., Requested Qty., Price, UOM,
Currency, and Buyer from the blanket order line. Part and Description are protected.
If you enter a Part and then select a Blanket Order–Line, the system overwrites the selected Part
with the part from the blanket order line.
If an RFQ is generated from the requisition, the system populates RFQ, RFQ Org., and RFQ Line
once the RFQ line is created. When a Quotation line is awarded for an associated RFQ line, the
Quotation information is populated.
4 Supplier—Enter or modify the supplier for the service if necessary. If a supplier is entered on the
requisition header, the system automatically populates Supplier with the designated supplier from
the header. Specifying a supplier adds more detail to the search criteria for assigning lines to
requisitions.
Note: The system automatically populates Supplier Org. with the organization of the selected
supplier. The system also populates Supplier Catalog Reference if a catalog reference exists for
the supplier.
5 Work Order-Activity—Enter the work order and activity for the service. If Work Order - Activity
is entered on the requisition header, the system automatically populates Work Order - Activity with
the designated work order/activity from the header.
Note: The system can only automatically populate the requisition line with both the work order/activity
on the requisition header if Hired Labor is selected for the activity on the work order. If the activity
is not authorized for hired labor services, the system leaves Activity blank, and you must either
create or enter a valid activity.
To create a work order and activity, click Create Work Order/Activity.
If you select or create a Work Order–Activity, the system can automatically populate a number of
fields from the work order/activity depending on the data entered on the work order/activity, such
as the Equipment, Trade, Task Qty. (and the unit of measure), Price (from the task record),
Requested Before, Equipment Org., Department, Task, Buyer, Warranty, and Commodity. The
system also automatically populates the Service Line Total with the total cost of the services on the
service line. If the work order/activity is associated with a project and budget, the system populates
the Project and Budget from the work order/activity.
If the selected Work Order – Activity is a multiple equipment work order, the system enables
Equipment and it is required.
6 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the services.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the services to each equipment record on
the work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the services to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: When associating an order line with a multiple equipment work order, the system copies the
purchase order line to only the parent multiple equipment work order activity. The system does not
populate the purchase order line for the related work order activities.
7 Line—Modify the line number of the service on the requisition if necessary. The system automatically
assigns the next incremental line number based on the setting of the INCRLINO installation parameter.
Note: You can only edit the Line number when inserting a record. After the record is saved, Line
is protected.
9 Requested Before—Enter the date before which the requisitioned service must be completed.
10 Status—Select the status of the service.
11 Cost Code—Select the cost code for the service. If a Cost Code is entered on the requisition
header, the system automatically populates Cost Code with the designated cost code from the
header.
12 Delivery Address—Select the delivery address for the service. If a Delivery Address is entered
on the requisition header, the system automatically populates Delivery Address with the designated
delivery address from the header.
13 Expense Type—Select the expense type of the service.
14 Quotation Indicator—Select one of the following options to indicate whether a supplier quotation
is required for requisitioning the service:
• Price quote not requested—Select if a quotation is not required prior to requisitioning the
service.
• Request a price quote—Select if a quotation is required prior to requisitioning the service.
• Price quote requested before PO—Select if a quotation is preferred but not required prior to
purchasing the service.
• Hours from service—Select if the requisitioned service is to be paid at an hourly rate. If you
select Hours from service, you must enter a Work Order-Activity.
For example, if the Hours Requested are 1.5 and the Task Qty. is 1, the system calculates the
ratio between the two as follows:
1.5 / 1 = 1.5
If you update the Hours Requested to 4, then the system calculates the Task Qty. as follows:
4 / 1.5 = 2.67
Since the reverse is true if you update the Task Qty., if you update Task Qty. to 4, then the system
calculates the Hours Requested as follows:
4 x 1.5 = 6
If you clear Hours Requested, the system retains the current value for Task Qty.
Copying requisitions
Copy requisition details to a new requisition.
To copy requisitions:
1 Create a requisition.
2 Right-click, and then select Copy Requisition.
3 New Requisition—Enter the name of the new requisition. The system automatically populates the
New Requisition description.
4 Select the record types to copy, and then click Submit.
5 Enter the information necessary to add the first activity to the work order.
6 Click Submit. The system populates Work Order-Activity on the Services page of the Requisitions
form.
Note: Click Reset to clear all of the fields on the form.
4 Click Assign Repair Details. The system displays the Repair Details popup.
The system displays the Part and Part Org. of the selected part. Track by Asset is selected if the
part is tracked by asset. The system automatically populates Total Qty. to Repair and Total Qty.
Assigned. Total Qty. to Repair indicates the quantity of the part that is currently in stock for repair.
The Total Qty. Assigned indicates the quantity of the part that is in stock for repair and has already
been assigned to a repair bin location.
5 Select the store, bin, lot, and asset from which to assign a quantity of the part to repair.
6 Qty. Assigned—Enter the quantity of the part to assign for repair.
Note: The value entered for Qty. Assigned cannot be greater than Core Qty..
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a repair part line from the Parts on a requisition, select the repair part line to delete,
and then click Delete Repair Part.
Approving requisitions
To approve requisitions:
Rejecting requisitions
To reject requisitions:
The LIMITLEV installation parameter determines whether approval limits are set at the header or line
level. The system administrator can set LIMITLEV for Purchase Order and/or PO Approval at either
the header level or the line level on the Installation codes form.
If you attempt to create a purchase order that exceeds your monetary approval limits for the purchase
order line or header level, the system does not generate the purchase order.
NoteThe scenarios for automatic purchase order generation apply to both the purchase order header
and lines, and they are the same whether LIMITLEV is set to the header or line level for Purchase
Order Limit.
Additionally, if the ASSETASS installation parameter is set to P and any of the approved requisition
lines include parts tracked By Asset that have not been associated with objects, you must create an
asset for each part tracked By Asset.
When generating automatic purchase orders, the system may generate more than one purchase order.
Based on the search criteria you enter on the Generate PO form, the system may return requisition
lines with multiple store and/or supplier combinations. When you select Create PO, the system generates
a different purchase order for each individual store/supplier combination. The following table illustrates
this concept.
If a requisition line contains a repairable spare part to be repaired externally and there are no repair
details assigned for the part via either the auto-assignment process or the Repair Details popup, the
system processes external repair lines as follows:
• If PO Status is Unfinished in Purchase Order Options, the system adds the external repair part to
a new or existing purchase order
• If the status of the purchase order is Ready for Printing, the system adds the external repair part
to a new purchase order
• If the status of the purchase order is Approved, the system does not add the external repair part
to either a new or existing purchase order, because a purchase order cannot be Approved without
repair details.
If an external repair part line has repair details assigned, the system adds the external repair line to a
new or existing purchase order when you generate the purchase order(s). When the purchase order
is Approved, the Requested Qty. of the part is moved from Qty. for Repair to Qty. at Supplier on
the stock record of the part, and it is also removed from the Qty. for Repair on the bin stock record of
the part.
5 Create PO—Select to create a new purchase order from the requisition lines.
Note: You may also select Add to Existing PO.
11 Select the requisition lines to associate with the PO. The system automatically selects all of the
requisition lines for which a supplier is specified. You may remove individual lines from the list by
unselecting the line. The line remains outstanding, and you can assign it to a future purchase order.
Note: To select all the lines at once, check Select. To unselect all the lines at once, uncheck Select.
12 Supplier—If a supplier is not specified for a part, select a supplier for the part. Press F9 to display
the supplier lookup. The system automatically populates Supplier Org.
Note: If the part does not currently exist in the supplier’s catalog, the system creates a record for
the part in the supplier’s catalog.
For parts that are included in a supplier’s catalog but do not have a Gross Price (for purchases) or
Repair Price (for repairs) recorded in the supplier catalog, the system updates/inserts the Gross
Price or Repair Price for the part in the supplier catalog when the purchase order line is generated.
13 Click Generate. The system generates a purchase order, assigns the appropriate system status,
and assigns the organization of the purchase order based on the organization of the store on the
requisition.
Note: Depending on your system configuration, the system requires an electronic signature to
authorize status initiations for purchase orders. The system displays the eSignature popup when
assigning a status for the purchase order.
5 Add to Existing PO—Select to add the requisition lines to an existing purchase order.
Note: You may also select Create PO.
6 Existing PO—Enter the PO number of the PO for which to add requisition lines.
7 Print PO—Select to print a new purchase order from the requisition lines.
8 Click Process to retrieve the requisition lines.
9 Select the requisition lines to associate with the PO. The system automatically selects all of the
requisition lines for which a supplier is specified. You may remove individual lines from the list by
unselecting the line. Unselected lines remain outstanding, and you can assign them to a future
purchase order.
Note: To select all the lines at once, check Select. To unselect all the lines at once, uncheck Select.
10 Supplier—If a supplier is not specified for a part, select a supplier for the part. Press F9 to display
the supplier lookup. The system automatically populates Supplier Org.
Note: If the part does not currently exist in the supplier’s catalog, the system creates a record for
the part in the supplier’s catalog.
For parts that are included in a supplier’s catalog but do not have a Gross Price (for purchases) or
Repair Price (for repairs) recorded in the supplier catalog, the system updates/inserts the Gross
Price or Repair Price for the part in the supplier catalog when the purchase order line is generated.
11 Click Generate.
Note: Depending on your system configuration, the system requires an electronic signature to
authorize status initiations for purchase orders. The system displays the eSignature popup when
assigning a status for the purchase order.
Receiving parts
Receive parts against existing purchase orders or for items purchased without a purchase order such
as credit card purchases.
When you approve lines on a PO receipt, the system moves the lines from the Active Lines page to
the Processed Lines page, changes the status of the receipt from Unfinished to Approved, and adds
the received parts to stock unless otherwise indicated.
Note: An automatic update for requisitions and purchase orders assigns a status of Complete when
all lines of the requisition or purchase order are received. If there are subsequent returns affecting the
requisition or purchase order, the system opens the affected record and automatically changes the
status accordingly. Four installation parameters apply to this automatic update: RQSTRECV, RQSTALLR,
POSTRECV, and POSTALLR.
3 Organization—Select the organization for which to create the non-purchase order receipt if you
use multi-organization security. The organization you select must be a specific organization to which
you belong.
4 Non-PO Receipt—Enter a description of the non-PO receipt in the adjacent field. The system
automatically assigns a number to the non-PO receipt after you save the record.
5 Status—Select the status of the non-PO receipt. The system automatically assigns an Unfinished
status to the non-PO receipt, or the equivalent user code status.
6 Supplier—Enter the supplier from which the materials were purchased.
7 Store—Enter the store to which the materials were received.
8 Reference Number—Enter the reference number for the receipt transaction. The reference number
can be a credit card approval number, a verification code, a transaction reference number, etc.
9 Click Save Record.
3 Click Retrieve Lines. The system populates the Packing Slip list with outstanding part lines based
on the information you entered on the PO receipt header. The system automatically populates Part,
Part Description, Outstanding Qty. (UOP), and Condition.
4 Receipt Qty. (UOP)—Enter the number of items received in the unit of purchase.
5 Receipt Qty. (UOM)—Enter the number of the parts that were actually received.
6 Delivery Qty. (UOD)—Enter the number of delivery items, and then enter the unit of measure per
unit of delivery.
7 UOP per Delivery UOD—Enter the unit of purchase for the part per the unit of delivery.
8 Click Record Packing Slip. The system records the packing slip lines, changes the system status
of the PO Receipt header to R (Packing Slip Recorded), and creates active lines for the packing
slip lines.
Note: The packing slip Receipt Qty. (UOM) is the value recorded for Receipt Qty. (UOM) on the
Active Lines page.
To remove a packing slip line, select the line to remove, and then click Remove Line.
To remove all packing slip lines, click Remove All Lines.
To remove multiple packing slip lines, click Remove Multiple Lines. Select the lines to remove,
and then click Remove Selected Lines.
4 Select the part line for which to enter line details. The system populates the part information including
the Condition from the purchase order in Active Line Details.
Note: If the PDRCPTTO installation parameter is set to EVENT, the system automatically selects
Direct for each direct material part, and it is updateable. If PDRCPTTO is set to STORE, the system
automatically selects Direct, and it is updateable.
If the part is tracked by lot, By Lot is selected and protected.
5 Repair Condition— Enter the repair condition if the part is for an external repair and condition
tracked.
6 Verify the number of parts received for each line and/or edit the information for each part on the
receipt as necessary.
7 Bin—Edit the bin number for the part.
Note: If you specified a default bin for the part in store on the part record, the system automatically
populates Bin with the default bin.
If the part is for an external repair and tracked by condition, the system automatically populates Bin
with the default bin for the part associated with the repair condition.
8 Receipt Qty. (UOM)—The system automatically populates Receipt Qty. (UOM) with the number
of the parts that were actually received. The system populates Receipt Qty. (UOP) with the actual
number of items received in the unit of purchase, and it is protected.
For example, if you received one case of the item, and each case contains 12 items, then the system
displays 12 as the Receipt Qty. (UOM) and 1 as the Receipt Qty. (UOP).
Note:
If you received fewer or more parts than you ordered, edit the received quantity. To edit Receipt
Qty. (UOM), select the line to edit on the Active Lines list. The system populates the line information
in the Active Line Details.
If you receive only a partial order (e.g., you ordered 100 widgets and only 50 came in), receive the
materials, and then save the record. When the rest of the order comes in, create a new PO receipt
to close the purchase order. You cannot modify the first PO receipt.
If the part to receive is tracked by asset, the system creates a separate line for each by asset part,
populates the Receipt Qty. (UOM) with 1, and you must enter an Asset ID for each part to receive.
If you are receiving or scrapping core tracked parts from an external supplier repair that were
assigned from the same lot in a core bin, the system creates one line for each part on the receipt
and populates Receipt Qty. (UOM) with the outstanding quantity of the part from the purchase
order. If the external repair parts were assigned from more than one lot in a core bin, the system
also creates one line for each part/lot combination on the receipt, but the system does not populate
Receipt Qty. (UOM).
The system automatically populates the Qty. per UOP with the quantity of the part per unit of
purchase from the purchase order line.
For parts tracked by asset, the Receipt Qty. (UOM) cannot be greater than the outstanding quantity
of the part on the purchase order. However, for parts that are not tracked by asset, the Receipt
Qty. (UOM) can be greater than the outstanding quantity of the part on the purchase order if the
OVERRECV installation parameter is set to YES. If OVERRECV is set to NO, the Receipt Qty.
(UOM) cannot be greater than the outstanding quantity on the purchase order.
9 Repair Price—If the part is a core tracked part to be repaired externally by a supplier, enter the
supplier’s price for repairing the part.
Note: Repair Price is only enabled if the RPPRCCAL installation parameter is set to YES and the
part selected is a core tracked part from an external repair purchase order line. If the RPPRCCAL
installation parameter is set to NO, Repair Price is protected regardless of whether the part is core
tracked.
If a part is core tracked, the system enables Scrapped Qty., and Lot is protected.
10 Asset Type—If the part is tracked by asset, enter the asset type for the part to receive.
11 Department—Enter the department for the part to receive.
Note: For parts tracked by asset, an Asset ID and Department must be specified. The system may
automatically populate these fields depending on the ASSETASS and AUTOANUM installation
parameters.
If the ASSETASS installation parameter is set to P (for "Purchase Order"), assets are created for
parts tracked by asset at the time you create the purchase order of the parts to receive, and the
assets are already associated with the parts to receive. So, when you click Retrieve Parts, the
system automatically populates Asset ID, Asset Type, Asset Org., and Department and they are
protected. However, if the ASSETASS installation parameter is set to R (for "Receipt"), you must
create the assets to associate with each part tracked by asset at the time of receipt, and you must
enter Asset ID, Asset Org., and Department. Asset Type is also required, and the system
automatically populates Asset Type with the Asset system type.
If the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to YES, the system will automatically enter an asset
number for each Asset ID when you click Approve Parts.
16 Asset ID—If the part is tracked by asset, enter the code identifying the asset to associate with the
part. The system automatically populates Asset Org.
17 Scrapped Qty.—If the part is core tracked, you can enter the quantity of the parts to scrap because
they cannot be repaired.
18 Print Qty.—Enter the quantity of the label(s) to print for the part to receive.
Note: The system automatically sets the Print Qty. based on the setting of Label Printing Default
on the Stores tab of the Parts form:
• If set to No Labels—Print Qty. is null.
• If set to Single Labels—Print Qty. is set to 1.
• If set to Label for Each Item—Print Qty. is equal to the Receipt Qty. (UOM), but you can modify
the Print Qty. as necessary. Updating Print Qty. does not affect the Receipt Qty. (UOM).
Click Print Label(s) to print labels for the part(s) to receive, and the system will print labels based
on your system configuration and the specified Print Qty.
19 After editing the part details for the part(s) on the receipt, click Submit.
20 Review the Active Lines list, and then click Approve All Parts.
Note: When you approve the receipt for external repair lines, the system moves Receipt Qty. from
the Qty. at Supplier to Qty. on Hand on the stock record of the part. Scrapped Qty. is subtracted
from Qty. at Supplier on the stock record, but it is not added to Qty. on Hand.
If the part is tracked by asset, the status of the associated asset is updated to Purchased/In Store.
If you scrap the part tracked by asset, the status of the associated asset is updated to Withdrawn,
and the status of any child assets in a hierarchy are also updated to Withdrawn.
If both a Receipt Qty. and Scrapped Qty. are entered, the system creates one transaction line of
type RECV for both a receipt and the scrap transactions.
If All Equipment is selected for Equipment on a line, the system creates a header and line
transaction for each Related Work Order activity associated with the multiple equipment work order.
Each transaction is used to receive the appropriate number of parts for each equipment on the
multiple equipment work order. The quantity for each transaction is equal to the quotient of the
Receipt Qty (UOM) and the number of equipment on the multiple equipment work order. The system
automatically applies any remainder of the receipt quantity that cannot be evenly distributed to the
last equipment record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If a specific Equipment record is selected, then the system creates a transaction for the Related
Work Order associated with the selected Equipment and activity.
If WO Header Equipment is selected for Equipment on a line, then the system creates a transaction
for only the work order on the purchase order line.
When you approve the receipt for external repair lines and the part is condition tracked, the system
updates Qty. at Supplier for the purchase order line part instead of the repair condition part. Qty.
on Hand is updated for the repair condition part instead of the purchase order line part. In addition,
if the part is tracked by asset and received, the status of the associated asset is updated to
Purchased/In Store. If you scrap the part tracked by asset, the status of the associated asset is
updated to Withdrawn.
Field Description
Line Line number of the part on the receipt
Part Code of the received part
Description Description of the Part
Part Org. Organization of the Part
Type Type of part, e.g., Stock Items, Direct Materials,
and External Repairs
Received Qty. Quantity of the part that was received
Scrapped Qty. If the part is a repairable spare part, the system
displays the quantity of the part that was
scrapped because it could not be repaired.
Repair Price If the part is a repairable spare part, the system
displays the price of repairing the part.
Originator The User ID of the user from whom the stock
transaction originated
Bin Bin into which the part was received for the re-
ceipt transaction
Lot Lot of the received part
Asset ID Identification number of the associated asset
Asset Type Type of the associated asset
Asset Description Description of the associated asset
Asset Org. Organization of the associated asset
Department Department of the part/asset
Serial Number Serial number of the part/asset
Manufacturer Lot Lot of the part assigned by the manufacturer
Field Description
Expiration Date The date the price for the part expires
Purchase Order Purchase order for which the part was received
Purchase Order Org. Organization of the Purchase Order
Receipt Trans. System-generated number identifying the part
receipt
Return Trans. System-generated number identifying the part
return
Return Qty. Number of the part that was returned for the re-
ceipt
Reason for Return Explanation of why the part was returned that
was entered during the receipt/return transaction
Work Order Work order for which the part was purchased/re-
ceived
Activity Activity on the work order for which the part was
purchased/received
Direct Indicates that the received part was for a pur-
chase order line type of Direct Materials
Equipment The equipment for which the part was pur-
chased/received if the associated Work Order
and activity is a multiple equipment work order
Equipment Org. Organization of the Equipment if the associated
Work Order and activity is a multiple equipment
work order
Related Work Order Number identifying the system-generated MEC
work order created for the Equipment if the as-
sociated Work Order and activity is a multiple
equipment work order
Direct Indicates that the received part was for a pur-
chase order line type of Direct Materials
By Lot Indicates that the part received is tracked by lot
Supplier Catalog Reference Number of the part in the supplier’s part catalog
Assigned To Employee code of the employee to whom the
work order is assigned
Name Name of the employee to whom the work order
is assigned
3 Organization—Select the organization for which to create the non-purchase order receipt if you
use multi-organization security. The organization you select must be a specific organization to which
you belong.
4 Non-PO Receipt—Enter a description of the non-PO receipt in the adjacent field. The system
automatically assigns a number to the non-PO receipt after you save the record.
5 Status—Select the status of the non-PO receipt. The system automatically assigns an Unfinished
status to the non-PO receipt, or the equivalent user code status.
6 Supplier—Enter the supplier from which the materials were purchased.
7 Store—Enter the store to which the materials were received.
8 Reference Number—Enter the reference number for the receipt transaction. The reference number
can be a credit card approval number, a verification code, a transaction reference number, etc.
9 Click Save Record.
4 Part—Enter the part to add to the non-PO receipt. The system automatically populates the part
description and Part Org., and Bin based on the information you entered on the Stores and Stock
pages of the Parts form.
Note: The system automatically selects Track by Asset for parts tracked by asset, and you must
specify an Asset ID, Asset Type, and Asset Org.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
6 Receipt Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part that you received.
Note: For parts tracked by asset, the system only receives the part in quantities of 1. The system
automatically assigns 1 as the Receipt Qty. You must manually add lines for each asset to receive
if you want to receive more than one asset.
13 Click Print Label(s) to print labels for the part(s) to receive, and the system will print labels based
on your system configuration and the specified Print Qty.
14 Price—Enter the price of the part.
15 Asset ID—Enter the asset ID number for the part if the part is tracked by asset.
16 Asset Type—Enter the asset type for the part if the part is tracked by asset.
17 Asset Org.—Enter the organization for the asset for the part if the part is tracked by asset.
Note: If the ASSETASS installation parameter is set to P, a by asset part must already be associated
with an asset with a status of Awaiting Purchase to receive the part. If you want to receive a part
tracked by asset, you must enter an Asset ID, but all other asset-related fields are protected. After
selecting an Asset ID, the system automatically populates Asset Type, Asset Org., Description,
Department, and Serial Number (if applicable).
If the ASSETASS installation parameter is set to R, you can create assets when you are receiving
a part tracked by asset. You can either associate an existing asset with the part, or you can manually
enter asset information to create new assets. If you select an existing asset as the Asset ID, the
system automatically populates the Asset Type, Asset Org., Department, and Serial Number (if
applicable) from the asset record. If you choose to manually enter the asset information, you must
enter an Asset ID, Asset Type, Asset Org., and Description for each asset. The system
automatically populates Asset Type with type A (or the system equivalent); however, you can update
the Asset Type as necessary.
If the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to YES and the ASSETASS installation parameter
is set to R, the system automatically generates asset numbers for parts tracked by asset, but you
must enter an Asset Type, Asset Org., and Description for each asset. You can also update Asset
ID if necessary. The system automatically populates Asset Type with type A (or the system
equivalent); however, you can update the Asset Type as necessary. When you save the record,
the system saves the asset information on the receipt; however, the system does not actually create
any assets until the receipt Status is Approved. Upon approval of the receipt, the system creates
all of the new assets using the part descriptions.
18 Serial Number—Enter the serial number for the part if the part is tracked by asset.
19 Click Submit.
Note: To remove a part line, select the part line to remove, and then click Remove Part.
1 Open the Issue/Return Parts form. The system automatically populates Transaction Type with
Issue to enable issue functionality.
2 Store—Enter the store from which to issue parts. The system automatically populates Date with
the current system date. If a default store is defined for the current user, the system automatically
populates Store with the user’s default store.
3 Choose one of the following options:
• Issue to a work order—Enter the Work Order–Activity. The system automatically populates
Equipment, Equipment Org., Project–Budget, Cost Code, and Department from the work
order, as well as the Material List or Pick Ticket if they have been associated with the Activity.
• Issue to a piece of equipment—Enter the Equipment. The system automatically populates Cost
Code and Department.
Note: If the selected Equipment is associated with a multiple equipment work order, then the
system also populates Equipment Org. and Related Work Order.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and you are issuing a By Asset part, then the system
clears the Transaction Details.
4 Issue To—Enter the code of the employee to whom to make the issue.
5 Reference Number—Enter a reference number for the issue. The reference number is simply an
internal reference number that is not used by the system for any validation.
6 Material List—Enter the material list from which to issue. If a material list is already attached with
the selected work order/activity, the system automatically populates Material List in the Issue From
/ Return To section and enables the Material List hyperlink in the Transaction Details section.
You can modify Material List as necessary when the parts on the material list have been added to
the Transaction Details list.
7 Pick Ticket—Enter the pick ticket from which to issue. If a pick ticket is already attached with the
selected work order/activity, the system automatically populates Pick Ticket in the Issue From /
Return To section and enables the Pick Ticket hyperlink in the Transaction Details section. You
can modify Pick Ticket as necessary when the parts on the pick ticket have been added to the
Transaction Details list.
Note: Pick tickets are not available for issuing parts to a project/budget.
If the selected WO–Activity associated with the Pick Ticket is a multiple equipment work order,
then the system automatically populates Equipment with WO Header Equipment.
11 Part—Enter the part to issue. The system displays the available quantity, the bin location, and the
lot number. Change the bin location and lot number as necessary. The system populates Available
Qty. with the sum of the quantities of the part in all the bins in the selected Store minus any quantity
of the part that is currently allocated to any work orders.
If the part to issue is tracked by asset, the system automatically selects Track by Asset and enters
1 as the Transaction Qty., and you must enter a value for Asset ID for the part. The system
populates Available Qty. with the total quantity of the part that is currently available.
The system automatically populates Available Qty. UOM and Transaction Qty. UOM.
Note: You cannot enter a Transaction Qty. greater than 1 when issuing parts tracked by asset. If
you want to issue multiple quantities of a part tracked by asset, you must add the part tracked by
asset to the Transaction Details list on individual lines with a Transaction Qty. of 1 until you have
reached the number of the part tracked by asset that you wish to issue for the transaction. Track
by Asset is hidden by default.
If the part to issue is tracked as part of a kit, the system creates a single transaction line for the kit.
12 Bin—Select the bin from which to issue the part. The system enters the default bin for the part if
applicable.
Note: When you select a Bin, the system updates the Available Qty. with the quantity of the part
in the selected Bin minus any quantity of the part that is currently allocated to any work orders from
that Bin.
13 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
14 Lot—Select the lot from which to issue the part. The system automatically populates Expiration
Date, Serial Number, and Manufacturer Lot.
15 Transaction Qty.—Enter the number of parts to issue. The system automatically enters the Available
Qty. of the part if applicable.
16 Print Qty.—Enter the quantity of the label(s) to print. The system automatically sets the Print Qty.
based on the setting of Label Printing Default on the Stores tab of the Part form:
• If set to No Labels—Print Qty. is null.
• If set to Single Labels—Print Qty. is set to 1.
• If set to Label for Each Item—Print Qty. is equal to the Receipt Qty., but you can modify the
Print Qty. as necessary. Updating Print Qty. does not affect the Receipt Qty.
17 Print Core Return Qty.—Enter the quantity of the core return label(s) to print.
18 Failed Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part that failed.
Note: The system does not allow part failures on an Issue for parts tracked by asset.
26 Click Submit Transaction. The system issues the part(s) and creates a stock transaction of type
I for the issuing store with a negative quantity for the issue.
Note: To print labels for the issue transaction, click Print Label(s).
To print labels for the core return transaction, click Print Core Return Label(s).
To record a stockout for a part, select the part, and then click Record Stockouts.
4 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to issue the Transaction Qty.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly to issue the Transaction Qty. to each equipment record on the
work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to issue the Transaction Qty. to the equipment on the work order
header only.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the Transaction Qty. that could not be
distributed evenly to the last equipment record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipmentand at least one of the related work orders has a Completed status (or
equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to select whether to distribute
the cost of the issue against all equipment or against only open related work orders regardless of
whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or their user-status equivalents).
5 Cost Code—Enter the cost code for which to issue the part. The system populates the description
in the adjacent field.
6 Issue To—Enter the code of the employee to whom to make the issue.
7 Reference Number—Enter a reference number for the issue. The reference number is simply an
internal reference number that is not used by the system for any validation.
8 Material List—Enter the material list from which to issue parts for the multiple equipment work
order.
9 Pick Ticket—Enter the pick ticket from which to issue parts for the multiple equipment work order.
The system automatically selects WO Header Equipment for Equipment and enables the Pick
Ticket hyperlink in the Transaction Details.
Note: If a pick ticket is associated with the selected multiple equipment WO – Activity, then you
cannot select another value for Equipment other than WO Header Equipment. Pick tickets cannot
be used to issue parts across all equipment on a multiple equipment work order or to a specific
equipment on a work order.
Note: You cannot enter a Transaction Qty. greater than 1 when issuing parts tracked by asset. If
you want to issue multiple quantities of a part tracked by asset, you must add the part tracked by
asset to the Transaction Details list on individual lines with a Transaction Qty. of 1 until you have
reached the number of the part tracked by asset that you wish to issue for the transaction. Track
by Asset is hidden by default.
When issuing parts to a multiple equipment work order for which All Equipment is selected, parts
tracked by asset are not available for issue, and the system splits the Transaction Qty. equally
among all the related work orders.
18 Click Submit Transaction. The system issues the part(s) and creates a stock transaction of type
I for the issuing store with a negative quantity for the issue.
Note: To print labels for the issue transaction, click Print Label(s).
If the AUTOPART installation parameter is set to AUTO, then the system determines whether each
part is associated with the equipment’s Parts Associated list. If any of the parts are not associated
with the equipment’s Parts Associated list, the system updates the list with the parts and assigns
the Transaction Qty. as the part’s associated Quantity. If a part is already associated but the
Transaction Qty. is greater than the existing associated Quantity, then the system updates the
associated Quantity with the Transaction Qty. The system does not update the existing associated
Quantity if the Transaction Qty. is not greater.
You can issue parts on a defined material list to a WO – Activity multiple times. However, you can
only issue parts on a temporary material list created by selecting parts for a work order to the work
order for which the temporary list is created.
If the material list includes parts that are associated with equipment codes or equipment categories,
the system only adds part records to the Transaction Details list that are associated with the equipment
on the header or the equipment category or parts that are not associated with any equipment or
equipment category.
Example
You create MATERIAL LIST 1 with the following parts:
You then create a work order WO1 for EQUIP1 of CATEGORY1. After creating the WO1, you open
the Issue/Return Parts form to issue parts to WO1. You enter MATERIAL LIST 1 as the Material List
on the issue header and then click the Material List hyperlink, and then the system retrieves the
following parts and quantities:
Part Quantity
PART1 1
PART3 1
PART3 1
PART4 3
PART4 4
PART5 1
Note: If a part on a material list is tracked by asset, then each by asset part on the material list is
entered on a separate line regardless of the Available Qty. and the system automatically enters 1 as
the Transaction Qty.
To add parts on a material list to an issue:
If a part on a pick ticket is tracked by asset, then each by asset part on the pick ticket is entered on a
separate line regardless of the Available Qty. and the system automatically enters 1 as the Transaction
Qty.
To add parts from a pick ticket to an issue:
• Return from a piece of equipment—Enter the Equipment. The system automatically populates
Description, Department, and Cost Code from the equipment record. If selected Equipment
is associated with a pick ticket, the system automatically populates Pick Ticket from the associated
Equipment record.
Note: If the selected Equipment is associated with a multiple equipment work order, then the
system automatically populates Equipment Org. and Related Work Order. See "Returning
parts from multiple equipment work orders" on page 262.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and you are issuing a By Asset part, then the system
clears the Transaction Details.
8 Department—Enter the department from which to return parts. The system automatically populates
Department if you have selected a work order/activity or piece of equipment.
9 Date—Modify the date on which to make the return. The system automatically populates Date with
the current date and time.
10 Part—Enter the part to return. The system displays parts in the Part lookup based on the setting
of the RTNANY installation parameter and whether you are returning to a work order, a piece of
equipment, or a project.
Note: If the Work Order selected for the return is a multiple equipment work order, the system
displays only parts issued to the header work order or any of the related MEC work orders in the
list of values, because Equipment is automatically populated with All Equipment. When you select
the part to return, the system automatically populates Transaction Qty., Bin, and Lot. The
Transaction Qty. is the difference of the total quantity issued to all equipment on the work order
and the quantity already returned from all equipment on the work order. You can modify the
Transaction Qty., Bin, and Lot as necessary and add additional equipment to the Parts list.
If the part to return is tracked by asset, the system automatically selects Track By Asset, enters 1
as the Transaction Qty., and you must enter a value for Asset ID for the part. The system
automatically populates Available Qty. of 1 until you have reached the number of the part tracked
by asset that you wish to return for the transaction.
If the part is a core tracked part, the system enables Core Return. If you select Core Return, the
system populates Bin with the Default Core Bin. If the Default Core Bin overwrites a different bin,
then the system clears the Lot, Expiration Date, and Manufacturer Lot.
If you unselect Core Return, the system populates Bin with the Default Bin. If the Default Bin
overwrites a different bin, then the system clears the Lot, Expiration Date, and Manufacturer Lot.
If the part is tracked by asset and you unselect Core Return, the system also clears the Asset ID
and Serial Number.
The system automatically populates Transaction Qty. UOM.
Note: If you submit a return transaction for a core tracked part with Core Return unselected, the
system processes the return as a normal return.
The system automatically sets Print Qty. based on the setting of Label Printing Default on the
Stores tab of the Parts form:
• If set to No Labels—Print Qty. is null.
• If set to Single Labels—Print Qty. is set to 1.
• If set to Label for Each Item—Print Qty. is equal to the Receipt Qty., but you can modify the
Print Qty. as necessary. Updating Print Qty. does not affect the Receipt Qty.
16 Click Add to List. The system adds the record to the Transaction Details list.
Note: The Transaction Details list acts as a buffer to temporarily store the parts to return without
actually returning them until the transaction is submitted. You can add/remove parts for the return
as necessary before submitting the transaction and saving the information to the database. Click
Add Part to add additional parts to the return. To remove a part from the Transaction Details list,
select the part to remove from the return, and then click Remove from List.
Additionally, you can also update information in the Issue To/Return From and/or Issue From/Return
To sections for the transaction as necessary before adding records to the Transaction Details list.
17 Click Submit Transaction. The system returns the part(s) and creates a stock transaction of type
I for the return store with a positive quantity for the return.
When you submit a return transaction for a core tracked part with Core Return selected, the system
adds the transaction quantity to the repair quantity of the part held in bin stock. The returned parts
are added to Core Qty. on the Repair Details tab of the Parts form rather than Qty. on Hand on
the Stores tab of the Parts form.
If the part is core tracked and is also tracked by asset, the asset status is changed to To Be Repaired,
and the system also updates the status of all dependent children and grandchildren of the asset if
the part tracked by asset is the parent in an asset hierarchy.
Note: If the returned part is a LIFO/FIFO part, the system determines the price for the return based
on the original issue transaction. See "Understanding time-based inventory valuation (LIFO/FIFO)"
on page 180. LIFO/FIFO pricing does not assign a LIFO/FIFO price to a core tracked part returned
for repair. The transaction price for the return will be the Core Value of the part.
To print labels for the return transaction, click Print Label(s).
If you are creating a return for a multiple equipment work order and the RTNANY installation
parameter is set to NO and All Equipment is selected for Equipment, you can only return a part
that was previously issued and for which there is a sufficient quantity issued to the equipment.
populates Date with the current system date and Transaction Type with Issue to enable issue
functionality.
3 Transaction Type—Select Return to enable return functionality.
4 WO–Activity—Enter the multiple equipment work order/activity to which to return the part. The
system automatically populates Equipment with All Equipment. The system also populates Related
Work Order, Cost Code, and Department from the work order/activity. Equipment is required and
Related Work Order is protected.
If the selected multiple equipment WO–Activity is associated with a project/budget, then the system
automatically populates Project–Budget, and it is protected.
If the selected WO–Activity is associated with a pick ticket, the system automatically populates
Pick Ticket from the associated WO–Activity or Equipment record.
Note: The system does not display work orders in the WO–Activity lookup for which the value
specified for the RTNDAYS installation parameter has been exceeded.
5 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the Transaction Qty.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the Transaction Qty. to each equipment record on the
work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the Transaction Qty. to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the return quantity to the last equipment
record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a Completed status
(or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to select whether to
distribute the cost of the return against only open related work orders or against all equipment,
regardless of whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or their user-status
equivalents).
Note: Because the selected WO – Activity is a multiple equipment work order, Equipment is
automatically populated with All Equipment, and the system displays only parts issued to the work
order header or any of the related MEC work orders in the Part lookup. When you select the part
to return, the system automatically populates Transaction Qty., Bin, and Lot. The Transaction
Qty. is the difference of the total quantity issued to all equipment on the work order and the quantity
already returned from all equipment on the work order. You can modify the Transaction Qty., Bin,
and Lot as necessary and add additional equipment to the Parts list.
If the part to return is tracked by asset, the system automatically selects Track By Asset, enters 1
as the Transaction Qty., and you must enter a value for Asset ID for the part. The system populates
Available Qty. with the total quantity of the part that is currently available.
The system automatically populates Transaction Qty. UOM.
Note: You cannot enter a Transaction Qty. greater than 1 when returning parts tracked by asset.
If you want to return multiple quantities of a part tracked by asset, you must add the part tracked by
asset to the Transaction Details list on individual lines with a Transaction Qty.of 1 until you have
reached the number of the part tracked by asset that you wish to return for the transaction.
When returning parts to a multiple equipment work order for which All Equipment is selected, parts
tracked by asset are not available for return, and the system splits the Transaction Qty. equally
among all the related work orders.
If you submit a return transaction for a repairable spare part with Return for Repair unselected,
the system processes the return as a normal return.
If the Part is designated as a Tool, then the system enables Tool Hours.
12 Bin—Modify the bin to which to return the part if necessary.
13 Lot—Modify the lot to which to return the part if necessary. The system automatically populates
Bin and Lot with the bin and lot numbers associated with the original issue transaction for the part.
14 Transaction Qty.—Enter the number of parts to return.
The system automatically populates Transaction Qty. with the original issue quantity of the part.
If you have already returned a partial quantity of the part from the original issue, the system populates
Transaction Qty. with the original quantity of the part issued minus the quantity of the part that has
already been returned.
Note: Transaction Qty. can be limited based on the setting of the RTNANY installation parameter.
For returns from multiple equipment work orders, if RTNANY installation parameter is set to Yes
and All Equipment is selected for Equipment, then the system evenly distributes the return quantity
to all equipment records on the work order.
If RTNANY installation parameter is set to No and All Equipment is selected for Equipment, you
can only return a part that was previously issued and for which there is a sufficient quantity issued
to the equipment.
15 Tool Hours—If the part you are returning is identified as a tool, enter the number of hours the tool
was in use. The system applies the Tool Hours to the equipment on the multiple equipment work
order based on the value entered for Equipment.
16 Print Qty.—Enter the quantity of the label(s) to print.
The system automatically sets the Print Qty. based on the setting of Label Printing Default on the
Stores tab of the Parts form:
• If set to No Labels—Print Qty. is null.
18 Click Submit Transaction. The system returns the part(s), and creates a stock transaction of type
I for the return store with a positive quantity for the return.
Note: To print labels for the return transaction, click Print Label(s).
The system does not allow you to return goods received via the Non-PO Receipts form because you
have no purchase order number or requisition as a reference. To return such items, you need to make
an arrangement between your company and your supplier.
Once satisfied with the contents of the return, change the Status on the Record View page of the
return to Ready for Printing and then Approved. You must save the record after each change of
status to commit the status change. The system does not update the inventory records until the return
has been approved.
• Work Order—Select to return the parts from a work order. If you choose Work Order, the system
removes Store and displays Work Order.
Note: If you are returning parts from a work order and the work order is a multiple equipment
work order, then the system automatically populates the return with all of the part lines from the
purchase order that were received directly to the work order.
7 Store—If you selected Store for Return From, update the store from which to return the materials
if necessary. If you update Store, the system clears Purchase Order.
8 Work Order—If you selected Work Order for Return From, enter the work order from which to
return materials.
Note: If the selected Work Order is a multiple equipment work order, the system populates
Equipment, Equipment Org., and Related Work Order from the Purchase Order line. If the work
order is not a multiple equipment work order, then the system populates Equipment and Equipment
Org. from the work order.
The system does not display MEC work orders in the Work Order lookup.
Also, the system does not allow you to specify the manner in which the return is distributed to the
work order equipment. The system determines the cost distribution method for the work order costs
based on the value specified for Equipment on the purchase order line.
9 Class—Enter the class of the return. The classes shown belong to the TRAN entity. The system
automatically populates Class Org.
10 Reference Number—Enter a reference number for the issue. The reference number can be a return
authorization number, a verification code, a transaction reference number, etc.
11 Click Save Record.
4 Select the part to be returned from the Parts list. The system populates the part information in the
Part Details section. The system automatically populates Return Qty. with the quantity of the part
received against the purchase order and available in a specific bin and lot for return, Order Qty.
with the original quantity of the part ordered, Available Qty. with the number of parts in stock in a
specific bin and lot, and Price with the price at which the part was received. The system selects
Direct if the part has been received to a work order and Track by Asset if the part is tracked by
asset.
5 Return Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part to be returned.
Note: If you are returning a part tracked by asset, the system displays the part in the Parts list in
quantities of one (e.g., you received five motors that are tracked by asset, so the system displays
the motor on five separate lines). The system automatically populates Return Qty. with one if you
are returning a part tracked by asset, and the system also protects the field from update.
6 Bin and Lot—Enter the bin and lot from which to return the part.
4 Condition—Enter a unique code identifying the condition, and then enter a description in the adjacent
field.
5 Suffix Code— Enter a unique suffix code for the condition. The suffix code is used in the child part
code. For example, if the parent part code is BEARINGAXL, the suffix separator is a dash (-), and
the condition suffix code is an A, the child part code would be BEARINGAXL-A.
6 Return to Store Condition List—Enter the return to store condition list for the part.
7 Return to Store Condition Default—Enter the return to store condition default for the part.
8 Core Return Condition List—Enter the core return condition list for the part.
9 Core Return Condition Default —Enter the core return condition default for the part.
10 Receive Repairs Condition List—Enter the receive repairs condition list for the part.
11 Receive Repairs Condition Default—Enter the receive repairs condition default for the part.
12 Prevent Reorders—Select this checkbox to prevent the part from being reordered.
13 Prevent Issues—Select this checkbox to prevent the part from being issued.
14 Click Submit.
6 Click Submit.
2 Select the part kit for which the kit template will be defined, and then click the Kit Template tab.
Note: Part must be Track as Kit on the Parts form to add to the kit template.
Building kits
Build a kit from a stock of parts within a store using a pre-defined kit template.
To build a parts kit:
5 Kit Lot Description—Enter a description of the kit lot where the part is stored. The system
automatically populates Kit Lot Description based on the value of Organization Option KITLDESC,
if defined.
6 Kit Bin—Enter the bin into which to the newly built kit will be stored.
7 Number of Kits to Build—Enter the number of kits to build.
Note: If any of the parts defined in the kit template are Track by Asset parts, Number of Kits to
Build must be set to 1.
8 Kit Lot Expiration Date—Enter the expiration date of the kit lot.
9 Click Retrieve Parts. The system creates a Session ID if this is a new session. The system populates
the Parts list with relevant parts.
10 Pulled—Select to pull parts to satisfy quantity required to build the kit.
Note: The system defaults the value of Pulled to selected or unselected based on the value in the
Organization Option KITPPULD.
11 Part Bin—Enter the bin that contains the part. The part will be pulled from this bin.
Note: Click F9 to invoke the BIN list of values.
12 Part Lot—Enter the lot that contains the part from which to pull the part.
Note: Click F9 to invoke the LOT list of values.
14 Issue Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part to issue to build the kit.
15 Click Build Kit. The system assigns a unique kit lot number.
Breaking up kits
Return parts allocated to a kit. Once the parts or kit is received, inspect the component parts and return
the kit to stock or return the parts to stock and/or repair and account for usage.
To break up kits:
Qty. to Repair
Enter the quantity of the part to be repaired.
Repair Bin
Enter the repair bin to which to return the parts for repair.
Note: Click F9 to invoke the Repair Bin list of values.
10 Click Breakup Kit. The system dismantles the kit and returns the parts to inventory into the
designated areas. A transaction line of type Issue is created for each parts line. The system deletes
the kit lot.
11 Click Print Restock List to print a list of parts retrieved and returned after the kit was broken up.
See "Print kit restock list" on page 663.
The status of the requisition header indicates the progress of the requisition through its cycle. You may
change the status of the requisition based on your status authorization and requisition approval limits.
You can only delete requisitions with a status of Unfinished.
Note: Requisition approval limits can be set at the header or the line level depending on the setting of
the LIMITLEV installation parameter.
The system enforces several business rules that prohibit changing the status of a requisition header
from Unfinished to any status other than Cancelled before adding any lines to the requisition.
Additionally, the system enables or protects certain fields based on the requisition status. The system
also populates fields on the requisition header with values from the requisition lines.
The system assigns a requisition number.
To create store-to-store requisition headers:
11 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the cost of the requisition.
12 Reject Reason—Enter an explanation of the reason that the requisition is being rejected if necessary.
Reject Reason is protected when the status of the requisition is Unfinished or Cancelled. However,
the system enables Reject Reason and it becomes required if you change the status of the requisition
to Rejected.
Note: The system automatically selects Printed when this requisition is printed.
13 Default Approver—Enter the name of the person who will approve the requisition.
Note: The system automatically populates Approved By with the employee code identifying the
person who approves the requisition and Date Approved with the system date when the requisition
Status is Approved.
The system displays the total number of the lines containing parts on the requisition in Requisition
Lines and populates Total Req. Value with the total cost of the items on the requisition in the default
currency of the Organization.
If the requisition contains more than one line, changing the status of a line does not affect the status
of the header. However, if the requisition contains only one line, and you change the status of the
line, then the system sets the status of the header to the status of the line.
You cannot update any field on the requisition line other than Status if the status of the line is
anything other than Unfinished.
16 Click Submit.
Note: You can create multiple issues for the same store-to-store requisition as necessary.
After creating and approving the store-to-store issue transaction, the issuing store then physically
issues the requested parts to the receiving store, in which the parts must be received.
Note: The Store-to-Store Receipts form enables you to create and manage transactions to receive
parts, repairable spare parts, and parts tracked by asset from other stores, including stores within
different organizations.
6 Requisition—Enter the store-to-store requisition for which to issue the parts. If you select a
Requisition, the system automatically populates From Store, To Store, and To Organization.
7 From Store—Enter the store from which to issue the part.
8 To Store—Enter the store to which to issue the part. The system automatically populates To
Organization.
9 Reference Number—Enter a reference number for the store-to-store issue transaction.
10 Class—Enter the class of the requisition. The classes shown belong to the TRAN entity.
11 Click Save Record.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
6 Line—Enter the line number for the part on the issue. The system automatically assigns the next
incremental number to the line based on the setting of the INCRLINO installation parameter.
7 Issue Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part(s) to issue.
Note: If you selected a Requisition on the store-to-store issue header, the system populates Issue
Qty. with the Quantity of the part from the store-to-store requisition minus any of the quantity of
the part that has been received, scrapped, and any parts that are currently in-transit or that are on
an unfinished store-to-store issue for the selected Requisition and Part.
8 Issue Core Qty.—Enter the quantity of the for repair part(s) to issue.
Note: If the selected Part is core tracked, the system enables Issue Core Qty. and populates Core
Qty. with the quantity of the parts available to be issued for repair.
You cannot issue parts that have already been assigned to work orders or external repair requisitions,
even if the parts have not yet been moved to the Qty. at Shop or Qty. at Supplier. Also, you cannot
issue parts that are on any Unfinished store-to-store issues (including the current issue).
9 From Bin—Modify the bin from which to issue the part if necessary. If you modify From Bin, the
system removes the part.
Note: If you clear From Bin, the system also clears Lot and recalculates On Hand Qty. and Core
Qty. for the From Store, which is the sum of all the parts in all of the bins in the From Store.
If you defined a Default Bin or Default Core Bin, the system populates From Bin with that bin.
When only From Store is entered and From Bin is blank, the system calculates On Hand Qty. and
Core Qty. as the sum of the quantities of the Part in all the bins in the From Store.
If you select a From Bin, the system updates On Hand Qty. and Core Qty. for the Store and From
Bin. Likewise, if you select a Lot, the system updates On Hand Qty. and Core Qty. for the selected
Store, Bin, and Lot combination.
If a Default Core Bin is defined for the Part in the From Store, and you have not entered a value
for Issue Core Qty., then the system populates From Bin with the Default Core Bin. If more than
one bin-stock record is defined for the Part in the From Store, the system also populates Lot from
the bin-stock record. If the Default Bin for the part does not have a bin-stock record in the From
Store, the system leaves From Bin blank.
11 Asset ID—Enter the code identifying the asset associated with the part to transfer. If the selected
Part is tracked by asset, the system enables Asset ID, and you must enter an Asset ID for the part
If the selected Asset ID has a status of In Store or Purchased/In Store, the system enters 1 as
the issue On Hand Qty. If the selected Asset ID has a status of To Be Repaired, the system enters
1 as the Issue Core Qty. To issue multiples of a by asset part, you must add an individual line for
each part to issue.
If the selected Asset ID is tracked by serial number, the system populates Serial Number with the
serial number of the equipment. The system also populates the From Bin and Lot from the Asset
ID, and if you clear the From Bin or the Lot, the system automatically clears the Asset ID.
Note: You can use the Quick Store-to-Store Transfer form to transfer equipment with child
equipment in an equipment hierarchy within the same organization.
12 Click Submit.
Note: You can add and delete parts on the issue as necessary, as long as the status of the issue
is Unfinished.
• Cancelled—Change the status of the receipt to Cancelled to cancel the receipt and all of the
part lines. The system protects all fields on the receipt when you change the status to Cancelled.
• Ready for Printing—Change the status of the receipt to Ready for Printing after adding the
parts to receive on the Parts tab. When the status of the receipt is Ready for Printing, only
Status, Description, Class, and Reference Number are editable.
• Approved—The system populates Approved By with the User ID of the approver of the
store-to-store receipt when the status is set to Approved, and all of the fields on the receipt are
protected except Status.
The system also updates store quantities based on the receipt as follows: parts that are not for
repair are moved from In Transit Qty. to Qty. on Hand; received parts that are for repair are moved
from In Transit Qty. to Qty. for Repair; and all scrapped parts are moved out of the In Transit Qty.,
but the parts are not added back to inventory. The costs for the receipt transaction are updated for
the To Store based on by the setting of the PRICETYP and PRICELEV installation parameters.
Note: The system does not update the price of repair parts. The price for the receipt transaction of
the repairable spare part is the Core Value of the part.
If the PRICETIM installation parameter is set to I, the system updates prices at the time an invoice
is created rather than at the time of a receipt. However, for a store-to-store receipt, the system
updates prices as though PRICETIM is set to R because invoices do not apply to store-to-store
transfers. Therefore, for store-to-store transfers, price updates always take place at the time the
store-to-store receipt is approved.
For parts that are tracked by asset that are being transferred within the same organization, the
system updates the Store on the asset to the new Store in the receiving organization, and the asset
Status is set to In Store. If the by asset part needs repair, the asset is transferred to the new store
with a Status of To Be Repaired.
For parts tracked by asset that are being transferred between different organizations, the system
makes updates in almost the same manner that it does when transferring assets between
organizations using the Transfer Equipment popup, with the following exceptions: electronic signatures
are only required for the transfer if a signature is configured for inserting an asset with In Store or
To Be Repaired status; the system copies all of the fields from the existing asset to a new record
for the asset in the new organization, unless they are not valid in the new organization (in which
case, the fields will remain null); and if the Department is not valid in the new organization, the
system populates the Department with an asterisk (*).
6 Requisition—Enter the store-to-store requisition for which to receive the parts.
The system automatically populates To Store, From Store, and From Organization.
Note: If you update the Requisition with a different requisition number, the system overwrites To
Store, From Store, and From Organization with the values from the new Requisition. Likewise,
if you clear the Requisition, the system also clears To Store, From Store, and From Organization.
Note: After approving a store-to-store receipt, click Create Return Requisition to generate a return
requisition for issuing parts between stores for repairable spare parts and their replacement parts
more efficiently.
6 Line—Enter the line number for the part on the issue if necessary. The system automatically assigns
the next incremental number to the line based on the setting of the INCRLINO installation parameter.
7 Receipt Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part to receive.
Note: If you selected a Requisition on the store-to-store receipt header, then the system populates
Receipt Qty. with the In Transit Qty. of the part from the store-to-store requisition minus any quantity
of the part that is already on any unfinished store-to-store receipts for the selected Requisition and
Part.
8 Core Receipt Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part to receive for repair.
Note: If the selected Part is core tracked, the system enables Core Receipt Qty. and populates
Core Receipt Qty. with the In Transit Core Qty. for the selected Requisition and Part.
9 Scrap Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part to scrap rather than receive because the part could not
be repaired.
Note: If the selected Part is core tracked, the system enables Scrap Qty.
11 Lot—Modify the lot for which to receive the part if necessary. The system automatically populates
Manufacturer Lot and Expiration Date.
12 Department—Enter the department of the asset.
13 Asset ID—Enter the code identifying the asset associated with the part to receive. If the selected
Part is tracked by asset, and you must enter an Asset ID for the part.
If the selected Asset ID is in-transit and not for repair, the system enters 1 as the Receipt Qty. If
the selected Asset ID is in-transit and for repair, the system enters 1 as the Core Receipt Qty. To
receive multiple quantities of a by asset part, you must add individual lines for each part to receive.
If the selected Asset ID is tracked by serial number, the system populates Serial Number with the
serial number of the equipment.
14 Click Submit.
Note: You can add and delete parts on the receipt as necessary, as long as the status of the receipt
is Unfinished.
A return requisition is basically a reverse mirror image of the receipt on which the system will reverse
the Status of the part lines, e.g., parts with a Status of For Repair will be regular parts, or regular
parts will become For Repair parts.
See the following scenario for an illustration of how a return requisition can be used:
STORE1 creates a store-to-store requisition for STORE2 for a quantity of 10 PUMP-MOTOR(s) that
are for repair, and then STORE1 issues the parts to STORE2. STORE2 receives 8 of the PUMP
MOTOR(s), and scraps 2 of the PUMP MOTOR(s) because they are beyond repair. STORE2 creates
a return requisition, and the system adds lines for 10 PUMP MOTOR(s) that are in good working order.
STORE2 then issues the 10 parts to STORE1. STORE1 can then receive the 10 good PUMP MOTOR(s)
against the return requisition created by STORE2.
This scenario could also be reversed and STORE2 could initiate the store-to-store transfer by creating
a store-to-store requisition for issuing the 10 good PUMP MOTOR(s), in which case STORE1 could
then create a return requisition to send the 10 broken PUMP MOTOR(s) to STORE2.
To create a return requisition for core tracked parts from a store-to-store receipt:
Field Description
Description Populated based on the setting of the REQDESC
installation parameter
Status The system sets the Status of the return requisi-
tion to Unfinished.
Requested By Populated with the value of Requested By from
the original requisition. However, if the original
employee code is not valid in the organization of
the return requisition, the system populates Re-
quested By with the user who creates the return
requisition.
Entered By Populated with user ID of the logged in user
Date Requested Current system date and time
Field Description
Status The system sets the Status of the return requisi-
tion line to Unfinished.
Requested Before Current system date and time
Part Part from the receipt line
Field Description
Qty. Receipt Qty. for regular parts, or the Core Re-
ceipt Qty. for core tracked parts
Core Qty. Only for core tracked parts and populated with
the Receipt Qty.
Price Price from the original requisition
Exchange Rate Exchange Rate from the original requisition
4 To view or update the return requisition, open the Store-to-Store Requisitions form, select the
return requisition, and then view/update the Record View and Parts pages as necessary.
3 Organization—Enter the organization to which the internal repair receipt belongs if you use
multi-organization security.
4 Internal Repair Receipt—Enter a description of the internal repair receipt in the adjacent field. The
system assigns an internal repair receipt number after you save the record.
5 Status—Select one of the following options:
• Approved—When you approve an internal repair receipt, the system automatically updates store
quantities and moves the repaired parts from Qty. at Shop to Qty. on Hand of the part in the
store into which the part is received. The system also updates Qty. Received and Qty. Scrapped
on the Repair Parts page of the Work Orders form. The system updates the repair details
assignments by matching the work order and lot and then by ordering by store and bin. If a part
is tracked by asset, the system also matches the asset by which the part is tracked. Qty.
Completed
Note: When you approve an internal repair receipt and the part is condition tracked, the system
updates Qty. at Shop and Qty. Completed for the work order repair part instead of the repair
condition part. Qty. on Hand is updated for the repair condition part instead of the work order
repair part. In addition, if the part is tracked by asset and received, the status of the associated
asset is updated to Purchased/In Store. If you scrap the part tracked by asset, the status of the
associated asset is updated to Withdrawn, and the status of any child assets in a hierarchy are
also updated to Withdrawn.
• Cancelled—Select to indicate that the internal repair receipt is cancelled. If you select Cancelled,
the system does not update any system quantities for parts or work orders.
• Request Approval—After you have added part lines to the receipt, change the status to Request
Approval. The system protects all fields except Status, Description, and Class.
• Unfinished—The system automatically sets the Status of the receipt to Unfinished. Unfinished
status indicates that the internal repair receipt is still in progress, and you cannot modify the
Status of the receipt from Unfinished to anything but Cancelled until part lines have been added.
6 Work Order—Enter the work order for the internal repair receipt.
7 Store—Enter the store for the internal repair receipt.
8 Class—Enter the class of the commodity. The classes shown belong to the TRAN entity.
9 Click Save Record.
4 Part—Enter the part to add to the internal repair receipt. If the part is condition tracked, the system
automatically populates Condition.
Note: You can add parts from the repair work order to the receipt individually, or you can retrieve
all the parts from the repair work order to the receipt at once.
If you add or retrieve a core tracked part that is tracked by asset, the system automatically creates
a line for each individual part and enters 1 as the Outstanding Qty. and Receipt Qty. for each line.
You can change the Receipt Qty. to 0 and enter 1 as the Scrapped Qty. if necessary.
5 Repair Condition— Enter the repair condition if the part is condition tracked.
6 Repair Price—Enter the repair price of the part.
Note: You can only update the Repair Price for the part if the RPPRPCCAL installation parameter
is set to YES.
If you entered an Internal Repair Price for a part on the Repair Details page of the Parts form,
the system retrieves the Repair Price from the repair details for the part. If you did not specify an
Internal Repair Price, the system retrieves the Base Price of the part for the Repair Price.
When you return a core tracked part to a store for repair, the internal repair return does not trigger
a price update like a regular return. The system does not update the inventory price until the part
has been repaired or scrapped on an internal repair receipt. The system uses the Repair Price to
determine what cost should be used for the cost update. For example, if a LIFO part was originally
issued at 10 USD, the part was returned for repair and repaired on a work order, and then the part
was received on an internal repair receipt with a Repair Price of 5 USD, the system inserts a new
cost record for the part into the R5FIFO table valued at 5 USD.
11 Click Submit. The system updates the internal repair receipt record with the part details. The system
also creates a transaction of type RECV (goods received) for the parts on the receipt.
9 Click Submit.
Note: When you save the record, the system automatically populates the Unit Price and the
Available Qty. for each item on the pick ticket. The system also displays the Qty. Issued of the
part on the pick ticket, as well as the Available Qty. of the part in the store.
To delete a part, select the part to delete, and then click Delete Part.
The system verifies whether any of the parts to import already exist on the pick ticket and does not
import any of the duplicate parts to the pick ticket.
To import a parts list for a pick ticket:
6 Click Submit. The system retrieves all of the parts displayed in the parts list to the pick ticket.
7 Add or delete additional parts for the pick ticket as necessary.
the characters you know, and substitute _ for the unknown character. If you only know a portion, you
can enter the portion of the parameter that you know, and substitute % for the remaining portion. For
example, if you enter P% for Part, the system retrieves all parts that begin with the letter "P." If you
enter %PIP% for Part, the system retrieves all parts with codes that include the letters "PIP."
When you generate a physical inventory record, the system only saves the snapshot of your online
inventory data generated by the physical inventory. It does not save the parameters you enter. You
must enter the parameters upon which to base generation of a physical inventory record each time
you want to generate a physical inventory record.
After you physically count your inventory, you can update your online inventory data on the Parts page
of the Physical Inventory form to reconcile any discrepancies in your physical and online inventory.
After reconciling any differences in your inventory data, you can update the status and/or approve the
physical inventory based on your status change authorization privileges. However, the system enables
and/or protects the fields available for update based on the status from which you are updating the
physical inventory. Status changes for physical inventory Status change authorizations are set up for
the TRAN entity on the Status Authorizations form.
If you create a physical inventory record and are unable to perform the actual cycle count immediately,
the system also enables you to refresh an existing physical inventory to update the expected quantities
in the physical inventory data snapshot.
To generate a physical inventory counting sheet:
13 Physical Inventory Date—Enter the reference date for the physical inventory. If you enter a date,
the system selects only those parts whose Stock Date (the date the part is entered into stock) is
before the date entered for Physical Inventory Date.
14 Include Child Store(s)—Select to include stock records for all child stores of the selected Store in
the physical inventory.
15 Include Out of Service Item(s)—Select to include stock records for out of service parts in the
physical inventory.
16 Click Save Record.
Note: After generating the physical inventory and printing the counting sheet, transactions such as
issues, returns, and receipts may occur before the database is updated. To update the expected
quantities to reflect the current levels in the database, you can select a physical inventory record to
update, right-click on the form, and then select Refresh Inventory. The system updates the expected
quantity of the parts on the physical inventory record on the Parts tab of the Physical Inventory
forms to the current levels. However, you can only refresh the physical inventory if the Status is
Unfinished.
existing physical inventory if you have been unable to perform the actual cycle count for some time
following creating the physical inventory record. You can only refresh physical inventory data for records
with Unfinished status.
After refreshing existing physical inventory data, you can view the updated expected quantities for the
physical inventory on the Parts page.
To refresh existing physical inventory data:
Note: You can also enter "wildcards" for Store necessary to generate data. If you know all but one
character, you can enter the characters you know, and substitute _ for the unknown character. If
you only know a portion, you can enter the portion of the parameter that you know, and substitute
% for the remaining portion. For example, if you enter P% for Store, the system retrieves all stores
that begin with the letter "P." If you enter %PIP% for Store, the system retrieves all stores with codes
that include the letters "PIP."
4 A Cutoff Point %—Enter the value of the cutoff point for A. The system automatically enters 70 as
the default value.
5 B Cutoff Point %—Enter the value of the cutoff point for B. The system automatically enters 20 as
the default value.
6 C Cutoff Point %—Enter the value of the cutoff point for C. The system automatically enters 10 as
the default value.
Note: The sum of the values entered for A Cutoff Point %, B Cutoff Point %, and C Cutoff Point
% must equal 100%, and you must enter a value for all three points.
5 Document—Enter the document to view or edit. The system automatically populates Document
Description.
6 Print with Work Order—Select to print the document with the work order.
7 Copy to Work Order—Select to copy the document to the work order.
8 Print with Purchase Order—Select to print the document with the purchase order.
9 Copy to Purchase Order—Select to copy the document to the purchase order.
10 Click Save.
Note: To view the document, click View/Edit Document. Click View Document.
To remove or modify the document link, click View/Edit Document. Click Remove Document Link.
See Removing document associations in the Infor EAM System Administrator's Guide.
Parent Store for the store that is not already designated as a child store in the store hierarchy for the
store.
Delete stores as necessary. However, you cannot delete a parent store for which child stores exist,
and you cannot delete a store when there is quantity on hand for a stock record within the store.
To view and modify store information:
Requested. Selecting a Preferred Store indicates that the requisition for the part should be
Store-to-Store.
To view and modify stores associated with parts:
Note: When updating price information, the system does not record a stock transaction for a part if
there is no quantity of the part on hand in store or if the updates do not affect the base price of the part
in its organization.
You can change Price Type for a part as necessary. However, if there is a quantity of the part on hand
and changing the price type affects the base price of the part, the system records a MPTC stock
transaction for the part. If there is no quantity of the part on hand or if changing the price type does not
change the base price of the part, the system does not record a transaction for the price type change.
If there is a current quantity of the part on hand and you update the price type to last in first out (LIFO)
or first in first out (FIFO), the system creates a stock record for the part in the R5FIFO table part and
sets Average Price to the Base Price. The stock record includes the quantity of the part on hand and
the price. If there is no quantity on hand, the system does not insert a record into the R5FIFO table.
If you change the price type from LIFO or FIFO to average, last, or standard, the system deletes the
record of the part from the R5FIFO table. If any of the price fields are null, the system considers the
price to be zero.
Additionally, if there is a current quantity of the part on hand and you change the price type to standard
or last and then enter a Standard Price, the system records both a MPTC and CORR stock transaction.
Revaluation of price information for parts is calculated either at the time of the approval of a receipt for
a part or at the time of the approval of an invoice for a part, depending on the setting of the PRICETIM
installation parameter. Part revaluation is also calculated according to the PRICETYP installation
parameter, which specifies whether the system prices storeroom materials based on the average, last,
or standard price.
To view and modify multiple prices of parts (MOS):
Field Description
Store The store for which usage transactions (issues/re-
turns) have occurred
Month The last day through which the usage occurred
Note: The date displayed can never be the cur-
rent date, because transactions can still occur or
be occurring for the current date.
2 Select the part for which to view stock levels, and then click the Overview tab.
3 View the stock level information.
Field Description
Entity The entity to which the part was associated
Code The code of the record, to which the part was
associated, e.g., an asset ID, part number, work
order
Organization The organization record to which the part was
associated
Description The description of the Code to which the part
was associated
Quantity The quantity of the part that was associated to
the entity, code, etc.
Component Location The component or part location to which the part
was associated
Comments The comments entered when the part was asso-
ciated
Field Description
Type The object type of the record to which the part
was associated
Field Description
Part The code of the part associated with the part
transaction
Part Org. The organization of the part associated with the
part transaction
Type The type of transaction with which the part was
associated, e.g., Stock take, Issue or return,
Goods received, etc.
Store The code of the store with which the part transac-
tion was associated
Description The description of the Store associated with the
part transaction
Store Org. The organization of the Store associated with
the part transaction
Condition The condition of the part associated with the part
transaction
Issued Part The part associated to the condition for which it
was originally issued
Transaction Qty. The quantity of the part involved in the transac-
tion. Positive quantities designate an increase in
the quantity of the part in inventory, such as a
receipt. Negative quantities indicate a decrease
in the quantity of the part in inventory, such as
an issue or return.
Field Description
Date The date on which the part transaction occurred
Price The price of the part the system used for the
transaction
Issued By If the part transaction is an issue, the system
displays the User ID of the user who issued the
part.
Issued To If the part transaction is an issue, the system
displays the Employee code of person to which
the part was issued.
Class The class of the part
Class Org. The organization of the Class
Transaction Number The transaction number assigned to the transac-
tion
Line The line number of the part on the transaction
involving the part, e.g., the line number on the
requisition, purchase order, work order, etc.
Status The current status of the transaction involving
the part
Pick Ticket If the part was added to a pick ticket, the system
displays the number.
Work Order If the part was added to a work order, the system
displays the number.
Activity If the part was added to a work order, the system
displays the work order number for which the part
transaction occurred.
Purchase Order If the part was added to a purchase order, the
system displays the number.
PO Org. The organization of the purchase order associat-
ed with the part transaction
Requisition If the part was added to a requisition, the system
displays the number.
Supplier The supplier for the requisition associated with
the part transaction
Bin The bin involved in the part transaction. For issue
transactions, the system displays the bin location
from which the part is issued. For receipts, the
system displays the bin location into which the
part is received.
Field Description
Lot The lot of the part involved in the transaction
Asset ID The code of the equipment associated with the
transaction
Asset Org. The organization of the Asset ID associated with
the part transaction
Parent Work Order If the transaction for the part is associated with
a MEC work order, then the system displays the
number identifying the parent multiple equipment
work order associated with the transaction.
Note: The system enables you to search for all
transactions associated with a multiple equipment
work order by defining a Quick Filter using Parent
Work Order as part of the filter criteria.
Field Description
Part The code of the part that is in-transit
Part Description The description of the part that is in-transit
Part Org. The organization of the part that is in-transit
Field Description
Quantity The quantity of the part that is in-transit
For Repair Qty. The quantity of a repairable spare part that is
currently in-transit for repair. Repairable spare
parts have repair details associated on the part
record that specify whether a part is to be re-
paired internally or externally, and they include
additional information about the system uses to
generate repair work orders or requisitions for
repairing the part. Therefore, a value displayed
for For Repair Qty. indicates that the part is in-
transit for repair internally or externally.
Destination The entity of the destination, e.g., PART, STOR
Destination Code The code identifying the destination, e.g., the part
code or store code
Purchase Order The purchase order associated with the transac-
tion for which the part is in-transit
PO Org. The organization of the purchase order associat-
ed with the transaction for which the part is in-
transit
Requisition The requisition associated with the transaction
for which the part is in-transit
Equipment The equipment associated with the transaction
for which the part is in-transit
Equipment Org. The organization of the equipment associated
with the transaction for which the part is in-transit
Lot The lot of the part that is in-transit
5 Click Close.
Field Description
Type The type of transaction with which the part was
associated, e.g., Stock take, Issue or return,
Goods received, etc.
Part The code of the part with which the transaction
was associated
Description The description of the Part associated with the
stock transaction
Part Org. The organization of the Part associated with the
stock transaction
Transaction Qty. The quantity of the part involved in the stock
transaction. Positive quantities designate an in-
crease in the quantity of the part in inventory,
such as a receipt. Negative quantities indicate a
decrease in the quantity of the part in inventory,
such as an issue or return.
Date The date on which the stock transaction occurred
Price The price of the part the system used for the
transaction
Originator If the part transaction is an issue, the system
displays the User ID of the user from whom the
stock transaction originated.
Issued To If the part transaction is an issue, the system
displays the Employee code of the person to
which the part associated with the stock transac-
tion was issued.
Class The class of the part the system used for the
stock transaction
Field Description
Class Org. The organization to which the class used for the
stock transaction belongs
Transaction Number The number identifying the stock transaction
Line The line number of the part on the stock transac-
tion involving the part, e.g., the line number on
the requisition, purchase order, work order, etc.
Status The current status of the stock transaction involv-
ing the part
Pick Ticket If the stock transaction was associated with a
pick ticket, the system displays the number.
Work Order If the stock transaction was associated with a
work order, the system displays the number.
Activity If the stock transaction was associated with a
work order, the system displays the activity on
the work order for which the part transaction oc-
curred.
Purchase Order If the stock transaction was associated with a
purchase order, the system displays the number.
Purchase Order Org. The organization of the purchase order associat-
ed with the part transaction
Requisition If the stock transaction was associated with a
requisition, the system displays the number.
Supplier The supplier for the requisition associated with
the part transaction
Bin The bin involved in the part transaction. For issue
transactions, the system displays the bin location
from which the part is issued. For receipts, the
system displays the bin location into which the
part is received.
Lot The lot of the part involved in the transaction
Asset ID The code of the equipment associated with the
transaction
Asset Org. The organization of the Asset ID associated with
the stock transaction
Parent Work Order If the transaction for the store is associated with
a MEC work order, then the system displays the
number identifying the parent multiple equipment
work order associated with the transaction.
Field Description
Note: The system enables you to search for all
transactions associated with a multiple equipment
work order by defining a Quick Filter using Parent
Work Order as part of the filter criteria.
2 Select the part with which to associate iProcure items, and then click the Suppliers tab.
3 Select the supplier for which to update the parts catalog, and then click Add iProcure Item
Association.
4 Enter the Part #.
5 Select the item, and then enter the number of items.
6
Click . The system adds the item to the shopping cart.
7 Click Retrieve Part. The system retrieves the part information, associates the iProcure item with
the part for the associated Infor EAM supplier, and then updates the supplier catalog.
3 Click Add Parts (iProcure Items). The system displays the Add Parts iProcure Items page.
4 Enter the Part #. The system displays the Search Results page.
5 Select the item to add, and then enter the number of items.
6
Click . The system adds the item to the shopping cart.
7 Click Add Parts (iProcure Items). The system adds the iProcure part item to the selected requisition,
updates the supplier's catalog, and automatically populates iProcure Date Last Updated.
The purchasing management module corresponds with the materials management module to facilitate
the process of purchasing goods. Use the purchasing management module to create and revise
purchase orders. You can also add existing parts or create new parts to add to purchase orders, enter
extra charges or discounts, and associate purchasing clauses.
3 Organization—Enter the organization to which the purchase order term belongs if you use
multi-organization security.
4 PO Term—Enter a unique code identifying the purchase order term, and then enter a description
of the purchase order term in the adjacent field.
5 Type—Select the type of purchase order term.
6 Click Save Record.
5 Child Clause—Enter the child clause to associate with the contract class of the header clause. The
system automatically populates the child clause description and Child Clause Org.
6 Click Submit.
Note: To remove a child clause from the header clause, select the child clause to remove, and then
click Remove Child Clause.
and associate assets for parts tracked by asset. Next, change the status to Ready for printing to print
the purchase order for approval. Finally, approve the purchase order and send it to the supplier. To
change the status of a purchase order, enter a new status on the Record View page of the Purchase
Orders form. See the following descriptions when changing the status:
• Unfinished—The purchase order is at the creation stage; create the purchase order header and
add parts.
• Ready for printing—The purchase order is ready for approval/printing.
• Cancelled—The purchase order is cancelled.
• Approved/completed—The purchase order is approved and ready to be sent to a supplier.
Note: When you approve a purchase order containing lines with repairable spare parts of Type External
Repair, the system moves the Requested Qty. (UOM) of the part from the Qty. for Repair to the Qty.
at Supplier on the Stores page of the Parts form. If the is part tracked by asset, the system changes
the status of the asset associated with the part to In Repair. If the asset is a parent in an asset hierarchy,
the system changes the status of any dependent child assets to In Repair.
If you cancel a purchase order containing lines with repairable spare parts of Type External Repair,
the system gives you the option to cancel the requisition. If you select to also cancel the requisition,
the system deletes the repair detail assignments for the part, and if the parts have been moved from
Qty. to Repair to Qty at Supplier, the system moves the parts back to the Qty. for Repair.
6 Store—Enter a storeroom.
7 Originator—Enter the employee requesting the purchase order.
8 Due Date—Enter the expected arrival date for the items.
16 Default Approver—Enter the employee responsible for approving the purchase order.
17 Ship Via—Enter the manner in which the supplier ships the specific item.
18 Payment Terms—Enter the manner in which the supplier is paid for the purchase.
19 Freight Terms—Enter the manner in which the freight charges are paid and who pays them.
20 FOB Point—Enter where you take possession of the item.
21 Payment Method—Enter the method used to pay the supplier.
Note: Click Default Terms. The system automatically populates Ship Via, Payment Terms, Freight
Terms, FOB Point, and Payment Method with the values entered on the Suppliers form.
After the purchase order is approved, the system displays Approved By and Date Approved.
After lines are added to the purchase order, the system displays Part Lines, Service Lines, PO
Lines, Total Tax, Total Extra Charges/Discounts, Total Part Value, Total Service Value, and
Total PO Value.
5 Part—Enter the part to add to the purchase order. If the part is cataloged, the system automatically
populates the part description, Purchase Qty. (UOP), Requested Qty. (UOM), Price, Qty. per
UOP, Contract Discount, Part Line Subtotal, Total Tax Amount, Total Extra Charges/Discounts,
and Part Line Total.
Note: The Assigned Qty. for a core tracked part is equal to the number of parts for which repair
details are assigned for the requisition line.
The system performs a search to find an approved contract for the selected part. If an approved
contract is found, the system populates Contract with the contract that was found.
The system searches for an approved contract for the selected PO header supplier, store, and
currency.
12 Equipment—Enter the equipment associated with the purchase order if you have not entered a
Work Order–Activity and want to associate an equipment record with the purchase order. The
system populates Type with Direct Materials, which enables the system to create a work order "on
the fly".
Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the part.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the part to each equipment record on the
work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the part to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: If the selected Part is tracked by asset, then the system clears Equipment, Equipment Org.,
and Related Work Order because you cannot distribute a part tracked by asset across multiple
equipment.
16 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
17 Qty. per UOP—Enter the conversion factor.
Note: For example, if the supplier's UOM for the part is a case of 12 parts but your UOM for the
part is each, Purchase Qty. (UOP) will be 1 for one case, but Requested Qty. (UOM) will be 12 (1
case = 12 parts). If you enter 2 for the Purchase Qty. (UOP), the system uses Qty. per UOP to
update the Requested Qty. to 24.
10 Cumulative—Select to apply the charge/discount to the record after all other charges/discounts
have been applied.
11 Include—Select to always include extra charges and discounts.
Note: If the installation parameter EXTCHG is set to Y, the system always includes extra charges
and discounts; therefore, Include is selected and protected. If EXTCHG is set to M, Include is
updateable. If EXTCHG is set to N, Include is unselected and protected.
12 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a charge/discount, select the charge/discount to delete, and then click Delete
Charge/Discount. The system deletes the record and updates the Extra Charges/Discounts list.
13 Click Close.
4 Asset ID—Enter a code identifying the asset, and then enter a description of the asset in the adjacent
field. If you select an existing asset, the system automatically populates the asset ID description,
Department, and Asset Org.
Note: If you do not specify an asset ID and the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to YES,
the system automatically generates an asset number after you save the record. You may also select
an existing asset ID with a status of Awaiting Purchase. When you select an existing asset ID, the
system automatically populates the asset ID description, Type, Asset Org., and Department.
6 Requisition-Line—Enter a requisition and line to add services to the service line from an existing
service requisition.
Note: If you manually enter a Requisition, the system automatically populates the line number if
there is only one line that meets the lookup requirements on the requisition and if the line is valid.
If there are multiple lines that meet these criteria on the requisition, the system leaves the field null.
If the selected Requisition–Line contains parts related to a multiple equipment work order, then
the system populates Work Order–Activity, Equipment, Equipment Org., and Related Work
Order from the requisition/line.
7 Work Order-Activity—Enter the work order number and activity if the service line is designated for
external service. If there is no work order or activity assigned to the service line, click Create Work
Order/Activity. The system creates a new work order number and/or activity. Modify the work order
on the Work Orders form, and then modify the activity on the Activities tab of the Work Orders
form.
Note: If you manually enter a Work Order-Activity, the system automatically populates the line
number if there is only one line that meets the lookup requirements on the work order/activity and
if the line is valid. If there are multiple lines that meet these criteria on the work order/activity, the
system leaves the field null.
You can only add service details to a purchase order that is associated with a work order-activity
with a status of Completed.
You cannot create a multiple equipment work order on the Services page; however, if the selected
Work Order–Activity is a multiple equipment work order, the system enables Equipment and it is
required.
8 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost of the service.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost of the service to each equipment record on
the work order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the cost of the service to the equipment on the work
order header only.
Note: When associating an order line with a multiple equipment work order, the system copies the
purchase order line to the parent multiple equipment work order activity only. The system does not
populate the purchase order line for the related work order activities.
15 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a service line, select the service line to delete, and then click Delete Service Line.
You can only delete service lines from a purchase order if the status of the purchase order header
is Unfinished.
Click Add/Edit Comments to add comments to the language.
4 Order Clause—Enter a predefined ISO clause or a user-defined clause. You can associate multiple
clauses with a purchase order. The system automatically populates Description.
5 Click Submit.
Note: To remove a clause, select the clause to remove, and then click Remove Clause.
Tab Description
List View Displays a list of all purchase orders
Record View Displays detailed header information for the se-
lected purchase order
Parts Displays detailed information about parts on
purchase order lines
Note: You can also view comments and extra
charges or discounts associated with the part.
Click Comments to view comments. Click Extra
Charges/Discounts to view extra charges or
discounts.
Note: The Maximum Value of the header may be less than the total of all lines, but it cannot be
less than the Maximum Value or Price of an individual line.
9 Class—Enter the class of the blanket order. The system automatically populates Class Org.
10 Start Date and End Date—Enter the dates between which purchase orders can be generated from
the blanket order. The system displays the number of purchase orders released from this blanket
order in Number Released. You cannot update this field.
11 Supplier—Enter the supplier from whom to order the parts. The system automatically populates
Supplier Org., Currency, and Exchange Rate.
12 Currency—Enter the currency you use to purchase the parts.
13 Exchange Rate—Enter the current exchange rate.
Note: You can update Currency if there is an exchange rate defined for the currency and if the
installation parameter POCURR is set to YES. If the installation parameter POCURR is set to NO,
you can update the currency, and the system automatically populates Exchange Rate with 1. You
can update Exchange Rate if the EXRTUPDT installation parameter is set to YES.
14 Approve Order—Select to automatically approve a purchase order generated from the blanket
order.
15 Click Save Record.
Note: Click Create Complete PO to create a purchase order from the blanket order.
You cannot delete a blanket order. If you no longer need the blanket order, change the Status to
Cancelled. Once cancelled, you cannot change the status of a blanket order.
7 Contractor Hire—Select if the service line will be completed by contract. If you select Contractor
Hire, you must enter a Trade.
8 Trade—Enter a trade if the service will be contracted.
9 Price—Enter the cost of the service. The system automatically populates the currency of the price.
Note: If the POCURR installation parameter is set to YES, you can change the currency. Contact
your system administrator for more information.
16 Maximum Value—Enter the maximum monetary value allowed for the service.
Note: You must enter either Maximum Hours or Maximum Value. You cannot enter both values.
The Maximum Value of the line must be less than or equal to the Maximum Value of the header.
17 Click Submit.The system automatically populates Number Released with the number of times the
service line has been released by the blanket order, Released Hourswith the total number of
released hours for the service line released to the blanket order, Released Value with the total
monetary value of units released by the blanket order, and Last Order with the number of the last
purchase order that was released for the service line.
Note: To delete a service line, select the service line to delete, and then click Delete Service Line.
You can only delete service lines from a blanket order if the status of the blanket order header is
Unfinished.
4 Click Default Terms. The system automatically populates Ship Via, Payment Terms, Freight
Terms, FOB Point, and Payment Method with the values entered on the Suppliers form.
5 Ship Via—Enter the manner in which the supplier ships the specific item.
6 Payment Terms—Enter the manner in which the supplier is paid for the purchase.
7 Freight Terms—Enter the manner in which the freight charges are paid and who pays them.
8 FOB Point—Enter where you take possession of the item.
9 Payment Method—Enter the method used to pay the supplier.
10 Click Save Record.
3 Select—Select to add the blanket order line item to the purchase order.
Note: You must select at least one blanket order line item to create a purchase order. To select all
the blanket order line items at once, check Select. To unselect all the line items at once, uncheck
Select.
7 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the cost.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the cost to each equipment record on the work order.
Note: The system does not allow you to select All Equipment for parts on the blanket order line
that are tracked by asset.
• Enter WO Header Equipmentto distribute the cost to the equipment on the work order header
only.
8 Click Create Purchase Order. Follow the steps for "Creating Purchase Orders from a Blanket
Order."
Note: You must select at least one blanket order line item to create a purchase order.
You cannot create a purchase order that exceeds your preset monetary limits for creating and/or
approving purchase orders. You cannot create a purchase order from a blanket order with service
lines without a work order.
Regular invoice vouchers verify that the cost of the invoice lines matches the cost of the associated
order lines within a specified range of tolerance. The range of tolerance can be based on an absolute
dollar amount or on a percentage, as defined on the Organizations form. Specify Match Tolerance
Absolute, Match Tolerance %, and Match Quantity Tolerance % to establish the amount or percentage
allowed as the difference between the purchase order-line cost and the invoice voucher line cost when
matching line costs. Upon approval of the invoice voucher, the system captures the price, freezes the
exchange rate if foreign currencies are used, and updates prices.
Occasionally suppliers’ prices for items vary, causing discrepancies between an invoice voucher and
projected costs for that invoice.
Note: Set the MATCHAPP installation parameter to YES to enable the system to automatically assign
the Approved status to vouchers matched by the invoice process. Contact your system administrator
for more information.
7 Type—Select the invoice voucher type. Choose one of the following options:
• Credit note—Select to indicate a credit has been added to the invoice voucher.
• Debit note—Select to indicate a debit has been added to the invoice voucher.
16 Purchase Order—Enter the purchase order from which to create voucher lines.
Note: You can choose to not enter a value in Supplier and instead only enter a Purchase Order.
This restricts the lines of the invoice voucher to only the lines for the purchase order on the invoice
voucher header. Therefore, Supplier, Supplier Org., Currency, and Exchange Rate will populate
from the supplier of the purchase order.
You cannot enter a Purchase Order for Non-PO invoice vouchers.
17 Payment Due Date—Enter the date by which the invoice voucher is to be paid.
Note: Payment Due Date cannot be before Registration Date.
19 Paid Date—Enter the date on which the invoice was actually paid.
20 Click Save Record.
Note: After the invoice voucher is approved, the system displays Approved By, and the purchase
order line for each invoice voucher line is updated with the invoice voucher line’s invoice quantity
and invoice value.
After costs have been added to the invoice voucher, the system displays Voucher Total.
12 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Subtotal, Extra Charges/Discounts, Adjusted
Costs, Tax Amount, and Line Total.
Note: To delete a line, select the line to delete, and then click Delete Invoice Voucher Line. You
cannot delete an invoice voucher line unless the status of the invoice voucher header is Unfinished.
6 Accounting Flexfield Desc.—Enter the accounting flexfield description. The system automatically
populates GL Code.
7 Tax Code 1—Enter the tax rate to be applied to the cost amount. If you enter Tax Code 1, the
system enables Tax Code 2.
Note: The system calculates Tax Amount and Line Total based on the selected tax code.
8 Tax Code 2—Enter the second tax rate to be applied to the cost amount.
Note: If you enter Tax Code 2, the system applies each tax and then adds the amounts to calculate
Tax Amount and Line Total.
9 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a cost, select the cost to delete, and then click Delete Cost. You cannot delete a
cost unless the status of the invoice voucher header is Unfinished.
4 Utility Bill Source—Enter the utility bill source object. Utility Bill Source is the level at which the
utility bill is recorded (usually building level). The system automatically populates Utility Bill Source
Org. and UOM.
5 Meter—Enter the meter that is attached to the Utility Bill Level Object. The system automatically
populates Meter Org.
6 Commodity—Enter the commodity that represents the type of energy being consumed, i.e. electricity
or gas.
7 UOM—Enter the unit of measure of the usage of the utility bill.
8 Cycle—Enter the cyclefor the utility bill.
9 Rate Code—Enter the code of the rate to charge for the utility bill.
10 Correction Factor—Enter the number for the correction factor. Correction Factor is a value the
utility company sets to ensure proper usage calculation. This value will be used as a multiplier when
calculating utility bill rates.
11 From Date—Enter the begin date of the billing period. The system automatically populates To Date
with the same date.
12 End Date—Enter the end date of the billing period.
13 Start Reading—Enter the reading at the start of the utility bill period.
Note: If you clear Start Reading, the system automatically clears End Reading and vice versa. It
will not adjust Usage based on edits to either field.
14 End Reading—Enter the reading at the end of the utility bill period.
Note: If you enter End Reading when Usage is null and Start Reading is not null, the system
automatically populates Usage = End Reading – Start Reading.
15 Usage—Enter the usage for the utility bill period. If Start Reading is not null when you enter Usage,
the system automatically populates End Reading = Start Reading + Usage.
16 Total Bill Amount—Enter the cost amount for the utility bill period. The system automatically
populates Currency.
17 Multiplier—Enter a multiplier to calculate usage from the meter reading. This value will be used as
a multiplier when calculating utility bill rates.
18 Meter Type—Select the type of meter for the utility bill period.
Note: Energy and Demand measures KWh and kW.
Reactive Energy measurers kVARh to bill power factor less than 95%.
Energy, Demand, and Power Factor measures all KWh, kW, and kVARh.
19 Peak Demand—Enter the peak demand for the utility bill period. The system automatically populates
the peak demand UOM.
20 Billed Demand—Enter the demand rate billed for the utility bill period.
21 Power Factor (%)—Enter the power factor percentage of the commodity for the utility bill period.
22 Service Charge—Enter the monthly service charge for the utility bill period. The system automatically
populates Currency.
23 Unit Charge—Enter the unit charge or rate being charged for the rate code for the utility bill period.
The system automatically populates Currency.
24 Load Factor—Enter the load factor for the utility bill period.
25 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a utility bill, select the utility bill to delete, and then click Delete Utility Bill.
4 Work Order-Activity—Enter the work order and activity for which to book the invoice allocation.
Note: If you select a work order with a system work order type of IS (Direct issue), then the system
clears and protects Activity. No Activity is required for the work order type IS.
If you manually enter a Work Order of a type other than IS, the system will automatically populate
the Activity from the work order if there is only one activity on the work order.
The system enables you to search for all transactions associated with a multiple equipment work
order by defining a Quick Filter on the Work Order lookup using Parent Work Order as part of the
filter criteria.
5 Click Submit. The system creates an invoice allocation transaction against the work order.
Note: Upon saving the invoice allocation, the system deactivates the invoice allocation if the
Unallocated Qty. is zero as a result of the allocation.
To activate an inactive invoice line, select the invoice line to activate, and then click Activate Line.
The system activates the line and selects Active.
To inactivate an invoice line, select the invoice line to inactivate, and then click Inactivate Line.
The system inactivates the line and unselects Active. The system also clears and protects the Qty.
to Allocate, Work Order, and Activity for the selected invoice line.
• Receiving Quotations
Note: System automatically assigns this Status when the first quotation is updated with pricing
and its Status is changed to Received.
• Cancelled
12 Work Order—Enter the work order associated with the request for quotation. The system
automatically populates Equipment.
13 Work Order-Activity—Enter the work order-activity associated with the request for quotation.
Note: Enter either Work Order or Work Order-Activity. Both fields cannot be populated
simultaneously.
14 Equipment—Enter the equipment for which you are requesting a quotation if MEC work order is
specified. The system automatically populates Equipment Org. and Related Work Order.
15 Buyer—Enter the buyer for the request for quotation.
16 Delivery Address—Enter the delivery address for the request for quotation.
17 Class—Enter the class for the request for quotation. The system automatically populates Class
Org.
Enter the RFQ Print Options:
18 Individual Lines—Select to have the system create a line for each line listed.
19 Sum Quantities with Earliest Due Date—Select to have the system create quotation lines for each
part and each trade-task combination assigning the earliest Due Date for the grouping.
20 Sum Quantities by Due Date—Select to have the system create quotation lines for each part and
trade-task combination grouping by Due Date.
21 Auto-print RFQ—Select to print the record automatically when Status is Sent to Supplier.
Enter the RFQ Terms:
22 Ship Via—Enter the ship via code for the request for quotations.
23 Payment Terms—Enter the payment terms for the request for quotations.
24 Freight Terms—Enter the freight terms for the request for quotations.
25 FOB Point—Enter the freight on board point for the request for quotations.
26 Payment Method—Enter the method of payment for the request for quotations.
Enter the Email Information:
27 Email Subject Line—Enter the email subject line.
28 Email Body Text—Enter the email body text.
Creating parts
To create parts for RFQs:
Retrieving WO parts
To retrieve work order parts:
2 Select the record for which to select items, and then click the Selection tab.
Note: The lines displayed are the received Quotation lines associated with the RFQ.
3 Select either Parts or Services. The system displays the parts or services.
4 Select items for the RFQ, and then choose one of the following options:
• Award Items—The system awards selected items to the quotation and others in the item group
to Not Awarded.
Note: System Status must be Undecided.
Multiple items with the same Line may not be Awarded.
• Cancel Awarded Items—The system cancels the Award status for selected items and changes
the items' System Status to Undecided.
Note: System Status must be Awarded.
5 Update Supplier Catalog—The system updates the supplier parts catalog with data from selected
items.
6 Generate Requisition—The system generates a requisition for selected items.
7 Generate POs—The system generates purchase orders for selected items.
8 View Totals for All Suppliers—The system displays totals by supplier in view-only mode.
2 Select the record for which to view totals, and then click the Selection tab.
3 Click View Totals for All Suppliers.
4 View the totals by supplier information.
Copying RFQs
The copy RFQ feature copies an RFQ, including all details.
To copy RFQs:
1 Create an RFQ.
2 Right-click, and then select Copy RFQ.
3 New RFQ Description—Enter the description for the new RFQ.
4 Due Date—Enter the due date for the new RFQ.
5 Select the record types to copy, and then click Submit. The system copies all RFQ details to the
new RFQ.
Note: Some exceptions apply to the header, service, part, and comment details copied.
Editing quotations
The system automatically creates a quotation record when a quotation is received via an RFQ and the
RFQ header status is changed to Sent to Supplier. Update the record details as long as the quotation
is in the status of Unfinished.
To edit quotations:
2 Select the quotation to edit, and then click the Record View tab.
3 Quotation Description—Enter a description for the quotation.
4 Status—Choose one of the following options:
• Unfinished
• Received
• Cancelled
10 Click Submit.
3 Supp. Catalog Reference—Enter the associated supplier catalog information for the part.
4 Lead Time (Days)—Enter the necessary lead time for the part.
5 Not Offered—Select if the part is not offered by the supplier.
6 Purchase Qty. (UOP)—Enter the unit of measure for the part.
7 Price—Enter the price of the part, and then update the currency of the price in the adjacent field.
8 Exchange Rate—Enter the exchange rate for the currency.
9 Freeze Rate—Select to set the Exchange Rate as permanent.
10 Qty. per UOP—Enter the number of parts per unit of measure.
11 Delivery Date—Enter the requested delivery date for the part.
12 Tax Code—Enter the tax code that applies to the part.
13 Tax Code 2—Enter a secondary tax code that applies to the part.
Note: If there are two tax codes, the system calculates the total tax based on the two tax codes
entered by adding the amount to be taxed for each code to the price of the part.
14 Click Submit.
Managing work involves creating, planning, and scheduling work orders. The work management life
cycle begins when a person, department, or company identifies a work order that the maintenance
department must complete. Before using the work management module, define initial work information
such as supervisors, permits, qualifications, trades, employees, shifts, tasks, tools, material lists, and
VMRS codes.
You may create standard work orders, and then apply the information from standard work orders to
regular work orders. Next, create regular work orders to repair broken equipment, modify equipment
to meet safety and environmental standards, perform work orders during a normal workday, and record
information concerning equipment problems. Enter header information on the Work Order Record
View page, and then add activities to the work order, schedule labor, associate qualifications with work
order activities, book labor and vendor hours, associate parts, enter meter readings, create child work
orders, add permits, and request tools as necessary. You may also view the status of work orders and
view work order information such as work order cost and service request details. Finally, close the work
order after the work is complete.
Create preventive maintenance (PM) work orders to generate periodic work orders for specified
frequencies or meter readings. PM work orders apply to single pieces of equipment or systems that
include several pieces of equipment.
On the Work Order Scheduling form, you may view the current work order schedule, calculate labor
availability, and view labor utilization. Schedule unscheduled or backlogged work orders. Reschedule
work orders as necessary. Additionally, you can view work order comments, change the work order
status, and freeze or unfreeze activity schedules. You may balance the workload on the WO Load
Balancing form.
You may also create service requests using the work management module. Define initial service request
information such as customers, properties, and service codes before creating service requests. Then,
create service requests, assign personnel to service requests, and close service requests after the
work is complete. You may also book hours, issue and return parts, and enter additional charges for
service requests.
Defining supervisors
Define codes to represent employee supervisors.
To define supervisors:
Defining permits
Define permits to link safety and permitting information to equipment, locations, categories, PM
schedules, standard work orders and work orders. For example, you may define a "hot" work permit
regarding welding in a restricted area; a "confined space entry" permit when workers must complete
the work in an enclosed production space such as a tank or vessel; or a "lockout-tagout" permit when
the equipment involved must be cut off from operational power supplies.
Note: Define equipment, locations, categories, PM schedules, standard work orders and work orders
before associating permits with these. Describe any necessary permit information and instructions on
the Permit Body tab.
To define permits:
2 Select the permit for which to modify permit body comments, and then click the Permit Body tab.
3 Click the header of the permit body comment to modify.
4 Modify the existing comments as necessary.
5 ClickSave. The system displays the modified comment on the Permit Body page.
Note: The system does not display a link for the original Created comment after the comment is
modified. To preserve all comments, do not delete any previous comment text when modifying
comments.
Defining qualifications
Define qualifications to establish a set of occupational standards and/or required job-related training
for personnel, tasks, trades, and/or work order activities. After defining a qualification, associate the
qualification with personnel, tasks, trades, and/or work order activities to establish your criteria for
qualification enforcement of work activities. Qualification enforcement is determined by the WOQUAL
installation parameter. See in the Infor EAM System Administrator's Guide.
If you are using qualification enforcement, you can only assign/schedule an employee who has the
necessary qualification(s) to perform the work for which a qualification is required. If a qualification is
associated with a trade, task, or work order activity, the employee must have that qualification on their
personnel record. Employee qualifications are active if the employee has completed the necessary
training course/requirements for the qualification and the qualification duration has not expired.
You can also define qualifications as training records to create a historical record of job-related training
employees receive that does not need to be tracked for qualification enforcement.
To define qualifications:
7 Training Record—Select to indicate whether the qualification is associated with a training record.
By defining a qualification as a training record, the system does not track the qualification for
qualification enforcement, and the qualification cannot be associated with tasks, trades, and/or work
order activities.
8 Click Save Record.
Defining trades
Define codes for the types of employees performing maintenance work. The system charges the cost
of the trade, based on an hourly rate, back to the appropriate work order, asset, or project, ensuring
correct cost accounting. A single trade may have multiple rates based on the type of work performed
or the department associated with the trade for a specific work order. Define standard trade rates for
suppliers on the Supplier Rates page of the Trades form. On the Qualifications page, you may
associate qualifications with trades to establish the minimum qualifications for an employee belonging
to a trade to perform work for which the trade is selected.
When scheduling work, you can select to assign the work to an employee and/or a trade. When booking
hours for the work, the system calculates the labor cost of the hours to book based on the trade rate
defined for either the employee or the trade rate defined for the trade. See "Defining trade rates" on
page 361.
To define trades:
a trade. If an employee is associated with a trade for which there is a qualification, the employee must
have an active record of that qualification on their personnel record. Employee qualifications are active
if the employee has completed the necessary training course/requirements and the training has not
expired as indicated by the Start Date and Expiration Date for the qualification on the employee’s
personnel record. Employees can also be Temporarily Disqualified for qualifications as necessary
on their personnel record.
If you have associated a qualification with a trade, and you associate a trade with a work order activity,
you can only schedule employees associated with the selected trade who have the active qualifications
required for that trade to be assigned/scheduled to perform the work.
Note: If you delete a qualification previously associated with a trade, then the deleted trade qualification
will no longer be required for any subsequent work order activities to which the trade is assigned.
Likewise, if you add a new qualification to a trade or update an existing qualification associated with a
trade, the new/updated trade will not affect any existing work order activities to which the trade is
assigned. However, the added/updated qualification will be required for any subsequent work order
activities to which the trade is assigned, and the system displays a message indicating the number of
open work orders for the trade.
To associate qualifications with trades:
10 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a rate, select the rate to delete, and then click Delete Rate.
10 Click Process.
11 Click Close.
• Validates information in the new employee record against the employee's new organization.
If a conflict exists with the employee's Class, Fleet Customer, and Cost Code, the system clears
these fields when you submit the transfer.
Additionally, when you transfer an employee into an organization of which he or she was previously a
member, the system automatically updates fields in the new employee record based on the historical
record for the original organization. The system copies child records and updates associated records.
To transfer employees between organizations:
Defining shifts
Define the shifts used within the organization.
To define shifts:
6 Shift Start Date—Enter the date the shift goes into effect. For example, if the workweek begins on
Monday, ensure that this date is a Monday.
7 Class—Enter the class of the shift.
The system automatically populates Class Org.
8 Click Save Record.
6 Click Submit.
Note: To remove an employee, select the employee to remove, and then click Remove Employee.
Defining crews
Define and edit crew records.
To define crews:
10 Reason For Repair—Enter the reason the vehicle needs repair (Code Key 14).
11 Work Accomplished—Enter the work performed on the vehicle (Code Key 15).
12 Technician Part Failure—Enter the reason the technician or supplier thinks the vehicle failed (Code
Key 18).
13 Manufacturer—Enter the Manufacturer/Supplier Code (Code Key 34) to associate with the vehicle.
14 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system, e.g., brakes, frame, suspension,
needing repair (Code Key 31).
15 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the subsystem needing repair (Code Key 32).
The values available are based on the system-level code.
16 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part needing repair
(Code Key 33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code.
The system automatically populates VMRS Description based on the combination of the system,
assembly, and component descriptions.
27 WO Description—Enter the description of the follow-up work order the system will create when
checklist items are selected for follow-up.
28 WO Type—Select the work order type of the task checklist.
29 WO Class—Enter the work order class of the task checklist. The system automatically populates
WO Class Org.
30 WO Status—Select the work order status of the follow-up work order.
31 WO Priority—Select the work order priority of the follow-up work order.
32 Click Translate WO Description to translate the follow-up work order description.
33 Click Save Record.
13 Click Submit.
The system also automatically populates Exchange Rate as defined in the exchange rates table
to convert the specified Currency to the Local Currency. The system populates Local Price by
calculating Price divided by Exchange Rate divided by Qty. per UOP. The system populates Date
Last Updated with the current system date.
Note: To remove a supplier, select the supplier to remove, and then click Remove Supplier.
Note: To delete a price, select the price to delete, and then click Delete Price.
2 Select the task for which to add a checklist, and then click the Checklist tab.
3 Click Add Checklist Item.
The system automatically populates Checklist Item.
4 Enter a description of the checklist item.
5 Sequence—Enter the sequence in which the checklist item should be answered for the task.
6 Type—Select the type for the checklist item, e.g., enter Quantitative, Inspection, or Meter Reading.
7 Required Entry—Select if completion of the checklist item is required to close the associated work
order.
8 Equipment Level—Select the equipment level. A checklist item can be attached to the work order
header equipment, equipment, or the route or linear referenced equipment.
9 Equipment Class—Enter the equipment class with which the checklist item is associated. The
system automatically populates Equipment Class Org.
10 Equipment Category—Enter the equipment category with which the checklist item is associated.
11 UOM—Enter the unit of measure for the measurement. UOM is required for inspections, meter
readings, and quantitative checklist items.
12 Aspect—Enter the inspection aspect measured during an inspection. Aspect is required for
inspection checklist items.
13 Point Type—Enter the inspection point type. Point Type is required for inspection checklist items.
14 Repeating Occurrences—Select to indicate the measurement recorded with this checklist item is
recorded more than one time during the execution of the task.
15 Task—Enter the task the system will assign to the follow-up work order activity.
16 Material List—Enter the material list the system will assign to the follow-up work order activity.
17 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system, e.g., brakes, frame, suspension,
requiring the check (Code Key 18).
18 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the subsystem needing repair (Code Key 32).
The values available are based on the system-level code.
19 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part needing repair
(Code Key 33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code. The system automatically populates VMRS Description.
20 Component Location—Enter the location the check will be performed on the equipment.
21 Condition—Enter the condition of the equipment required to perform the check.
22 Findings—Enter the possible findings the user can select when entering results. This is necessary
for qualitative and inspection checklist items.
23 Click Submit.
The system automatically populates Updated By and Date Updated.
2 Select the task for which to copy a checklist, and then click the Checklist tab.
3 Click Import Checklist.
4 Task—Enter the task from which to copy the checklist. The system automatically populates the task
description and Task Revision.
5 Click Submit.
Defining tools
Define tools for departments. Tools are pieces of equipment that a department uses to carry out
maintenance work, e.g., scaffolding or excavators. The department is usually the "owner" of a tool, so
the department’s store keeps the tools.
Note: Tool refers to a type of tool, rather than an individual item. For example, if the organization has
several drills, create a general Tool code called DRILL. Then create individual parts for each drill and
track them as assets using the drills’ serial numbers.
See the following table to determine the best method for defining tools in the organization:
Once the transaction records are displayed, click the work order hyperlink. The system opens the Work
Orders form and queries for the selected work order.
Note: If a common tool is associated with a common part, the transaction price will reflect the actual
currency, e.g., the currency of the organization fo the transaction.
To view transactions for tools:
5 Class—Enter the class of the material list. The classes shown belong to the MATL entity.
6 Revision Status—Enter the revision status for the route. The system automatically populates
Revision.
Note: You can enter a Revision Status only if the PMRVCTRL installation parameter is set to Yes.
Contact your system administrator for more information.
12 Quantity—Enter the quantity needed. The system displays the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
13 Reserve—Select to reserve the part when this material list is requested on a new work order. If you
mark the part line as Reserve, this setting will carry over to any work order activity on which the
material list is selected, and the system will automatically reserve the part for the work order activity
by creating a part reservation record in the indicated store for all material list parts flagged for reserve.
14 Critical—Select if the part is critical to all work activities requiring the material list.
15 Line Number—Modify the line number as necessary.
16 Equipment—Enter the equipment associated with the part. The system displays the part for issue
only when you associate the material with a work order that has the specified equipment. The system
automatically populates Equipment Type and Equipment Org.
17 Click Submit.
5 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the associated subsystem (Code Key 32). The
values available are based on the system-level code.
6 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part (Code Key
33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the assembly-level
code.
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a VMRS Code, select the code to delete, and then click Delete VMRS Code.
4 Enter data in that contains, e.g., if you chose to search by Phone, enter the phone number, and
then click to begin the search process.
Note: If exactly one match is found by the room, the system populates Room, the room description,
and Room Property.
If exactly one match is found by the guest's last name, first name, or phone number, the system
populates the information in the Guest Information section.
4 Standard WO—Enter a unique code identifying the standard work order, and then enter a description
of the work in the adjacent field.
5 Problem Code—Enter the code identifying the problem.
6 Equipment Class—Enter the class of the equipment on which to perform the work. The classes
shown belong to the OBJ entity.
The system automatically populates Equip. Class Org.
7 Category—Enter the equipment category to which the standard work order applies.
8 Class—Enter the class of the work. The classes shown belong to the STWO entity.
The system automatically populates Class Org.
9 Template—Select to create a standard work order template with which to associate children.
Note: If you are creating a template work order, you must specify a Duration greater than the total
duration of allchild work orders.
14 Reason For Repair—Enter the reason the vehicle needs repair (Code Key 14).
15 Work Accomplished—Enter the work performed on the vehicle (Code Key 15).
16 Technician Part Failure—Enter the reason the technician or supplier thinks the vehicle failed (Code
Key 18).
17 Manufacturer—Enter the Manufacturer/Supplier Code (Code Key 34) to associate with the vehicle.
18 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system, e.g., brakes, frame, suspension,
needing repair (Code Key 31).
19 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the subsystem needing repair (Code Key 32).
The values available are based on the system-level code.
20 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part needing repair
(Code Key 33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code.
21 Activity Comments—Enter comments or instructions for the activity.
22 Click Submit.
Note: To delete an activity from a standard work order, select the activity to delete, and then click
Delete Activity.
23 Parent Work Order—Enter the code identifying the parent work order for the work order.
The system automatically populates the following fields:
Criticality identifies the equipment in the work request. The system only populates Criticality if
you selected an Equipment for which a criticality code is linked, and it is protected.
PM Code identifies the PM work order from which the work order was generated. The system only
populates PM Code if the work order was generated from a PM work order.
CN Number indicates the change notice number of the equipment on the work order.
Scheduling Session indicates the MS Project planning session associated with the equipment on
the work order.
Customer indicates the asset management customer associated with the equipment on the work
order.
Property indicates the asset management property associated with the equipment on the work
order.
Caller Name indicates the name of the person who called in to report the problem.
Reject Reason indicates the reason that the work order was rejected.
The system automatically selects Reopened if the work order is closed and then reopened.
24 Standard WO—Enter the standard work order if it has been stored in the system library.
The system automatically populates the work order description, Type, Class, Scheduling Session,
Scheduling Session Type, Maintenance Pattern-Sequence, Problem Code, Priority, Scheduled
End Date, Campaign-Campaign Event and Campaign Status if available. The system also copies
the standard work order activities to the current work order. If the standard work order is a template,
the system creates child work orders as defined on the standard work order.
25 Priority—Enter the priority of the work order.
26 Cost Code—Enter the cost code of the work order.
27 Target Value—Enter the estimated maximum cost for the work order.
28 Failure Code—Enter the cause of failure for the equipment.
29 Action Code—Enter the action taken to resolve the problem.
30 Cause Code—Enter the cause code identifying the cause of the problem.
The system automatically populates the following fields:
Route identifies the inspection route of which the equipment is a part.
Inspection Status indicates the current status of the inspection route of which the equipment is a
part.
31 Downtime Cost—Enter the cost that resulted from the equipment being out of operation due to
failure.
32 Downtime Hours—Enter the number of hours that the equipment was out of operation due to failure.
The system automatically populates the following fields:
The system populates Last Meter Reading with the value of the last meter reading and the unit of
measure of the reading in the adjacent field.
Trigger Event indicates the MS Project planning session associated with the equipment on the
work order.
The system automatically populates Customer Contract if there is a contract associated with the
work order or if customer charges have been calculated using the asset management services
module.
The system automatically populates Original PM Due Date if the work order originated from a PM.
Note: If applicable, the system also populates Customer Contract from a project, equipment, and
location associated with the work order. The system first determines whether the work order is
associated with a customer contract; then checks for customer contracts associated with a project
that is associated with the work order (including child projects); then for the equipment of the work
order (and child equipment); and finally for the location of the work order (and child locations)
Enter the following Call Center details for steps 33-40:
33 Equipment Usability—Enter the code identifying the equipment's usability factor.
34 Temporary Fix Promise Date—Enter the date the work will be fixed temporarily, if a date was
promised to the customer.
35 Provider—Enter the provider.
The system automatically populates Provider Org.
54 Start Date—Enter the actual date on which the work order is started.
55 Date Completed—Enter the actual date on which the work order is completed.
56 Shift—Enter the shift during which the work is requested to be performed.
57 Project-Budget—Enter the project and the project budget to associate with the work order.
Note: You cannot select a frozen project/budget.
58 Service Request—If populated, the value displayed for Service Request is a hyperlink to the
service request associated with the work order. Click the number to view the associated service
request.
59 Click Save Record.
Note: To view a GIS map and associate it with the work order, right-click on the form, and then
choose View GIS Map.
If the work order is for a linear equipment record integrated with GIS, right-click, and then choose
View GIS Map to adjust From Point or To Point via the work order’s map.
To create a customer invoice for the work order (for a asset management services customer contract),
right-click, and then select Create Customer Invoice. The system then calculates all customer
charges for the work order that are associated with the customer contract and generates a customer
invoice record.
To create a standard work order from any general work order for easy duplication, right-click on any
existing work order, and then click Create Standard WO. The system displays the Create Standard
WO popup. Enter New Standard WO, and then enter a description for the new standard work order.
Enter Organization, and then click Submit.
To view the progress of a work order, right-click on the form, and then choose Event Log.
To create a warranty claim for the work order, right-click, and then select Create Warranty Claim.
To create a production request with an Unfinished Status, enter Work Order and Production
Priority, and right-click on the form, and then choose Create Production Request. The system
creates a production request with an Unfinished Status.
To create a production request with an Approved Status, enter Work Order and Production Priority,
and right-click on the form, and then choose Create Production Order. The system creates a
production request with an Approved Status. ERP retrieves the production request.
Note: If the work order is a multiple equipment work order and you select Hired Labor, the system
enables Equipment and it is required.
23 Labor Type—Select the type of labor needed if you selected Hired Labor.
Note: Activity lines only appear on the Create Labor Requisition popup if you have established one
or more activities to be hired from an external source by selecting Hired Labor and by selecting a
valid Labor Type on the Activities page.
7 Date—Enter the date of the additional cost if you use multiple equipment.
8 Equipment—Enter the equipment for the additional cost if this is a multiple equipment work order.
The system automatically populates Equipment Org. and Related Work Order.
9 Click Submit.
Note: Records cannot be deleted on the Additional Costs page. Therefore, enter negative costs
to make corrections. The negative costs are not validated against the positive posts, i.e., there may
be a part cost of 10 and another part cost of -15.
9 Click Cancel.
5 Maintenance Equipment—Enter the auxiliary equipment needed for the task, i.e., the equipment
is not used in production.
The system automatically populates Equipment Org.
6 Comments—Enter additional comments about the schedule.
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a schedule, select the schedule to delete, and then click Delete Schedule. You
may delete an existing labor schedule that is scheduled for the current date or later if you have
made an error entering the data and if you have access rights for deleting the labor schedule. Also,
you may only delete labor schedules that have not been frozen or completed.
• Multiple equipment child (MEC) work orders—An MEC work order is the work order type that is
assigned to a Related Work Order that the system automatically creates for each equipment record
added to the Equipment page of the Work Orders form. Upon saving the equipment to the work
order, the system generates the Related Work Order (of type Multiple Equipment Child) for the
equipment. The Related Work Order, which can be viewed on many forms within the system, then
enables the system to track work order costs at both the work order and equipment level.
For example, if you add EQUIP-001 and EQUIP-002 to the Equipment page of the Work Orders form,
the system generates a Related Work Order of type MEC for both EQUIP-001and EQUIP-002 when
you save the work order, e.g., work order numbers 50001 for EQUIP-001 and 50002 for EQUIP-002.
Note: In the user documentation, all references to "MEC work order" or "related work order" are to the
type of work order that is automatically created by the system for equipment records added to the
Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
By default the system does not display MEC work orders on the List View page of the Work Orders
form. You must use the Dataspy to access MEC work orders.
To add equipment to work orders to split work order costs:
4 Click Submit.
The system populates the following fields on the MEC work order(s) from the parent work order:
Organization, Description, Type, Status, Duration, Priority, Problem Code , Entered By ,
Sched. Start Date, Date Reported , Class, and Class Org.
The system populates the following fields on each MEC work order from the Equipment on the
MEC work order: Equipment, Type, System Status, Equipment Type, Equipment System Type,
Equipment, Equip. Organization, Location, Location Organization, Department, Cost Code ,
Criticality, and Safety.
The system automatically populates Parent Work Order and Route Parent (in the database only)
with the work order number (on the header). The system populates the following fields from the
activities on the parent work order to each MEC work order: Activity, Start Date, Trade, Task,
Hired Labor , People Required, Duration, Task Qty. (UOM), Reason for Repair, Work
Accomplished, Technician, Part Failure, Manufacturer, System Level, Assembly Level,
Component Level, Supplier, and Supplier Org.
Note: Work order planning information is not copied to related work orders. Therefore, the system
sets the Estimated Hours, Hours Remaining, and Task Qty. to 0 for all the activities on any created
related work order(s).
Add additional equipment to the work order as necessary.
Note To remove equipment from the work order, select the equipment to remove, and then click
Remove Equipment.
If the AUTODMEC installation parameter is set to YES, then the system deletes the MEC work order
from the system altogether.
6 Click Submit.
Note: To remove a qualification, select the qualification to remove, and then click Remove
Qualification.
Note: You must enter an activity for the work order before you associate a qualification.
6 Rate—Enter or modify the hourly pay rate for the employee, trade, or crew performing the work. If
you defined a trade rate for the selected employee or trade, the system automatically populates
Rate with the appropriate hourly rate. If you selected a Crew, the system does not populate Rate;
when you submit the booked labor, the system looks up the trade rate for each employee on the
crew.
If you defined a trade rate for the selected Employee, the system populates Rate with the employee
trade rate. However, if you did not define trade rates for the selected Employee, the system populates
Rate with the trade rate defined for the selected Trade. If you enter a Rate for the selected Crew,
the system overrides the trade rate defined for each employee on the crew if the calculated rate is
zero.
7 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work.
8 End Time—Enter the scheduled start time and end time of the work order activity.
9 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific Equipment record to apply the booked labor to the selected Equipment and its
corresponding related work order. The system also populates Equipment Org. and Related
Work Order from the selected Equipment record.
Note: If you are making corrections to booked labor for a multiple equipment work order and
you select All Equipment or a specific equipment record for Equipment, the system also splits
the booked hours and applies the correction to all the equipment on the work order or the selected
equipment.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly split the booked labor to each equipment record on the work order
for the selected work order and activity. Upon saving the transaction, the system creates labor
booking records and applies them to each related work order and selected activity. The system
divides the number entered for Hours Worked by the number of equipment records added on
the Equipment page of the Work Orders form to determine the booked labor to apply to each
equipment. The Rate applicable to the multiple equipment work order is also applied to all of the
MEC work orders.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the Hours Worked to the last
equipment record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a
Completed status (or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to
select whether to split the labor hours against only equipment with open related work orders or
against all equipment, regardless of whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or
their user-status equivalents).
Also, the system disregards the setting of the COMDAYS installation parameter when
posting labor booking transactions related work orders if you select All Equipment.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to apply the booked labor to the work order header only.
10 Click Submit.
Note: After submitting the transaction, the system does not display the original booked labor
transaction entered when the Hours Worked are split across multiple equipment records. Instead,
the system displays the booked labor transactions for each equipment to which the labor was split.
Note: The setting of the BOOPLAN installation parameter determines the manner in which the
system populates information from employee records and activity-trade records for booked hours.
See in the System Administrator’s Guide.
6 Date Worked—Enter the date the hours were worked.
7 Type of Hours—Enter the type of hours worked (e.g., normal rate, overtime rate, etc.).
8 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work.
If you enter a positive value for Hours Worked, the system populates Start Time and End Time.
If you enter a negative value or delete the Hours Worked, then the system clears Start Time and
End Time.
Note: You can only book vendor labor hours against an MEC work order from the parent multiple
equipment work order.
9 Rate—Enter the hourly pay rate for the vendor performing the work.
10 Units—Enter the quantity of the task being ordered. For example, if you entered 3 hours as the
Estimated Hours for the Task, then the 3 hours represents one unit.
If no value is entered for Hours Worked, then the system calculates the Hours Worked based on
the Units entered as follows:
If Type is SH and you enter a value for Units, the system populates Hours Worked based on the
following equation:
Hours Worked = (Units/Act. Units) x Act. Estimated Hours
If Type is SF and you enter a value for Units, then the system populates Hours Worked based on
the following equation:
Hours Worked : Received = (Units/Act. Units) x Ordered
11 Start Time and End Time—Enter the scheduled start time and end time of the work order activity.
12 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for which to book vendor hours.
The system automatically populates Act. Units and the corresponding unit of measure, Act.
Estimated Hours, Act. Hours Remaining, Department, and Trade.
13 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
Enter All Equipment to evenly split the booked vendor hours to each equipment record on the work
order for the selected work order and activity. Upon saving the transaction, the system creates labor
booking records and applies them to each related work order and selected activity. The system
divides the number entered for Hours Worked by the number of equipment records added on the
Equipment page to determine the booked labor to apply to each equipment. The Rate applicable
to the multiple equipment work order is also applied to all of the MEC work orders.
Note: The system automatically populates Equipment with All Equipment if the Type is SH,
otherwise the system populates Equipment from the associated PO-Line.
The system automatically applies any remainder of the Hours Worked to the last equipment record
on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a
Completed status (or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to select
whether to split the labor hours against only equipment with open related work orders or against all
equipment, regardless of whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or their user-status
equivalents).
Also, the system disregards the setting of the COMDAYS installation parameter when posting
labor booking transactions on related work orders if you select All Equipment.
Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the booked vendor hours to the selected Work Order
only.
Enter a specific Equipment record to distribute the booked vendor hours to the selected Equipment
and the corresponding Related Work Order only.
Note: Although Equipment is only editable when the Type is SH, the system still distributes costs
for the booked vendor hours to the Equipment populated from the PO-Line for Type SF and ST.
If you are making corrections to booked labor for a multiple equipment work order and you select
All Equipment or a specific equipment record for Equipment, the system also splits the booked
hours and applies the correction to all the equipment on the work order or the selected equipment.
See "Adding equipment to work orders to split work order costs" on page 398.
14 % Received—Enter the percentage of time received. You may only enter this percentage if the
Type is SF (Fixed price).
When you enter a value for % Received, the system populates Received based on the following
equation:
Received = (% Received/100) x Ordered
15 Received—Enter the value of time received. The system automatically populates the currency in
the adjacent field.
16 Click Submit.
8 Type of Hours—Enter the type of hours completed for the work order.
Note: Use Non-WO Time to record sick, vacation, or travel time.
9 Rate—Enter or modify a pay rate for the employee performing the work order. The system
automatically populates Rate for the employee if a trade rate or employee rate are established in
the system.
Note: Rate can only be modified if the default rate is 0 or null.
If you make changes to Department, Trade, or Type of Hours, the system edits the value of Rate.
10 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours the work order was performed.
11 Start Time—Enter a start time for the work order.
12 End Time—Enter an end time for the work order.
13 ClickSubmit.
Note: If the work order is a multiple equipment child work order, the system automatically populates
Equipment, Equipment Org., and Related Work Order.
6 Print with Document—Select to print comments when printing the work order.
Note: Select Print with Document per individual line, or select the Print with Document field
header to select all lines.
7 Click Update Work Order. The system automatically populates Error Message.
Note: Click Copy Line to copy the information from the currently selected row to the next available
row.
Click Clear Line to delete the information from the selected row.
The system automatically populates Trigger Event which indicates the MS Project planning session
is associated with the equipment on the work order.
24 Reported By—Enter the employee requesting the work.
25 Date Reported—Enter the date and time that the problem was reported.
Note: If the BOOKDATE installation parameter is set to ON, the system does not allow you to book
hours for labor for a date that is earlier than the Date Reported. If BOOKDATE is set to OFF, you
can book hours without any date restrictions related to the Date Reported.
6 Click Submit.
4 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for which to book labor hours.
Note: You can also select the task for which the work is performed to differentiate between multiple
activities on the work order that may be assigned to the same trade.
6 Rate—Enter or modify the hourly pay rate for the employee, trade, or crew performing the work. If
you defined a trade rate for the selected employee or trade, the system automatically populates
Rate with the appropriate hourly rate. If you selected a Crew, the system does not populate Rate;
when you submit the booked labor, the system looks up the trade rate for each employee on the
crew.
If you defined a trade rate for the selected Employee, the system populates Rate with the employee
trade rate. However, if you did not define trade rates for the selected Employee, the system populates
Rate with the trade rate defined for the selected Trade. If you enter a Rate for the selected Crew,
the system overrides the trade rate defined for each employee on the crew if the calculated rate is
zero.
7 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work.
8 End Time—Enter the scheduled start time and end time of the work order activity.
9 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific Equipment record to apply the booked labor to the selected Equipment and its
corresponding related work order. The system also populates Equipment Org. and Related
Work Order from the selected Equipment record.
Note: If you are making corrections to booked labor for a multiple equipment work order and
you select All Equipment or a specific equipment record for Equipment, the system also splits
the booked hours and applies the correction to all the equipment on the work order or the selected
equipment.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly split the booked labor to each equipment record on the work order
for the selected work order and activity. Upon saving the transaction, the system creates labor
booking records and applies them to each related work order and selected activity. The system
divides the number entered for Hours Worked by the number of equipment records added on
the Equipment page of the Work Orders form to determine the booked labor to apply to each
equipment. The Rate applicable to the multiple equipment work order is also applied to all of the
MEC work orders.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the Hours Worked to the last
equipment record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a
Completed status (or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to
select whether to split the labor hours against only equipment with open related work orders or
against all equipment, regardless of whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or
their user-status equivalents).
Also, the system disregards the setting of the COMDAYS installation parameter when
posting labor booking transactions related work orders if you select All Equipment.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to apply the booked labor to the work order header only.
10 Click Submit.
Note: After submitting the transaction, the system does not display the original booked labor
transaction entered when the Hours Worked are split across multiple equipment records. Instead,
the system displays the booked labor transactions for each equipment to which the labor was split.
1 Employee—Enter the employee for which to book labor for the fleet work order.
The system automatically populates the employee name.
2 Work Order—Enter the fleet work order for which to book labor.
The system automatically populates work order header information for the selected work order.
3 Type of Hours—Enter the type of hours worked, e.g., normal rate, overtime rate, etc.
4 User Password—Enter the password for the current session.
5 Auto Book Hours—Select to automatically book hours for the selected employee and fleet work
order.
6 Click Start. The system records the time the labor begins.
Note: Once the system begins recording the book labor record, the system books the hours without
any notification or prompting when the work is stopped.
To manually stop the book labor process, click Stop.
3 Part—Enter the part to issue to the work order. The system automatically populates Part Description,
Part Org., Available Qty., and Track by Asset.
4 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
5 Store—Enter the store from which to issue parts.
6 Bin—Enter the bin from which to issue the parts.
7 Lot—Enter the lot from which to issue the parts.
8 Failed Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part that failed.
Note: The system does not allow part failures on an Issue for parts tracked by asset.
The system automatically populates Activity-Trade with the activity-trade performing the work for
the selected work order and populates Store with the store defined for the department of the work
order if available.
4 Part—Enter the part to add to the work order.
The system automatically populates the part description, Part Org., UOM, Track By Asset, Track
By Lot, Total Qty. Available, and Available.
Available indicates the quantity of the part available in the selected store for the work order activity.
Total Qty. Available indicates the quantity of the part available in the selected store for the work
order activity, as well as the quantity of the part available in any child stores of the selected store.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
6 Planned Qty.—Enter the quantity of the part planned for the work order activity.
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a planned part, select the planned part to delete, and then click Delete Planned
Part.
Field Description
Work Order The number identifying the selected work order
Activity The number identifying the activity on the select-
ed work order for which the part is planned
Trade The trade to which the work is assigned for
completion
Part The code identifying the part on the work order
Part Org. The organization of the part
Part Description The description of the part
Field Description
Planned Qty. The Planned Qty. of the part entered on the
Parts tab of the Work Orders form
Reserved Qty. The Reserved Qty. of the part entered on the
Parts tab of the Work Orders form
Allocated Qty. The Allocated Qty. of the part entered on the
Parts tab of the Work Orders form
Used Qty. The Used quantity of the part entered on the
Parts tab of the Work Orders form
Available Qty. The system calculates the Available Qty. of the
part as the difference between the Qty. on Hand
of the part in the selected Store and any alloca-
tions of the part that have been allocated to other
work orders, which is displayed in Allocated Qty.
on the Parts tab of the Work Orders form.
Note: Available Qty. normally displays the Qty.
on Hand in the selected Store minus the Allo-
cated Qty. of the part for all work order/activity
combinations except the selected Work Order
and Activity for which you are viewing the
Available Qty.
However, on the Planned Part Availability popup,
the system displays the Available Qty. for multi-
ple activities on the same work order at the same
time. Therefore, the system calculates the
Available Qty. without subtracting the Allocated
Qty. for other activities on the same work order
and the Available Qty. for a given part is the
same for every activity on the selected Work
Order.
Total Available Qty. The system calculates the Total Available Qty.
as the sum of the Available Qty. of the part in
the selected Store and the Available Qty. in all
child stores of the selected Store.
UOM The unit of measure of the part
Direct Indicates whether the part is designated as a
Direct Purchase part on the Parts tab of the
Work Orders form
Held Qty. The system calculates Held Qty. as the total
quantity of the part(s) that are being held for the
selected Store.
Field Description
Note: A part is "held" if the part is on a purchase
order. If no purchase order exists for the part,
then the "held" quantity corresponds with a store-
to-store issue transaction.
5 Click Close.
6 Qty. Completed—Enter the quantity of the parts on which repairs are completed.
Note: If the RSPCOMP installation parameter is set to NO, Qty. Completed is hidden. If the
RSPCOMP installation parameter is set to YES, you can modify the Qty. Completed based on the
following conditions after submitting the record:
• You must assign repair details for the full Qty. to Repair.
• Qty. Completed is greater than or equal to 0.
7 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a repair part line, select the repair part line to delete, and then click Delete Repair
Part.
Manually assigning repair details for core tracked parts on work orders
Manually assign repair details for core tracked parts on work orders. If you did not select Auto-Assign
on a core tracked part record, you must manually assign repair details for the repair parts on work
orders. Manually assigning repair details for parts enables you to designate the store, bin, lot, and
asset information to identify the parts to repair and their location.
You can also change repair details that were created during the system’s automatic assignment process
using the Repair Details popup. See "Understanding the auto-assignment processes for core tracked
parts" on page 198 .
To manually assign repair details for core tracked parts on work orders:
2 Select the work order to which to assign repair details for core tracked parts, and then click the
Repair Parts tab.
3 Select the part to which to manually assign repair details. The system automatically populates the
Repair Part Details with the part information.
Note: You can modify Qty. to Repair and Qty. Completed for a repair part if necessary. If you
make any changes to Qty. to Repair or Qty. Completed, you can use the Repair Details popup to
edit Qty. Assigned as necessary.
7 Click Submit.
5 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for which to import a parts list.
6 Select the parts to import.
7 Click Submit.
12 Default Approver—Enter the individual responsible for approving the pick ticket.
13 Select the parts to add to the pick ticket, and then click Create Pick Ticket.
Note: Click Refresh Part List to update the Available Qty. for the selected store and to reset
Required Qty.
If you select All Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a Completed status (or
equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to select whether to distribute
the cost of the return against only open related work orders or against all equipment, regardless of
whether the related work orders are Open or Completed (or their user-status equivalents).
The value displayed for Used in the Parts list displays the quantity of the part issued/returned for
the header work order and all related MEC work orders for the activity.
The setting of the RTNANY installation parameter can also affect returns for which there is an
insufficient issue quantity against which to make a return when returning against All Equipment. If
RTNANY is set to Yes, the system distributes the return Quantity evenly across all equipment on
the work order. If RTNANY is set to No, the system does not allow you to make the return if there
is an insufficient quantity of the part.
9 Quantity—Enter the number of parts to return to the work order. The number must be greater than
0 (zero).
Note: If the part is tracked by asset, Quantity must be equal to 1.
6 Work Order—Enter the code identifying the work order for which to issue or return parts.
Note: Enter a code for Work Orderor the system will delete the entry.
Click Clear Line to delete the information from the selected row.
6 Click Submit. The system updates the Children list, and populates Parent Work Order with the
work order header number.
Note: To delete a child work order, select the child work order to delete, and then click Delete Child
WO.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to associate the permit with the equipment on the work order
header only.
6 Click Submit.
Note: You cannot delete work order permits after they have been added as a permit reference for
the work order.
To deactivate a permit, select the permit to deactivate, and then click Deactivate Permit.
3 Click Add Tool. The system automatically populates Qty. Required and Department.
4 Activity-Trade—Select the appropriate activity-trade for the work order.
5 Tool—Enter the tool to request. The system automatically populates the description of the tool.
6 Date Required—Enter the date when you need the tool.
7 Scheduled Hours—Enter the number of hours required to complete the activity.
8 Qty. Required—Enter the number of tools you need.
9 Activity-Trade—Select the appropriate activity-trade for the work order.
Note: The system only displays the activity-trade if one activity-trade exists. When two or more
exist, Activity-Trade is empty.
10 Hours Required—The system calculates and displays the number of tools required times the
number of hours required to complete the activity.
11 Available Hours—The system displays the hours that the tool is available.
12 Activity Start Date—The system displays the beginning date for which you need the tool.
13 Activity End Date—The system displays the final date of the activity.
14 Department—Enter the department associated with this tool. If the tool applies to all departments,
enter *.
15 Daily Capacity—The system calculates and displays the quantity of tools times the hours the tool
is available to the department.
16 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a tool, select the tool to delete, and then click Delete Tool.
3 Click Add Tool Usage. The system automatically populates Activity-Trade (if there is only one
activity on the work order), Department, Date Used, Quantity, Hours Used, Scheduled Qty.,
Scheduled Hours, Rate, and Costs. Rate is the default rate for the Department, Organization
(of the work order), and Tool. Costs is calculated as the product of the Quantity, Hours Used, and
the Rate.
4 Tool—Enter the tool for which to add usage information. The system automatically populates the
tool description.
5 Date Used—Enter the date of the tool usage.
6 Quantity—Enter the quantity of the tool that was used.
7 Hours Used—Enter the number of hours the tool was used.
Note: The BOOKDATE installation parameter indicates the manner in which the system handles
entries for Date Used and Hours Used when booking hours for the tool.
8 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter a specific equipment to which to distribute the Hours Used.
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the Hours Used to each equipment record on the work
order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to distribute the Hours Used to the equipment on the work order
header only.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the Hours Used to the last equipment
record on the Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has a
Completed status (or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to select
whether to distribute the cost of the tool usage against all equipment or only open related work
orders.
Also, the system disregards the setting of the TOOLDAYS installation parameter when posting
tool usage transactions if you select All Equipment.
The value displayed for Used in the Tools Usage list displays the quantity of the tool issued for the
header work order and all related work orders for the activity.
9 Activity-Trade—Enter the activity and trade for the work order for which the tool was used.
10 Department—Enter the department of the work order for which the tool was used.
11 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a tool, select the tool to delete, and then click Delete Tool Usage.
To import a scheduled tool, click Import Scheduled Tools. The system imports any tools that are
scheduled for the work order. If the work order is a multiple equipment work order, the system
creates a record for the work order header for 0 Hours Used, creates a tool usage record for each
of the MEC work orders, and divides the Hours Used for the tool equally between each of the MEC
work orders.
12 Special Hazards—Enter the code based on the Hazardous Materials Code (400) of the NFPA that
indicates any special hazards related to the materials used.
13 Equipment—Enter the equipment for which to observe the hazards and precautions for
multi-equipment work orders. The system automatically populates Equipment Org. and Related
Work Order.
14 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
2 View the list of work orders, and then double-click the row containing the work order to view or
modify.
3 View and modify work order details as necessary. See "Creating regular work orders" on page 388.
4 Click Save Record.
Planned Stock Items Material list quantity minus quantity of parts al-
ready issued plus quantity returned (net issued)
that is not line type of PD (direct purchase) and
is not a tool
Planned Services The same as Planned Hired Labor except the
line order type is SF (fixed price)
Planned Direct Purchases Requisition line minus received quantity minus
scrap quantity multiplied by price on the requisi-
tion line when the requisition is not in a status of
cancelled, the requisition line type is PD (direct
purchase) and active, and is not on a purchase
order. If it is on a purchase order, then the value
is the order quantity minus the received quantity
minus the scrap quantity multiplied by price on
the purchase order line plus total extra charges
multiplied by the order quantity minus the re-
ceived quantity minus the scrap quantity divided
by the order quantity when the purchase order
is not in a status of cancelled or approved and
the purchase order line type is PD (direct pur-
chase) and active.
Planned Tool Cost Estimated Tool Cost minus Actual Tool Cost
Planned WO Totals Sum of all planned costs
On Order Labor Cost N/A
Preventive maintenance work orders apply to single pieces of equipment or to systems that include
several pieces of equipment.
Note: You can only insert, update, or delete work orders if you are authorized to do so.
When you are creating PM schedules to generate periodic work orders, you can establish a "nesting
reference" between major and minor PMs to bypass a minor PM that coincides with the release of a
major PM. For example, you create a major PM for 90,000-mile service on a truck, for which the PM
work order activities include changing the oil. You have also created a minor PM for changing the oil
every 3000 miles. You can establish a nesting reference between the major PM for 90,000-mile service
and the minor PM for changing the oil after 3000 miles to enable the system to bypass the PM for
changing the oil after 3000 miles if its release coincides with the release of the PM for 90,000-mile
service.
The system can only bypass a minor PM if it is currently associated with a major PM with a status of
Released.
When bypassing a nested minor PM, the system assigns a status of Bypassed to the minor PM until
the major PM is completed. Upon completion of the major PM, the system automatically assigns the
status specified for Complete Status on the Record View page of the PM Schedules form to the
minor PM, e.g., Completed or Rejected.
Additionally, if you change the status of a released major PM to Awaiting release, the system also sets
the status of any related bypassed minor PMs to Awaiting release.
Note: If you have set up the system to require an electronic signature to authorize status changes to
PM work orders, the system will display the eSignature popup when status changes occur for major
and minor PM work orders associated with each other through a nesting reference.
4 Route—Enter a unique code identifying the route, and then enter a description of the route in the
adjacent field.
5 Equipment Class—Enter the class of the equipment to inspect. The classes shown belong to the
OBJ entity.
6 Category—Enter the category of equipment or route to associate with a regular route inspection.
7 Template—Select to associate categories with the route. Unselect to associate equipment with the
route.
Routing templates apply to similar equipment requiring the same maintenance action and to
equipment that moves so frequently that updating routes may be impractical. When you select
Template, the system generates a dynamic list of all equipment that might apply to that work order,
regardless of where you move the equipment. When you unselect Template, the system lists only
the specific equipment listed on the work order. When you select Template, you may not specify a
Category. If you select Template after entering a Category, the system clears the Category you
entered.
8 Revision Status—Enter the revision status for the route.
The system automatically populates Revision.
Note: You can enter a Revision Status only if the PMRVCTRL installation parameter is set to Yes.
Contact your system administrator for more information.
it may be worthwhile to execute the PM together with the breakdown maintenance. The system generates
the work order as soon as the Release Window % is reached.
Note: You can only insert, update, or delete work orders if you are authorized to do so.
To define preventive maintenance schedules:
6 Out of Service—Select to restrict the system from displaying the PM schedule in lookups.
7 Class—Enter the class of the PM. The classes shown belong to the PPM entity. The system
automatically populates Class Org.
8 Work Package—Select to indicate that this PM schedule can be associated with a work package.
The system automatically populates Plan with the PM plan.
9 Choose one of the following options:
• If the PM schedule is based on the passage of a period of time—Enter, for Perform Every, the
length of time to elapse before the system generates the PM work order, and then select the unit
of measure for the PM period in the adjacent field. The unit of measure for the PM period can
be days, weeks, months, quarters, or years.
• If the PM schedule is meter-based—Enter, for Meter Interval and/or Meter #2 Interval, the
interval(s) between PM work orders, and then enter the corresponding unit(s) of measure in the
adjacent field.
Note: You can specify more than one meter interval for a PM. For example, you may want to
change the oil in a truck every 3000 miles, which is Meter Interval. However, you may also want
to change the oil in the same truck after 720 hours of running time, which is Meter #2 Interval.
Enter values for Meter Interval, Meter # 2 Interval, and the meter units of measure as necessary;
however, you must enter a value for Meter Interval to enter a value for Meter #2 Interval.
11 Complete Status—Select the status to assign to minor work orders automatically bypassed and
closed by the release of this PM through a nesting reference.
12 Est. Workload—Enter the estimated number of hours required to complete the work order. The
system automatically populates People Required and Calc. Workload based on the Est. Workload.
13 Nest Buff. (-/+)—Enter the percent value of the nesting buffer. The system multiplies this value by
the value specified for Perform Every for a period-based minor PM. The system multiplies this
value by the value specified for Meter Interval and/or Meter # 2 Interval for a meter-based PM.
For both period-based and meter-based PMs, the system applies the product of this equation to the
associated major PM to determine the backward nesting window of the due date for the major PM.
The system automatically populates this field with 25; however, you can enter any value between
0 and 99999.
Note: The Nest Buff. (-/+) is only related to time-based preventive maintenance schedule setup.
14 M1 Nest Buff. (-/+)—Enter the percent value of the nesting buffer for the first meter. The system
multiplies this value by the value specified for Perform Every for a period-based minor PM. The
system multiplies this value by the value specified for Meter Interval and/or Meter # 2 Interval for
a meter-based PM.
For both period-based and meter-based PMs, The system applies the product of this equation to
the associated major PM to determine the forward nesting window of the due date for the major PM.
The system automatically populates this field with 25; however, you can enter any value between
0 and 99999.
15 M2 Nest Buff. (-/+)—Enter the percent value of the nesting buffer for the second meter. The system
multiplies this value by the value specified for Perform every for a period-based minor PM. The
system multiplies this value by the value specified for Meter Interval and/or Meter # 2 Interval for
a meter-based PM.
For both period-based and meter-based PMs, The system applies the product of this equation to
the associated major PM to determine the nesting window of the due date for the major PM. The
system automatically populates this field with 25; however, you can enter any value between 0 and
99999.
Note: You can enter a backward and forward nesting buffer for Perform Every or for one or both
Meter Interval and Meter #2 Interval. Enter values for Nesting Nest Buffer (- / +), M1 Nest Buffer
(- / +), and M2 Nest Buffer (- / +) for each PM interval as necessary.
Note: Perform On is only available for duplicate PMs, and is not available for daily or weekly
frequencies.
21 Req. Start Date Buff. (Days)—Enter the number of days for which to buffer the requested start
date.
Note: The system populates Req. Start Date on resulting PM work orders, based on this buffer,
whose equipment have Track Resources selected.
22 Req. End Date Buff. (Days)—Enter the number of days for which to buffer the requested end date.
Note: The system populates Req. End Date on resulting PM work orders, based on this buffer,
whose equipment have Track Resources selected.
23 Revision Status—Select the status for the current revision of the PM schedule.
24 Revision Reason—Enter an explanation of any revisions to the PM schedule.
25 Revision Status—Enter the revision status for the route. The system automatically populates
Revision.
Note: You can enter a Revision Status only if the PMRVCTRL installation parameter is set to Yes.
Contact your system administrator for more information.
4 Activity—Enter a unique code identifying the activity number. If you do not provide a number, the
system enters a number, starting at 1 and increasing by 1 for each record.
5 Trade—Enter the trade to perform this activity.
6 Task—Enter the task code for this activity.
7 Task Qty.—Enter the required number of units of the task to associate with the activity, and then
select the unit of measure in the adjacent field.
8 Material List—Enter the material list for this activity.
9 Estimated Hours—Enter the number of estimated hours for the activity.
10 People Required—Enter the number of people needed to complete the activity.
11 Start—Enter 1 if the activity is to start on the same day that the standard work order starts. Enter
2 if the activity should start on day 2 of the standard work order, etc.
12 Duration—Enter the duration of the activity in days.
13 Hired Labor—Select to indicate that the activity will be completed by an external source.
Complete steps 14-20 only if you use the American Trucking Association’s Vehicle Maintenance
Reporting System (VMRS).
Note: Depending on your system configuration, the VMRS-related fields may not be displayed.
Contact your system administrator for more information.
14 Reason For Repair—Enter the reason the vehicle needs repair (Code Key 14).
15 Work Accomplished—Enter the work performed on the vehicle (Code Key 15).
16 Technician Part Failure—Enter the reason the technician or supplier thinks the vehicle failed (Code
Key 18).
17 Manufacturer—Enter the Manufacturer/Supplier Code (Code Key 34) to associate with the vehicle.
18 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system, e.g., brakes, frame, suspension,
needing repair (Code Key 31).
19 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the subsystem needing repair (Code Key 32).
The values available are based on the system-level code.
20 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part needing repair
(Code Key 33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code.
21 Activity Comments—Enter any comments relevant to the activity.
22 Click Submit.
Note: To delete the activity from the PM schedule, select the activity to delete, and then click Delete
Activity.
or within the length of the PM, the system automatically updates the To Point of the PM record based
on the new equipment length. If the new equipment length falls outside of the length of the PM, the
system does not update the PM record.
To define equipment for PM schedules:
9 Perform Every—Enter the length of the interval of time to pass before the system generates the
next PM routine work order. You can enter any value between 0 and 99999, and then select the
unit of measure in the adjacent field. The unit of measure for the PM period can be days, weeks,
months, quarters, or years.
10 Due Date—Enter the due date of the first work order.
Note: Each work order determines the due date of the following work order. If you update the Due
Date on the Equipment page, the system updates the work order Due Date so that this due date
is later than the last work order completion date. The system adds the interval to the entered Due
Date on the Equipment page until a date later than the last completion date is reached. Future due
dates are accepted without validation.
After a work order is generated for a PM, the system automatically updates Due Date and Meter
Due on the Equipment page of the PM Schedules form to reflect the next anticipated time that the
PM will be performed on the associated equipment. The system automatically synchronizes the
Due Date on the Work Orders page of the PM Schedules form with a generated work order when
a new work order is completed or when the Due Date is updated on a work order, which includes
any minor work orders that are awaiting release when a major PM work order is completed.
11 Dormant Start—Enter the date on which the dormant period for the PM begins.
12 Dormant End—Enter the date on which the dormant period for the PM ends.
13 Reuse Dormant Period—Select to use the same specified dormant period for the PM on a yearly
basis. If you select Reuse Dormant Period, the system automatically updates the specified
Dormant Start and Dormant End dates after the dormant period has elapsed.
14 Test Point Set—Enter the test point set for calibration of the equipment.
Note: Depending on your system configuration, Test Point Set may not be displayed. Contact your
system administrator for more information.
If the work order is a calibration work order, the system copies the test points for the specified
equipment record to the work order when it is released. The system copies the test points related
to the selected Test Point Set.
23 Meter # 2 Interval—Enter the length of the interval of time indicating how frequently the second
meter is used/read, e.g., 30 to indicate that the second meter is read every 30 days.
24 Meter #2 Due—Enter the reading due value for the second meter.
25 Perform On—Enter the week of the month and the day of the week on which to perform the work
on the equipment, e.g., 2nd Tuesday of the month due. Select Last to handle scenarios in which
there are five weeks in a month. The system sets the due date to the last week of the month.
Enter Linear Reference Details.
26 Click Submit.
Note: To delete equipment from the PM schedule, select the equipment to delete, and then click
Delete Equipment.
5 Precaution—Enter the safety measure to protect your employees from the hazard. The system
automatically populates a description of the precaution, Precaution Org., Timing, Sequence, and
Precaution Revision.
6 Timing—Select the timing which is used to identify when the precaution should be taken. For
example, if your employee is working with fire, you can enter the timing of pre-work to alert the
employee that they should wear fire-resistant clothing before beginning the task.
7 Sequence—Enter the sequence number which is used to identify the order in which your employee
should be made aware of the precaution. All precautions are important regardless of the sequence
number entered.
8 Delete Pending—Select to delete the pending safety record during the next review.
9 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
• the PM equipment's period UOM and type match the period UOM and type of the work package
header
• PM equipment Perform Every and Perform On match the work package header
• the PM equipment is not currently assigned to another PM work package
• the PM equipment record is not locked by a scheduling or forecasting session
• If DEPTSEC=ON, the system displays equipment records if the department of the equipment
has corresponding records on the Department Security tab of the logged in user and is not marked
read-only
• the PM equipment is a child or grandchild of the parent equipment on the work package header
5 Click Submit.
Note: To remove equipment from the PM work package, select the equipment to remove, and then
click Remove Equipment.
• Underscore—Select to display the text value for Perform On Day as Underscore type.
• Italics —Select to display the text value for Perform On Day as Italics type.
40 Maximum Rows per Page—Enter the maximum number of rows of equipment to display on the
Forecasting page.
Note: The system defaults 20 rows per page as the maximum. Entering a value greater than 20
may cause the system to delay the performance.
41 Prevent Separation Greater than 1 Period Between Forecast Start Date and new PM Due
Dates—Select to prevent the due date from being greater than 1 frequency after the forecasted
start date.
42 Prevent new PM Due Dates prior to Forecast Start Date—Select to prevent new PM due dates
prior to the forecasted start date when no work orders exist for the PM. If a work order exists for the
PM the system prevents the separation between the work order and the first PM due date from
exceeding the frequency.
43 Allow Session Approval with Active Warnings—Select to allow the system to approve sessions
with active warnings.
44 Click Process. The system displays the Preview page listing all of the equipment for which to
forecast PMs.
The system automatically populates Session ID for new sessions.
Note: When Process is clicked, the system protects the fields and does not allow editing of these
values for the current session.
When Process is clicked, the system only considers the Equipment parameters, work order
organization, and the Include Children checkbox to present equipment on the Preview page. The
remaining parameters are not considered when building the Preview list.
Understanding PM forecasting
Forecast preventive maintenance for equipment beyond creating PM work orders. Define parameters
to gather a group of selected equipment for which to forecast preventive maintenance. Forecasting
PMs allows you to view the preventive maintenance on equipment for a selected period of time as
much as one year in advance. Adjust the due dates for preventive maintenance as necessary to balance
the resource workload.
Note: Due dates can only be updated for forecasted PMs. For existing PM work orders, the due date
cannot be changed.
The system will not forecast preventive maintenance for equipment used in a PM work package.
The system supports only frequency-based PMs on the PM Forecasting form. Meter-based PMs are
not supported.
The system supports only duplicate PMs on the PM Forecasting form. Fixed and variable PMs are
not supported.
40 Maximum Rows per Page—Enter the maximum number of rows of equipment to display on the
Forecasting page.
Note: The system defaults 20 rows per page as the maximum. Entering a value greater than 20
may cause the system to delay the performance.
41 Prevent Separation Greater than 1 Period Between Forecast Start Date and new PM Due
Dates—Select to prevent the due date from being greater than 1 frequency after the forecasted
start date.
42 Prevent new PM Due Dates prior to Forecast Start Date—Select to prevent new PM due dates
prior to the forecasted start date when no work orders exist for the PM. If a work order exists for the
PM the system prevents the separation between the work order and the first PM due date from
exceeding the frequency.
43 Allow Session Approval with Active Warnings—Select to allow the system to approve sessions
with active warnings.
44 Click Process. The system displays the Preview page listing all of the equipment for which to
forecast PMs.
The system automatically populates Session ID for new sessions.
Note: When Process is clicked, the system protects the fields and does not allow editing of these
values for the current session.
When Process is clicked, the system only considers the Equipment parameters, work order
organization, and the Include Children checkbox to present equipment on the Preview page. The
remaining parameters are not considered when building the Preview list.
Forecasting PMs
View and adjust the due dates for selected equipment in a forecasted PM session to balance the PM
workload. Drag and drop dates as necessary to change due dates and balance the workload.
Note: The system displays existing PM work orders with a Released or Completed status on this form;
however, their due dates cannot be changed.
To forecast PM's:
• For an existing session—Enter the Session ID. The system automatically populates the
parameters for the existing session. Click the Forecasting tab.
3 Select the equipment for which to forecast PMs on the Preview page, and then click the Forecasting
tab, or click Start PM Forecasting on the Preview page. Drag and drop date cells as necessary
to change due dates and balance the workload.
Note: The system locks all PM equipment records related to the selected equipment and PMs. The
system does not allow changes to the PM equipment record or PM generation until after the
forecasting session is Approved or Cancelled. The system displays the Session ID responsible
for locking the record on the PM equipment record.
To cancel the forecasting session, click Cancel Session.
If a PM is brought into the session via parameters selected and the PM equipment is selected on
the Preview page, the system automatically includes all PMs in the nest regardless of whether or
not the other PMs in the nest meet the selected criteria.
All PMs in a nest for specific equipment are represented by a single row on the Forecasting page,
i.e. all frequencies in the nest are represented on the calendar portion of the row. Otherwise a row
represents a unique PM and equipment.
Cancel Session Delete and cancel a session The system cancels the session,
and then displays the Parame-
ters page. The system deletes
the Session ID.
Previous Month View the same day of the previ- The system displays the same
ous month day of the previous month. If the
same day does not exist in the
previous month, the system dis-
plays the last day in the previous
month.
Next Month View the same day of the next The system displays the same
month day of the subsequent month. If
the same day does not exist in
the subsequent month, the sys-
tem displays the last day of the
next month.
There are several right-click options available for PM equipment. To view and choose the options,
right-click on the PM equipment record, and then select the appropriate right-click option.
See the following table for the available right-click options:
Validate Record Validate a single record in a ses- If the validation fails, the system
sion displays the failures in the Valida-
tion Warnings popup.
There are numerous right-click options available on a calendar grid cell. To view and choose the options,
right-click on the calendar grid cell, and then select the appropriate right-click option.
See the following table for the available right-click options:
• Group by Week—Select to group the defined date range by weeks. The system displays the
time period in weeks. The system calculates Estimated Hours, Resource Day Requirements,
and Total Resource Day Requirements by this selection.
• Group by Month—Select to group the defined date range by month. The system displays the
date range records until the End Date is the same as Group End Date.
Note: The system calculates Resource Days Required as:
Resource Days Required = Estimated Hours ∕ Work Hours per Day
The system calculates Resource Days Required as the number of person-days required for the
trade for the defined date range.
7 View the current resource load. Modify the PM due dates in the underlying PM forecasting session.
8 Click Refresh Resource Data.
The system automatically populates Date Last Refreshed and refreshes the data on the popup
based on the current PM forecasting session
9 Click Close.
Note: The system does not automatically display the changes to the PM forecasting session made
while the View Resource Load popup is open. To view the changes made in the grid, click Refresh
Resource Data.
The system recalculates the next due date for a variable PM falling within a dormant period by assigning
the new due date as the next day following the specified Dormant End date for the equipment associated
with the PM.
Note: Adding a dormant period to PM equipment does not affect any previously created or released
PM work orders.
If you choose to release duplicate PMs, the system searches for any PMs that meet the parameter
criteria. If Perform On is specified for the PM equipment record, the system automatically adjusts the
calculated Due Date based on Perform On. Within the month in which the normally calculated Due
Date falls, the system sets to the week of the month and day of the week defined by Perform On for
the PM equipment record.
The Preview page allows you to preview all of the work orders selected for processing based on the
selection parameters, enabling you to select or unselect work orders to include in the batch generation
process before you actually process the work order batch. You can select or unselect individual work
orders for processing, or you can select or unselect all work orders for processing.
To generate work orders:
18 Generate WOs for Duplicate PMs—Select to create PM work orders that are of the type Duplicate
when processing the work order batch. The system automatically assigns the status entered
for the PPMSTAT installation parameter to the PM work orders created during the batch
process and then releases the work order’s status to the status specified in the WORKWOST
installation parameter.
Note: The system does not generate work orders for PMs locked by a PM forecasting session.
19 Generate WOs for Repairable Cores—Select to create work orders for repairable core parts to
be repaired internally. The system enables Store and it is required. The system populates Store
Org. based on the selected Store. See "Generating work orders for repairable core parts" on page
467
20 Include Child Equipment—Select to generate work orders for any child equipment of the selected
Equipment when processing the work order batch.
21 Release Other WOs—Select to update other existing work orders that have the specified Current
WO Status. The system enables Current WO Status, and it is required.
22 Current WO Status—Enter the current work order status for which to update existing work orders.
If you selected Release Other WOs and entered a Current WO Status, upon initiation of the work
order generation process, the system locates and updates all existing work orders that have the
specified Current WO Status and updates the status of the work orders to the value specified in
the WORKWOST installation parameter.
23 Print Summary Report—Select to generate a summary report of all the generated work orders
after the batch generation process is complete.
24 Print Work Orders—Select to print work order cards for the work orders created/updated when
processing the work order batch.
25 Click Process. The system displays the Preview page listing all of the work orders meeting the
selection criteria.
The Preview page retains the settings for Print Work Orders from the Parameters page. You can
select or unselect Print Work Orders as necessary.
26 Select—Select each work order you wish to generate in the work order batch as necessary, or you
can unselect each work order you do not wish to generate in the work order batch as necessary.
Note: To select all the work orders at once, check Select. To unselect all the work orders at once,
uncheck Select.
The system does not display MEC work orders on the Preview page. However, the MEC work
orders are generated/released when the parent multiple equipment work order is generated or
released.
27 Click Generate. The system generates the work order for the selected records. If any errors occur,
then the system changes the record’s visual attribute to red and displays an error message in the
Error Message column of the Preview list.
The system automatically copies From Point, unit of measure, Ref. Description, and Geographical
Ref. and To Point, unit of measure, Ref. Description, and Geographical Ref. to work orders that
are released for linear equipment PMs.
Note: If you have set up the system to require an electronic signature to authorize status changes
to work order headers, the system displays the eSignature popup once for every work order in the
work order batch for which there is a status change. See "Creating electronic records and signatures"
for more information about signing electronic records.
5 Print Summary Report—Select to generate a summary report of all the generated work orders
after the batch generation process is complete.
6 Print Work Orders—Select to print work order cards for the work orders created/updated when
processing the work order batch.
7 Generate WOs for Repairable Cores—Select to create work orders for repairable core parts to
be repaired internally. The system enables Store and it is required. The system populates Store
Org. based on the selected Store.
8 Click Process. The system displays the Preview page listing all of the work orders meeting the
selection criteria.
The Preview page retains the settings for Print Work Orders from the Parameters page. You can
select or unselect Print Work Orders as necessary.
9 Select—Select each work order you wish to generate in the work order batch as necessary.
Note: To select all the work orders at once, check Select. To unselect all the work orders at once,
uncheck Select.
10 Click Generate. The system generates the work order for the selected records. If any errors occur,
then the system changes the record’s visual attribute to red and displays an error message in the
Error Message column of the Preview list.
Note: If you set up the system to require an electronic signature to authorize status changes to
work order headers, the system displays the eSignature popup once for every work order in the
work order batch for which there is a status change.
See the following processing rules when generating work orders for repairable spare parts.
• If you selected Use Stock Method for a part on the Repair Details tab of the Parts form, the
system calculates the Qty. to Repair based on the stock replenishment method specified for the
part in the holding store. For example, you create a part OOV-REX-TRA-25G for which Min/Max
is the Stock Method with a Minimum Qty. of 5 and a Maximum Qty. of 10. The current Qty.
on Hand of OOV-REX-TRA-25G is 4 and the stock Qty. for Repairis 9. When you generate an
internal repair work order for the part, the system calculates the Qty. to Repair on the work order
as 6 parts rather than 9 to update the Qty. on Hand of the part in stock to the specified maximum
of 10.
• If you do not select Use Stock Method for a part on the Repair Details tab of the Parts form,
the system automatically generates the work order for the full Qty. for Repair on the Repair
Details tab of the Parts form.
• If you do not select Auto Assign on the Repair Details tab of the Parts form, the system
automatically generates the work order for a Qty. Assigned of 0, and you must use the Assign
Repair Details popup on the work order to make assignments.
Scheduling work
View the current work order schedule, calculate labor availability, and view labor utilization. Schedule
unscheduled or backlogged work orders. Reschedule work orders as necessary. Additionally, you can
view work order comments, change the work order status, and freeze or unfreeze activity schedules.
You may balance the workload on the WO Load Balancing form.
View Procedure
Daily schedule Select from the calendar the day for which to
view the schedule. The system displays the daily
schedule in the top portion of the form.
Unscheduled work orders Select Unscheduled WOs for Dataspy in the
Activities section of the form.
Backlogged work orders Select Backlogged WOs for Dataspy in the Ac-
tivities section of the form.
You may also calculate labor availability on the Record View page of the Employees form.
Note: Infor strongly recommends that you calculate labor availabilities before scheduling work orders
in the system.
To calculate labor availability:
6 Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date of the period for which to
calculate available labor.
Note: End Date must be later than or equal to Start Date.
7 Click Calculate.
8 Click Close.
Color Significance
Gray Non-working day for the organization or no labor
scheduled for this day.
Green Total scheduled hours are less than total avail-
able hours, and labor utilization is less than 80%.
Yellow Total scheduled hours are between 80% and
100% of total available hours.
Red Total scheduled hours exceed the total available
hours.
Function Procedure
Schedule unscheduled work orders Select Unscheduled WOs for Dataspy in the
Activities section of the form, and then select a
work order from the list and drag it to the day on
the calendar for which to schedule it. The system
creates a new work order schedule record.
Schedule backlogged work orders Select Backlogged WOs for Dataspy in the Ac-
tivities section of the form, and then select a
work order from the list and drag it to the day on
Function Procedure
the calendar for which to schedule it. The system
creates a new work order schedule record.
Reschedule work orders Select the work order to reschedule in the Daily
Schedule list, and then drag it to the day on the
calendar for which to reschedule it. You must
select either today’s date or a future date as the
reschedule date on the calendar.
Note: To delete an existing work order schedule, select the work order schedule to delete in the
Daily Schedule list, and then click Delete Schedule. You may not delete work order schedules that
are set in the past.
4 Click Close.
Note: You may only select a New Status with a system status of R.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can enter wildcards for the Department, PM Schedule, Project Budget, WO Type,
Priority, Trade, Status, Reported By, Work Order, Assigned To, and Assigned By parameters.
Enter the first character of the parameter followed by a percentage sign, and then click Process.
For example, if you enter E% for Trade, the system retrieves all work orders with a trade that begin
with the letter "E" on the Preview tab.
4 Schedule Window (Days)—Enter the number of days into the future for which to calculate labor
availability.
5 Sort By—Select whether to sort by Reported Date or by Scheduled Start Date.
6 Click Process.
7 Select—Select each work order you wish to balance, or you can unselect each work order you do
not wish to balance as necessary.
Note: To select all the work orders at once, check Select. To unselect all the work orders at once,
uncheck Select.
Completing work
This section describes the process for completing work information. You may close work orders on the
Closing page or on the Work Order Quick Close form. Depending on your particular system parameter
configuration, you may or may not be able to complete transactions for the closed work order. Also, in
certain cases, you may not be able to close work orders if there are still purchases outstanding. Reopen
closed work orders if necessary.
The system automatically populates Equipment, the equipment description, and the Downtime
Cost currency.
3 Status—Select Completed as the status of the work order.
Note: If you close a work order that is a template standard work order and that has children attached,
the system recalculates and updates the status of all child work orders attached. If you close the
last child work order in a sequence, the system recalculates the requested start and end dates for
all child work orders.
Depending on your system configuration, you may not be able to close a parent work order until all
dependent child work orders have been closed. Contact your system administrator for more
information.
You can reopen a work order after it is closed if the REOPENPM installation parameter is set to
YES and you have the proper status authorization to do so. However re-opening a parent work order
does not affect any child work orders of the parent work order regardless of whether the child work
order is dependent on the parent or the setting of the EVTCASCD installation parameter.
If the work order is a multiple equipment work order, then the system updates the Status of all MEC
work orders associated with the work order to the Status of the parent work order.
4 Equipment—Enter the equipment on which the work was performed.
Note: If the equipment record was previously flagged as Prevent WO Completion, you will not be
able to close the work order.
5 Start Date—Enter the date on which the work started.
6 Date Completed—Enter the date on which the work was completed.
Note: When closing a multiple equipment work order, the system copies the Date Completed to
any open MEC work orders associated with the parent multiple equipment work order and overwrites
the existing Date Completed on the MEC work orders. However, the system does not overwrite
the Date Completed on any MEC work orders that were completed prior to closing parent multiple
equipment work order.
7 Downtime Cost—Enter the cost of the downtime to the production process.
8 Downtime Hours—Enter the number of hours that the equipment was down.
9 Problem Code—Enter the code of the problem that required work.
10 Failure Code—Enter the reason that the equipment or component failed.
11 Cause Code—Enter the problem cause code, i.e., the root cause of the problem.
12 Action Code—Enter the code of the action taken to correct the problem.
Note: If the work order is a multiple equipment work order and you modify the Problem Code,
Failure Code, Cause Code, and/or Action Code, the system cascades the change to the
corresponding codes on any MEC work orders that are not completed, overwriting any existing
values.
13 Click Save Record.
Note: Click Add Comment to enter closing comments.
5 Start Date—Enter the date and time on which the work started.
6 Date Completed—Enter the date on which the work was completed.
7 Downtime Cost—Enter the cost of the downtime to the production process.
8 Downtime Hours—Enter the number of hours that the equipment was down.
9 Problem Code—Enter the code of the problem that required work.
10 Failure Code—Enter the reason that the equipment or component failed.
11 Cause Code—Enter problem cause code, i.e., the root cause of the problem.
12 Action Code—Enter the action taken to correct the problem.
13 Closing Comments—Enter closing comments about the work order.
Complete the following steps to book additional hours to the work order.
14 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for which to book labor hours.
Note: When you select an Activity-Trade, the system temporarily protects Work Order to prevent
an accidental change during the process of booking hours. However, upon saving the booked hours
or clicking Clear, the system enables Work Order and clears the Activity-Trade. However, if you
manually clear Activity-Trade, Work Order remains protected.
If the selected Work Order is a multiple equipment work order, then the system enables Equipment
in the details section of the form, and it is required. If you clear Activity-Trade for a multiple equipment
work order, the system also clears the Equipment, Equipment Org., and Related Work Order.
15 Employee—Enter the personnel performing the work for which to book hours.
16 Date—Enter the date on which the work was performed.
17 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter All Equipment to evenly distribute the booked labor to each equipment record on the work
order. Upon saving the transaction, the system creates the labor booking records and applies
them to each related work order for each equipment and selected activity. The Rate applicable
to the multiple equipment work order will also be applied to all MEC work orders.
Note: The system automatically applies any remainder of the Hours Worked to the last equipment
record added to the work order.
If you select All Equipment for Equipment and at least one of the related work orders has
Completed status (or equivalent user status), the system displays a message enabling you to
select whether to distribute the labor hours against only open related work orders or against all
equipment.
Also, the system disregards the setting of the COMDAYS installation parameter when posting
labor booking transactions if you select All Equipment.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to apply the booked labor to the work order header only.
• Enter a specific Equipment record to apply the booked labor to the selected Equipment and
the corresponding Related Work Order. The system automatically populates Equipment Org.
and Related Work Order from the selected Equipment record.
See "Adding equipment to work orders to split work order costs" on page 398.
18 Type of Hours—Select the type of hours worked (e.g., hourly rate, overtime rate, corrective booking,
etc.).
19 Hours—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work.
20 End Time—Enter the scheduled start time and end time of the work order activity.
21 Click Save Hours.
22 Repeat these steps as necessary to book any additional hours against the work order activity.
23 Click Save Record.
Approving revisions
View revision approval records for various entities (PMs, tasks, material lists, and routes) and approve
revisions when necessary.
To approve revisions:
Rejecting revisions
To reject revisions:
Viewing approvers
Access the Approvers page of the Revision Control Approvals form to view approvers for the selected
revision.
To view approvers:
Creating customers
To create customers:
13 Allow Service Request Creation—Select to indicate that the caller may create new service requests.
14 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a caller, select the caller to delete, and then click Delete Caller.
2 Select the employee for whom to associate properties, and then click the Properties tab.
3 Click Add Property.
4 Property—Enter the property with which to associate the employee.
5 Click Submit.
Note: To remove a property, select the property to remove, and then click Remove Property.
9 Billable—Select to indicate that this service code is billable on a service request. If selected, the
system also marks the service request as Billable on the Closing tab of the Service Requests
form.
10 Std. Response Time—Enter, in minutes, the standard response time of the service code to use as
a benchmark for evaluating response times to service requests that reference this service code.
11 Estimated Cost—Enter the estimated cost of the service code.
12 Priority—Enter the priority level of the service code.
13 Click Save Record.
• Edit existing caller details and save the changes to this caller record—Modify the information as
necessary, and then click Save Changes. The system permanently saves the changes to the
caller record.
Note: If an ID is listed on the existing record, you must change theID before clicking Save as New.
Click Cancel to close the Add/Edit Caller popup without saving changes.
Click Reset to clear all data on the Add/Edit Caller popup.
4 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade to which to assign personnel. The system changes the
value of Trade Filter to the trade of the selected activity and populates the People Available list
with all personnel assigned to the trade.
Note: Select ALL TRADES from Trade Filter to display all available personnel associated with the
property.
Select ALL PEOPLE from Trade Filter to display all available personnel.
5 Trade Filter—Select the name of the person to whom to assign the work in the People Available
list, and then click >. The system assigns the person to the highlighted work order activity, removes
their name from the People Available list, and displays their name in the People Assigned list. Repeat
this process to add as many people to the activity as necessary.
Note: To clear a person from the People Assigned list, select the name and then click <. The system
moves their name from the People Assigned list to the People Available list.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select additional activities and assign personnel as necessary.
7 Click Submit.
Note: Click Cancel to close the Assign Personnel to Service Request popup. Clicking Cancel does
not cancel the personnel assignments already submitted on the popup.
4 Status—Select Closed.
5 Billable—Select whether the service request is billable.
6 Click Save Record.
Note: Click Add Comment to enter completion comments as necessary. See "Entering comments"
on page 60.
2 Select the request for which to book hours, and then click the Book Hours tab.
3 Click Add Labor.
4 Person—Enter the person performing the work for the service request.
5 Department—Enter the department where the work for the service request was performed.
6 Trade—Enter the trade that performed the work.
7 Date Worked—Enter the date on which the work was performed for the service request.
8 Type of Hours—Select the type of hours worked (e.g., normal rate, overtime rate, etc.).
9 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work for the service request.
Note: To quickly enter information when booking hours for a service request, click the row containing
the personnel assignment for which to book hours. The system automatically populates the Person,
Date Worked, and Activity-Trade. Modify the information as necessary.
10 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for the service request.
11 Rate—Enter or modify the hourly pay rate for the employee or trade performing the work. If you
defined a trade rate for the select employee or trade, the system automatically populates Rate with
the appropriate hourly rate.
If you defined a trade rate for the selected Employee, the system populates Rate with the employee
trade rate. However, if you did not define trade rates for the selected Employee, the system populates
Rate with the trade rate defined for the selected Trade.
12 Click Submit.
13 Repeat these steps as necessary to book any additional hours against the work order activity for
the service request.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition.
6 Activity-Trade—Enter the activity-trade performing the work for the selected service request.
7 Store—Enter the store from which to issue parts. The system automatically populates Available
with the quantity of the part available in the selected store for the work order activity after you have
entered Part, Activity-Trade, and Store.
8 Transaction Type—Select Issue.
Tool Hours is protected because the Transaction Type is Issue.
9 Date—Enter the desired date of the transaction.
10 Quantity—Enter the number of parts to issue to the work order. The number must be greater than
zero.
Note: If the part is tracked by asset, the Quantity must be equal to 1.
4 Part—Enter the part to return. The system populates the part description, UOM, and Part Org. The
system automatically populates the part description, UOM, and Part Org. The system selects Track
By Asset and/or Track By Lot if the part is tracked by asset and/or lot and they are protected.
Note: If you are updating a part to return on the service request and you select a part from the Parts
list, the system displays the quantity of the part planned to be used for the service request in Planned
Qty. and the quantity of the part used to date for the service request in Used.
5 Condition—Enter the condition if the part is a condition tracked parent part. If the selected part is
a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate Condition. When returning a
condition tracked part, the condition in which the part is being returned must be entered in the return
condition field.
6 Activity-Trade—Enter the activity-trade performing the work for the selected service request. The
system automatically populates Available with the quantity of the part available in the selected store
for the work order activity.
7 Store—Enter the store to which to return parts.
8 Transaction Type—Select Return.
Note: If you select Return as the Transaction Type for a core tracked part, the system automatically
enables Core Return. You can select Core Return to indicate that the part needs repair. If Core
Return is selected, the system adds the quantity of the part to return to the Core Qty. in the store
to which the part is returned.
If RTNANY is set to NO, you can only return the quantity of the part that was originally issued to
that entity to the same store. When issuing a part, you issue to an entity (work order, equipment,
etc.) from a store. When returning a part, you return from an entity (work order, equipment, etc.) to
a store. Regardless of the setting of the RTNANY installation parameter, you cannot return a greater
quantity of a part tracked by lot than the quantity of the part that has been used to date for the work
order.
open and associated with an open work order to which personnel is assigned. Closing a service request
also closes the work order to which it is associated. You must have sufficient system privileges to close
both the service request and work order.
Note: All hours booked for a service request are recorded on the work order associated with the service
request.
To book hours and close service requests:
4 Status—Select Closed.
5 Billable—Select whether the service request is billable.
6 Comments—Enter completion comments as necessary.
7 Click Add Labor.
8 Activity-Trade—Select the activity-trade performing the work for the service request.
9 Person—Enter the person performing the work for the service request.
10 Date Worked—Enter the date on which the work was performed for the service request.
11 Hours Worked—Enter the number of hours spent performing the work for the service request.
12 Click Submit.
13 Repeat these steps as necessary to book any additional hours against the work order activity for
the service request.
14 Click Save Record.
Creating PM plans
Create and update PM plans to create PM schedules or add equipment to multiple PM schedules at
once. A PM schedule is a predefined set of preventive maintenance details to be performed on a defined
interval for equipment. PM plans enable you to quickly enter and update groups of PM schedules.
For example, you have three different PM schedules for car repairs that include: one for tire rotation,
one for oil change, and another for brake adjustments. Create a PM plan and add the three car repair
PM schedules to it. You then add 30 cars as equipment on the PM plan, which are then added to the
three PM schedules in one click via the PM plan. PM plans and PM schedules are related to one another
only by the list of equipment they share.
Note: You can view PM plans and schedules created on the PM Plans form on the PM Schedules
form.
The PM plan functionality is not available when the PMRVCTRL installation parameter is set to Yes.
4 PM Plan—Enter a unique code identifying the PM plan, and then enter a description in the adjacent
field.
5 Class—Enter the class of the PM plan. The classes shown belong to the PM Plan entity.
The system automatically populates Class Org.
6 Equipment Class—Enter the class of the equipment. If you select an equipment class, the system
restricts attaching PM equipment associated with other classes to the PM plan.
The system automatically populates Equipment Class Org.
7 Click Save Record.
Copying PM plans
Copy PM plans to quickly create a new PM plan by copying information from an existing PM plan to a
new plan.
To copy PM plans:
• Create and associate a new PM—Click Add PM Schedule. Enter a unique code identifying the
new PM Schedule, and then enter a description in the adjacent field.
11 Perform On—Enter the week of the month and the day of the week on which to perform the work
on the equipment, e.g., 2 and Tuesday of the month due. Select Last to handle scenarios in which
there are five weeks in a month. The system sets the due date to the last week of the month.
12 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a PM schedule, select the PM schedule record to delete, and then click Remove
PM Schedule.
If the PM schedule to delete has equipment, the system displays a message enabling you to indicate
whether to remove all of the equipment from the PM schedule.
If you click No, the system does not remove the equipment from the PM schedule but deletes the
PM schedule from the PM plan, clears the PM plan activities for the PM schedule, clears the PM
plan on the PM schedule record, and deletes all work orders for the PM schedule with a status of
Awaiting Release.
If you click Yes, the system removes the equipment from the PM schedule. If Work Package is not
selected, the system removes the PM schedule from the PM plan, clears the PM plan activities for
the PM schedule, clears the PM plan on the PM schedule record, deletes all work orders for the PM
schedule with a status of Awaiting Release, and removes the equipment from the PM schedule if
all of the PM work orders have a status of Complete or Awaiting Release. If any of the PM work
orders for the PM schedule have a status other than Complete or Awaiting Release, the system
populates Date Deactivated for the equipment on the Equipment page of the PM Schedules form
instead of removing the equipment from the PM. If the PM plan has only one PM schedule, the
system removes the equipment from the PM plan.
If Work Package is selected, the system also removes the equipment from the work package
associated with the PM schedule.
5 Click Save. The system moves the activity and updates the PM schedule records on both the PM
Plans and PM Schedulesforms.
4 Click Submit. The system updates the Equipment list and populates PM Plan on the Equipment
page of the PM Schedules form.
Add additional equipment to the PM plan as necessary.
Note: To remove equipment, select the equipment to remove, and then click Remove Equipment.
If Work Package is selected for the PM schedule(s) on the PM plan and there are work orders with
a status of Completed or Awaiting Execution, the system deletes the PM work orders with Awaiting
Execution status, makes no changes to completed work orders, deletes the equipment from all of
the associated PM schedules, and detaches the PM schedule(s) from the work package.
If any of the PM work orders for the PM schedule have a status other than Complete or Awaiting
Release, the system populates Date Deactivated for the equipment on the Equipment page of the
PM Schedules form instead of removing the equipment from the PM.
Managing fuel
Manage fuel by tracking fuel issues and receipts. Associate fuel types to depots, tanks, and pumps.
View fuel transactions.
Creating fuels
Enter the different types of fuel and fuel mixes to issue to vehicles or equipment.
To create fuel:
10 Out of Service—Select to indicate the fuel is no longer in service. If you select Out of Service the
system retains the fuel record, but it will no longer appear in the lookups for fuels on other forms.
11 Fuel 1—Enter fuel type 1.
12 Blend % 1—Enter the percentage of blended grade 1.
13 Fuel 2—Enter fuel type 2.
14 Blend % 2—Enter the percentage of blended grade 2.
15 Fuel 3—Enter fuel type 3.
16 Blend % 3—Enter the percentage of blended grade 3.
17 Fuel 4—Enter fuel type 4.
18 Blend % 4—Enter the percentage of blended grade 4.
19 Fuel 5—Enter fuel type 5.
20 Blend % 5—Enter the percentage of blended grade 5.
21 Click Save Record.
Creating depots
Create depots to specify storage areas for fuel.
To create depots:
Issuing fuel
Issue fuel to vehicles or equipment, and then track the quantity and price of fuel issued.
To issue fuel:
2 Select or create the fuel physical inventory for which to record tank volumes, and then click the
Tanks tab.
The system automatically populates Line, Tank, Description, Fuel, Expected Volume, Expected
Volume UOM, and Physical Volume UOM.
3 Physical Volume—Enter the actual volume of the tank for the selected fuel physical inventory
record.
4 Click Submit.
Note: The system will copy the VMRS-related information you enter on this form to the work order
to which the deferred maintenance is assigned.
13 Reason For Repair—Enter the reason the vehicle needs repair (Code Key 14).
14 Work Accomplished—Enter the work performed on the vehicle (Code Key 15).
15 Technician Part Failure—Enter the reason the technician or supplier thinks the vehicle failed (Code
Key 18).
16 Manufacturer—Enter the Manufacturer/Supplier Code (Code Key 34) to associate with the vehicle.
17 System Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the system, e.g., brakes, frame, suspension,
needing repair (Code Key 31).
18 Assembly Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the subsystem needing repair (Code Key 32).
The values available are based on the system-level code.
19 Component Level—Enter the VMRS code identifying the specific component or part needing repair
(Code Key 33). The values available are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code.
20 Hired Labor—Select to indicate that the deferred maintenance will be completed by an external
source.
21 Labor Type—Select the type of labor needed if you selected Hired Labor.
22 Supplier—Enter the supplier for the deferred maintenance.
The system automatically populates Supplier Org.
23 Activity Comments—Enter comments or instructions for the deferred maintenance.
24 Work Order—Enter when ready to assign the deferred maintenance to a new work order.
25 Click Save Record.
The system automatically populates Deferred Date.
8 Perform After—Enter a numerical value for the period interval, and then select a value for the
perform after UOM to flag the system to schedule work orders based on dates. For example, enter
5 for Perform After and Months for perform after UOM, which flags the system to perform the work
(or release work orders associated to the maintenance pattern) after a 5 month interval.
Note: You may select to flag the system to schedule work orders based on an interval time period
or a meter reading interval. If you selected a value in Perform After you chose to flag the system
to perform the work on an interval time period. If you prefer to flag the system to perform the work
on a meter reading interval, leave Perform After blank and enter a value for Meter #1 Interval.
9 Meter #1 Interval—Select to flag the system to schedule the work orders (or release work orders
associated to the maintenance pattern) based on meter readings.
The system automatically populates Meter #1 UOM.
10 Meter #2 Interval—Select to flag the system to schedule the work orders (or release work orders
associated to the maintenance Meter #2 Interval pattern) based on meter readings.
The system automatically populates Meter #2 UOM.
11 Ok Window—Enter the value to use for the Ok window.
12 Near Window—Enter the value to use for the near window.
13 Release Window—Enter the value to use for the release window.
14 Click Submit.
Associate equipment to a maintenance pattern so that the system may create a work order for the
associated equipment. Activate maintenance patterns with initial sequences and associated equipment
to start the process of creating maintenance pattern work orders. Deactivate maintenance patterns to
stop a maintenance pattern for the selected pieces of equipment.
On the Parameters page, define the selection criteria for locating work orders, activities, employees,
and equipment to display on the Equipment, WO Activity, and Employee Preview tabs.
To define parameters for work order daily scheduling:
60 Over Scheduled (% Scheduled > 100) Color—Enter the color to designate the over scheduled
days on the calendar view.
61 Generate Availability Through—Enter the date through which to generate scheduling availability.
62 Click Create/Refresh Previews. The system displays the Equipment Preview page listing all of the
equipment for which to schedule work orders.
The system automatically populates Session ID for new sessions.
4 Select—Select the equipment for which to perform work order daily scheduling, and then choose
one of the following options:
• To preview and select work order activities for work order daily scheduling, click the WO Activity
Preview tab.
• To start labor scheduling, click Start Labor Scheduling.
4 Select—Select the work order and activities for which to perform work order daily scheduling, and
then choose one of the following options:
• To preview and select employees for work order daily scheduling, click Employee Preview.
• To preview and select equipment for work order daily scheduling, click the Equipment Preview
tab.
• To start labor scheduling, click Start Labor Scheduling.
6 Drag and drop work order activities to selected employee calendar days. The system creates the
appropriate labor schedule record.
Note: Drag more than one work order activity at a time to an employee calendar day. The system
creates a labor schedule record for each work order activity for the employee calendar day.
Drag one employee calendar day to another calendar day for same employee, e.g., drag Wednesday
to Friday. The system updates the scheduled date for each labor schedule record(s) on the dragged
employee calendar day.
Drag one employee calendar day to another employee calendar day. The system deletes the labor
schedule record(s) on the dragged employee calendar day and creates the necessary labor schedule
records on the dropped employee calendar day.
See the following table for more options on work order daily scheduling sessions:
1 Click WO Details.
2 New Work Order Status—Select the new work order status.
3 Hours Remaining to be Worked—Enter or modify the hours remaining to be worked for the activity.
4 Completed—Select if the work for the activity has been completed.
5 Click Submit.
1 Select a work order activity, and then click View Planned Part Availability.
2 Store—Enter a different store for which to view part availability information as necessary. The
system updates the Planned Part Availability list. The system displays availability in the default
Store for the work order Department when the popup opens.
3 Click Close.
1 Select a work order activity, and then click View Activity Booked Labor.
2 View the information.
3 Click Close.
Defining adjustments
Define adjustments to apply to customer contracts and rental agreements to quickly identify extra
charges or discounts for the contract. An adjustment could be an extra charge for damaged equipment
or a late return of a rented vehicle.
Similarly you may also define discounts or credits on the Adjustments form by entering a negative rate
for the adjustment.
When defining adjustments on this form, associate a standard work order to the adjustment to enable
users to create a work order from an adjustment for the customer contract or rental contract, if required.
To define adjustments:
4 Department—Enter the department of the work orders to include on the invoice. The system
automatically populates the department description in the adjacent field.
5 WO Class—Enter the class of the work orders to include on the invoice. The system automatically
populates WO Class Org. and the work order class description in the adjacent field.
6 WO Type—Enter the type of the work orders to include on the invoice. Select to include Breakdown,
Preventive Maintenance, Default work order type, Calibration, Direct Issue, Repairable Spare,
Standard WO, or Scheduled work order types on the invoice.
7 Grouping—Enter a unique name to identify the grouping of selected work order types. The system
references the group on the invoice for easy identification.
Note: The system allows more than one grouping for the same work order type. If more than one
grouping is found for the same work order type, the system selects the first grouping for reference
on the invoice.
8 Click Submit.
Sequence
Enter the sequence number for the clause.
5 Click Submit.
associated to any of the entities. So a sales price for a bearing can be overwritten on contract level if
desired and this price will then be invoiced, otherwise the system uses the standard sales price of the
bearing defined on the Parts form.
To associate sales prices with contract templates:
6 Charge Level—Select the level for the charges. Select Subcategory Adjustment or Charge
Category Adjustment.
7 Charge Subcategory—Select the subcategory of the charges for this template based on the Charge
Category previously selected. For example, for Fuel Charges, select from Diesel, Premium, any
other fuels you defined, or All Fuels.
Note: For Fuel Charges define fuels in the fuel management area; for Energy Charges define
commodities on the Commodities form; for Usage Charges define subcategories on system codes
entity CCOC; and for one One Time Charges define subcategories on the system entity CCOC.
27 Click Submit.
25 Rounding Hours—Select hourly rounding options for the contract. Round the hours of the contract
up 15 minutes, down 15 minutes, up 30 minutes, down 30 minutes, or elect not to round the contract
hours.
26 Rounding Days—Select daily rounding options for the contract. Round the days of the contract up,
down, or elect not to round the contract days.
27 Hourly Invoicing Start Time—Enter the time in hours and minutes (ex. 3:00) that the system will
begin to invoice the customer for the contract work.
28 Hourly Invoicing End Time—Enter the time in hours and minutes (ex. 23:00) that the system will
stop invoicing the customer for the contract work.
29 Click Save Record.
The system automatically populates Last Invoice Date, Last Invoice, Amount Invoiced, Revision,
Requested By, Date Requested, Approved By, Date Approved, and Revision Reason.
Note: Click Create New Revision to create a new revision of the contract from any previous revision
of the contract when the previous revision has a system status other than Unfinished or Request
Approval.
Click Copy Contract to copy the header details and child records of the customer contract. See
"Copying customer contracts" on page 538.
Click Reset Contract Charge Definitions to reset manual changes applied to the charge definitions
for this contract.
Note: Use this feature to define charge definitions specifically for this contract item if they are
different from the other contract items.
4 Minimum Value—Enter the minimum charge value for which the discount should apply, and then
enter the currency in the adjacent field.
5 Discount %—Enter the discount percentage to apply once the minimum value threshold is met.
6 Apply to Each Invoice—Select to apply the discount to all invoices regardless of whether the
contract invoice reaches the minimum value threshold.
7 Apply to Full Amount—Select to apply the discount to the full amount of the invoice or contract.
If unselected, the discount is applied to the difference between the net amount plus adjustments
and Minimum Value.
8 Click Submit.
4 Department—Enter the department of the work orders to include on the invoice. The system
automatically populates the department description in the adjacent field.
5 WO Class —Enter the class of the work orders to include on the invoice. The system automatically
populates WO Class Org. and the work order class description in the adjacent field.
6 WO Type—Enter the type of the work orders to include on the invoice. Select to include Breakdown,
Preventive Maintenance, or Scheduled work order types on the invoice.
7 Grouping—Enter a unique name to identify the grouping of selected work order types. The system
references the group on the invoice for easy identification
Note: The system allows more than one grouping for the same work order type. If more than one
grouping is found for the same work order type, the system selects the first grouping for reference
on the invoice.
8 Click Submit.
5 Code—Enter the code for the entity. The system automatically populates the description and Code
Org.
6 Organization—Enter the organization of the selected code.
7 Sales Price—Enter the sales price to specify for the selected entity.
8 Store—Select the store of the entity.
9 Condition—Enter the condition if the entity is a part that is a condition tracked parent part. If the
selected entity for the part is a condition tracked child part, the system will automatically populate
Condition.
10 Click Submit.
4 Contract Clause—Enter a predefined ISO clause or a user-defined clause. You can associate
multiple clauses with a customer contract. The system automatically populates the description in
the adjacent field, and Organization.
5 Sequence—Enter a valid number to indicate the order of the contract clause in relation to other
associated clauses, if applicable.
6 Click Submit.
5 Invoicing Org.—Enter the invoicing organization on the customer contract header. The system
automatically populates Source Code with details of where the record originated.
6 Invoicing Description—Enter a description of the invoice transaction for the charge defined here.
This description is listed on the invoice when it is generated.
7 Invoice—Select to include this line of charges defined on the invoice.
Note: Use Invoice to make exceptions, e.g., invoice all work order charges but not tool costs.
10 Charge Level—Select the level of invoicing for the charges defined here for the customer contract.
Select one of the charge levels to invoice as follows:
• Transaction Adjustment—Select to invoice the customer for the charges defined here on the
transaction level, e.g., stocking items or issuing fuel.
• Subcategory Adjustment—Select to invoice the customer for the charges defined here on a
group level, e.g., select Subcategory Adjustment to add a $50 administration fee when materials
are issued from the warehouse, or select Subcategory Adjustment to add a 2% tax on all fuel
issues.
• Charge Category Adjustment—Select to invoice the customer for the charges defined here on
the charge category level, e.g., select Charge Category Adjustment to specify that the first
$250 of work order costs is included in the rental fee of the space and is therefore free of charge.
11 Charge Subcategory—Select the subcategory level of invoicing for the charges defined here for
the customer contract. This selection depends on the selection you made for Charge Category.
12 Rate—Enter the price to use on the invoice for Energy Charges, Usage Charges, and One Time
Charges.
13 Adjustment % Before—Enter the percentage by which to adjust the transaction amount prior to
price or transaction adjustments are applied.
14 Adjustment Unit Price—Enter the adjustment that should be applied to the transaction price.
15 Adjustment Transaction—Enter the adjustment that should be applied to the transaction.
16 Adjustment % After—Enter the percentage by which to adjust the transaction amount after the
Adjustment % Before, price, or transaction adjustments are applied.
17 Minimum Quantity—Enter the minimum quantity to invoice.
Note: The system compares the transaction quantity with Minimum Quantity and if the transaction
quantity is less, the system invoices the minimum quantity.
26 Starting Meter Value—Enter the value of the meter at the beginning of the contract. This is the
starting value of the meter for the first invoice.
27 Estimated Daily Usage—Enter the estimated daily usage to charge to the invoice if Charge
Estimated Usage was previously selected. The system invoices the customer for estimated daily
usage or energy consumption during the invoice generation process when actual usage via meter
readings is not known or incomplete.
28 Trade—Enter the trade of the charge definition. This is only relevant for work order charges and if
you want to make exceptions for certain trades.
29 Occupation Type—Enter the Occupation Type of the charge definition. This is only relevant for
work order charges and if you want to make exceptions for certain trades.
30 Part Class—Enter the part class of the charge definition. This is only relevant for work order charges
and if you want to make exceptions for certain part classes.
31 Submetered—Select if the equipment or contract item has its own meter (water meter, gas meter,
or electric meter) from which to measure energy consumption.
32 Use Floor Area—Select if the equipment or contract item does not have it own meter and you would
like to measure and track energy consumption based on the building utility bill, i.e. Utility Bill
Source.
Note: If you select to use the floor area in the calculations, the system calculates the invoicing
percentage based on the floor area of the contract item and that of the utility bill source, e.g., typically
the building in which the contract item resides.
33 Invoicing Percentage—Enter the percentage of the utility bill or actual submetered consumption
to invoice.
34 Utility Bill Source—Enter the utility bill source, usually a piece of equipment, to associate with the
contract item. The system automatically populates the utility bill source description and Utility Bill
Source Org.
Note: The utility bill source determines the consumption of energy and the rate, if Rate was left
blank for this charge definition record.
35 Click Submit.
Note: Click Reset Tax Codes to reset tax codes based on the selected values for the associated
contract items.
Click Associate Missing Meters for all contract items where a usage-based charge definition
references a meter UOM that does not exist on the equipment, the system add this meter to the
equipment.
Click Update Energy Preferences to save the energy settings of all commodities and all equipment
referenced on the contract.
Note: If Contract Item is populated, the system invoices the , adjustment as part of the contract
item costs. If left unpopulated, the system invoices the adjustment on the customer contract header
level.
5 Adjustment—Enter the adjustment which to associate with the customer contract or the contract
item. Adjustments are defined on the Adjustments form. The system automatically populates
Adjustment Org.
6 Quantity—Enter the number of adjustments to apply to the invoice.
7 Tax Code—Enter the tax code to specify for the adjustment, the system calculates the tax amount
on the invoice.
8 Adjustment Type—Select to categorize the adjustment.
Note: Invoice Discount or Contract Discount are system types and cannot be manually selected.
13 Exchange Rate—Enter the exchange rate the system will use for the adjustment when a foreign
currency is specified on the invoice of the customer.
Note: The system will try and find the exchange rate for you. If the adjustment date is in the past
it will try and find the exchange rate for that day. If it is in the future it will use today's date. If a
contract item is selected and Use Fixed Exchange Rate is selected for the contract item the system
will default the exchange rate from the contract item.
14 Click Submit.
To create a work order for the selected adjustment, click Create WO. Select the WO Organization,
and then click Submit.
2 Select the customer contract to copy, and then click the Record View tab.
3 Right-click on the form, and then select Copy Contract.
4 New Contract Code—Enter a unique code identifying the new customer contract, and then enter
a description of the contract in the adjacent field.
5 Custom Field Values, Clauses, WO Criteria, Sales Prices, Discounts, Contract Items, Charge
Definitions, Commodities, Comments, and Documents—Select which related details to copy to
the new customer contract.
6 Click Submit.
• Issued—Status must be changed to Issued when the rental equipment is issued to the customer.
• Returned—Status must be changed from Issued to Returned when the customer returns the
rental equipment.
• Completed—Status must be changed from Returned to Completed when the rental contract
is completed.
Note: System automatically updates the status from Completed to Finished based on the Rental
Completed date and CCFIDAYS install parameter defined on Options tab of Organization
9 Rental Template—Enter the template to apply to the customer rental contract. The system
automatically populates Rental Template Org., Class, and Class Org.
10 Class—Enter the class of the customer rental.
11 Issue To—Enter customer receiving the equipment for the rental.
12 Customer—Enter the unique code identifying the customer.
13 Customer Contact—Enter the customer contact name.
14 Enter the customer Work Phone Number and Email Address.
15 Email Invoice—Select to e-mail the customer rental invoice to the customer.
16 Enter the Driver's License No., Cost Code, and Tax Code.
17 Enter Issue Date/Time, Issue Location, Issue Reading, and Issue Fuel Level details of the rental
equipment.
18 Enter Return Date/Time, Return Location, Return Reading, and Return Fuel Level details of
the rental equipment.
19 Enter Corrected Hours, Corrected Days, Corrected Usage, and Corrected Fuel Usage, if the
calculated values must be overwritten.
Note: The system populates the values for the invoicing details such as Calculated Hours,
Calculated Fuel Usage, Net Amount, Tax Amount, andGross Amount.
20 Click Save Record. The system generates the Customer Rental number.
Note: The system also populates all charge definitions linked to the Rental Template.
To generate an invoice, right-click on the screen, and then select Generate Invoice.
4 Maximum Initial Duration (Hrs.)—Enter the maximum number in hours to indicate the initial duration
period expected for the permit to work.
5 Maximum Extensions—Enter the maximum number of extensions to allow for the permit to work
in the event the work to be performed is not completed by the Maximum Initial Duration (Hrs.).
6 Maximum Extension Duration (Hrs.)—Enter the maximum number of hours to allow per extension
for the duration of the permit to work in the event the work to be performed is not completed by the
Maximum Initial Duration (Hrs.).
7 Maximum Total Duration (Hrs.)—Enter the maximum number in hours to indicate the total duration
allowed for the permit to work.
8 Click Save Record.
Defining hazards
A hazard is a situation that poses a level of threat to life, health, property, or the employee's environment
such as working with fire and flammable equipment, lifting heavy objects, handling sharp objects,
working near roadsides, working at heights, or working in confined spaces. Define these situations as
hazards to notify your employees of potential dangers in the workplace as they perform maintenance.
After defining hazards, define precautionary measures for each hazard on the Precautions form.
To update or revise hazard records once created, right-click on a hazard record, and then select Create
New Revision.
To define hazards:
8 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
Note: After updates to the hazard record are saved, the system automatically populates Updated
By, Date Updated, and Revision.
Defining precautions
Define precautions to safeguard workers from potential hazards in the workplace such as working with
fire and flammable equipment, lifting heavy objects, handling sharp objects, working near roadsides,
or working at heights.
Precautions for these potential hazards include wearing harnesses or using scaffolds to prevent falls,
wearing gloves for handling sharp objects, or working during low traffic volume times when working on
or near roadsides.
After creating precautions, associate the precautions with hazards on the Precautions tab of the
Hazards form or immediately associate hazards and precautions on the Safety tabs.
To update or revise precaution records once created, right-click and then select Create New Revision.
To define precautions:
5 Equipment—Enter the equipment if the isolation point is equipment that you already maintain, e.g.,
a valve. The system automatically populates the description and Equipment Org.
6 Class—Enter the class of the isolation point, e.g. VALVE, SWITCH. The system automatically
populates Class Org.
7 Status—Enter the status of the isolation point. The system automatically populates Unfinished.
8 Location—Enter the location of the isolation point. The system automatically populates Location
Org.
9 Location Note—Enter any additional notes on the location of the isolation as necessary.
10 Energy Source—Select the equipment's source of energy, e.g., electrical power.
11 Residual Energy—Select the secondary source of residual energy to the equipment if any..
12 Secondary Residual Energy—Select the secondary source of residual energy to the equipment.
13 Date Review Required—Enter the date review of the isolation point is required.
14 Out of Service—Select to indicate the isolation point should not display in the isolation point lookups
on the LOTO tab of the Assets, Positions, Locations, and Permit to Work form.
15 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
5 Class—Enter the class of the lockout box for the permit. The system automatically populates Class
Org.
6 Location Note—Enter a note detailing where the lockout box is located.
7 In Use—Select if the lockout box is currently in use.
8 Out of Service—Select if the lockout box is currently out of service or not being used.
9 Click Save Record.
Note: The system automatically populates Current PTW and In Use if the lockout box is used on
a permit to work that is currently isolated.
8 Health Hazard—Enter the code based on the Hazardous Materials Code (400) of the NFPA that
indicates the degree to which the materials used poses a hazard to the health of the employee.
9 Flammability—Enter the code based on the Hazardous Materials Code (400) of the NFPA that
indicates the degree to which the materials used are flammable.
10 Instability—Enter the code based on the Hazardous Materials Code (400) of the NFPA that indicates
the degree to which the materials used can detonate or explode.
11 Special Hazards—Enter the code based on the Hazardous Materials Code (400) of the NFPA that
indicates any special hazards related to the materials used.
12 Click Submit. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
5 Click Submit.
13 Add Location Safety—Select to add all associated location safety records to the new permit to
work.
14 Click Copy or Replace.
The inspection management module coordinates with the work management module to give you more
control over preventive maintenance (PM) functions within your organization.
Set up PM routes in the work management module, and then enhance the PM route information in the
inspection management module by adding inspection points, inspection methods, and inspection
conditions.
First, enter the inspection information, and then establish high and low tolerances for inspection readings.
When a reading result exceeds the high or low tolerance, the system automatically generates a corrective
work order. The Infor EAM inspection process will lower your organization’s maintenance costs and
ensure asset reliability.
Term Definition
Inspection Point The physical location on the piece of equipment
to inspect
Example: Examine the tires on a van every three
months for tread wear. The inspection points are
the front left tire, the front right tire, the rear left
tire, and the rear right tire.
Also, define inspection points at the category level
so that the points apply to all equipment within the
specified category.
Example: Define inspection points for all vans
rather than for a specific van.
Term Definition
Example: Inspection point types for a vehicle are
tires, brakes, headlights, etc. For a pipe, the point
type could be a tee or weld.
Term Definition
Example: The minimum extreme value for tire
tread is 1/32. The maximum value is 9/32. Tire
tread measurements between these two values
are acceptable.
Critical Value The value that indicates when to take action for
an aspect
Example: When tire tread reaches 2/32 of an inch,
replace the tire.
Inspection Route Template A sorted list of inspection points defined for a cat-
egory (not a specific piece of equipment), outlining
both the sequence and the content of an inspection
Apply the template to any piece of equipment in a
category. The system stores the template in the
database library and attaches it to a work order
when you need it.
Example: Set up a route template for 12,000,
36,000, and 60,000-mile tune-ups for vehicles.
When it is time to perform the tune-up, attach the
tune-up template to a work order for a 1991 Ford
Passenger Van.
Term Definition
Request Approval—Update the inspection point
result type only.
Approved/Processed—The results are frozen,
and you can update the inspection point result type
only.
Canceled—User cannot make any changes, and
the route is considered "dead."
3 Aspect—Enter a unique code identifying the inspection aspect, and then enter a description of the
aspect in the adjacent field.
4 Time Dependency—Select Linearly Increasing or Linearly Decreasing. The time dependence
parameter is used to calculate when equipment will exceed safety margins.
5 Class—Enter the class of the aspect. The system automatically populates Class Org.
6 Out of Service—Select to indicate that the system does not use this aspect.
7 Random Result—Select to permit entry of measurements without requiring an associated inspection
point.
8 Click Save Record.
Defining points
Define equipment inspection points, equipment inspection aspects, equipment inspection aspect points,
and equipment inspection conditions. Finally, enter additional equipment inspection information and
record equipment inspection results.
12 Max. Extreme—Enter the maximum extreme value beyond the operating specifications for the
aspect.
13 Max. Critical—Enter the highest possible value for the aspect.
14 Max. Tolerance—Enter the maximum percentage of critical value for the aspect.
15 Max. Std. WO—Enter a standard work order to restore normal operating conditions when the
maximum critical value is reached.
16 Max. PM—Enter a preventive maintenance work order to restore normal operating conditions when
the maximum critical value is reached.
17 Click Submit.
Note: You cannot remove aspect records that are indirectly associated with the monitored data
object.
10 Min. Critical—Enter the lowest possible value for the aspect point.
Note: Min. Critical must be less than the Nominal Value.
11 Min. Tolerance—Enter the minimum percentage of critical value for the aspect point.
12 Min. Std. WO—Enter a standard work order to restore normal operating conditions when the
minimum critical value is reached.
13 Min. PM—Enter a preventive maintenance work order to restore normal operating conditions when
the minimum critical value is reached.
14 Max. Extreme—Enter the maximum extreme value beyond the operating specifications for the
aspect point.
Note:
Note: Max. Extreme must be greater than or equal to the Min. Extreme and Max. Critical.
15 Max. Critical—Enter the highest possible value for the aspect point.
Note: Max. Critical must be greater than the Nominal Value and greater than or equal to Min.
Critical.
16 Max. Tolerance—Enter the maximum percentage of critical value for the aspect point.
17 Max. Std. WO—Enter a standard work order to restore normal operating conditions when the
maximum critical value is reached.
18 Max. PM—Enter a preventive maintenance work order to restore normal operating conditions when
the maximum critical value is reached.
19 Click Submit.
Note: You cannot remove aspect point records that are indirectly associated with the monitored
data object.
Note: You must select at least one aspect point that is associated with the source object.
To select all the aspect points at once, check Select. To unselect all the aspect points at once,
uncheck Select.
6 Click Copy.
Note: You cannot copy aspect points that are already associated with the destination object from
the source object to the destination object.
7 Click Submit.
Note: You cannot remove point conditions records that are indirectly associated with the monitored
data object.
You cannot create a new point condition with the same combination of Point, Point Type, and
Aspect as an existing point condition.
3 Piping Class—Enter the piping class of the equipment as necessary. The system automatically
populates Piping Class Rev., Material Standard, Corr. Allowance, Material, Material Std. Rev.,
Design Code, Design Temp. Min., and Design Temp. Max.
4 Material Standard—Enter the material standard of the equipment as necessary.
5 Nominal OD—Enter a numeric value for the pipe’s nominal outer diameter. Then, specify the unit
of measure for the diameter by selecting Inch or mm (millimeters).
6 MAOP through Lining/Coating—Enter the relevant values according to the design specifications
listed by the manufacturer or international standards organizations.
7 Variable 1 through Text 5—Enter any additional information about the object.
8 Click Save Record.
Note: You cannot delete equipment details records that are indirectly associated via the equipment’s
category with the monitored data object. If the existing equipment details record is not directly
associated with the monitored data object, click Copy Category Data to Equipment to directly
associate the equipment details record from the details of the indirectly associated equipment details
record.
12 Click Submit.
Note: You cannot modify Completed results.
The above fields are fixed. The system displays variable fields based on the selected aspect. Once
you select the Aspect in the header, the system displays the prompts related to the aspect that
were defined on the Prompts page of the Aspects form. Enter information for the prompts
accordingly. The system displays prompts with formulas as read-only attached at record insert or
update.
7 Point—Enter the point that is first in the inspection route sequence. The system automatically
populates the point description.
8 Sequence Number—Enter the sequence number of the inspection point.
9 Click Submit.
18 If necessary, click Create New WO to generate the work order immediately. However, if the system
status of the route is Approved, you cannot create a new work order. You must also select New
WO Required to create new work orders. The system creates a new work order based on the details
of the work order inspection point and inserts the work order number for Work Order.
Note: If you do not create a new work order by clicking Create New WO, the system automatically
creates a work order after the inspection results are approved.
1 Open the Approve Inspection Results form. The system automatically populates Organization.
Note: To select previously defined parameters, select the name of the set of parameters in Parameter
List.
2 Organization—Enter the organization to which the inspection point belongs if you use
multi-organization security.
3 Route, Work Order, PM, Equipment Type, Equipment, Location, Department, Equipment
Class, and/or Category, and Inspection Status—Enter one or all of these selection parameters
for generating the inspection point batch.
4 Click Process.
5 Select—Select each inspection point you wish to approve in the inspection point batch as necessary,
or you can unselect each inspection point you do not wish to approve in the inspection point batch
as necessary.
Note: To select all the inspection points at once, check Select. To unselect all the inspection points
at once, uncheck Select.
6 Click Approve. The system updates the Inspection Status of any affected work orders. If any errors
occur, then the system changes the record’s visual attribute to red and displays an error message
in the Error Message column of the Preview list.
Note: If you have set up the system to require an electronic signature to authorize status changes
to work order headers or to create work orders, the system displays the eSignature popup once for
every inspection point in the inspection point batch for which there is a status change or a new work
order is created.
Defining formulas
Define generic formulas to establish any calculation that produces a minimum or maximum critical
value for an inspection point aspect combination or any calculation with entered monitored data, and
then identify where the system executes those formulas. First, define the actual formula, and then
define parameters used within the formula. The system calculates formulas with SQL statements
defined for the parameters used in the formula.
To define formulas:
Maintain calibration data to ensure the accuracy of your equipment. The calibration management
module coordinates the equipment module with the work management module. Create and edit
calibration information on the Assets, Positions, or Systems forms, and then create calibration work
orders and enter the actual calibration data on the Work Orders form.
Load test point data and equipment calibration data using the Equipment and Work Order interfaces.
To enable data collection for calibration data, you must define the necessary transaction prompts on
the DC Transaction Prompts form. See Chapter 5 Data Collection in the System Administrator’s
Guide.
The calibration management module also provides extensive reporting capabilities. See "Calibrations
reports" on page 633 Chapter 9 Reports for more information.
Run calibration reports for generating, tracking, and maintaining calibration data for your records. See
"Calibrations reports" on page 633.
Default set The default set of calibration test points that apply
to calibration work orders/PM work orders
Deviation The difference between the Device Reading and
the Standard
Device tolerance The allowable deviation from the standard for the
device being used to perform the calibration mea-
surement. A specified device tolerance indicates
the range of variation permitted in maintaining ad-
herence to the standard for the device.
Term Definition
Increment The increment specifies the numeric interval of
which a device reading must be evenly divisible.
For example, if you specify an Increment of 5, you
must enter a Device Reading that is evenly divis-
ible by 5, such as 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, etc.
Instrument type A series of one or more instruments requiring
and/or used for calibration that are linked together.
Standard applied to—An instrument to which a
standard is applied during calibration.
Accessory—An instrument that is secondary or
subordinate within a loop.
Reading taken from—An instrument from which
a reading is taken during calibration.
Output range The allowable deviation from the standard for the
output that indicates the range of variation permit-
ted to adhere to the standard for the test point.
Percentage Indicates the system processes the values entered
in Device Tolerance as percentages.
The system calculates the range at which the work
order will pass or fail based on the following
equations:
Lower Work Order Device Tolerance = Standard
– [Standard * Lower Equipment Device Tolerance
/ 100]
Upper Work Order Device Tolerance = Standard
+ [Standards * Upper Equipment Device Tolerance
/ 100]
For example, if the Standard is 25, and the Device
Tolerance of the equipment is 5-5, the reading
must fall within a range of 23.75 to 26.25 for the
work order to pass.
Term Definition
Precision Indicates the maximum number of decimals al-
lowed to the right of the decimal point for a reading.
Note: You can enter a number with fewer than the
maximum number of decimals allowed to the right
of the decimal point. The system assumes there
are zeros at the end of the specified number.
The precision indicates the degree of refinement
with which the calibration is performed or the cali-
bration measurement is stated.
Designate an instrument as a loop on the Calibration page of the equipment record. See "Defining
calibration test point data" on page 579.
Note: Depending on your system configuration, the system may not display Loop on the Calibration
page of the Categories, Assets, Positions, or Systems forms. Contact your system administrator for
more information.
Link instruments to the loop equipment through parent-child relationships in a hierarchy. All instruments
in a loop must be linked directly as children of the loop equipment in an equipment hierarchy. See
"Creating equipment hierarchies" on page 106. Within the equipment hierarchy of the loop, designate
the parent equipment as a Loop and designate the child equipment in the loop as an Instrument on
the Calibration tab of the equipment record. See "Defining calibration test point data" on page 579
If you create a calibration work order for a loop, the loop is displayed on the work order header, and
the test points defined on the loop are copied to the work order. When calibrating loops, the calibration
standard is often applied to the input loop instrument. The reading is then taken at the output loop
instrument. The system creates test points on the work order for instruments in the loop that are defined
as type Reading taken from. See "Entering calibration results" on page 582.
• Reading taken from—Select to indicate the instrument is a point in the loop at which calibration
readings are taken.
5 Test Point UOM—Enter the unit of measure for the test point.
6 Device Tolerance—Enter the range of the device tolerance for the piece of equipment, e.g., 10 to
20. The values entered indicate the desired range for the calibration measurement and can be either
an absolute or a percentage.
7 Alert Tolerance—Enter the alert tolerance for the piece of equipment. The system interprets the
value entered as a percentage.
8 Precision—Enter the precision of the instrument.
9 Output Range—Enter numeric values indicating the potential range of the device output, e.g., 200
to 500.
10 Default Set—Enter a value identifying the calibration data and test points as the default set of test
points for the equipment. Designate the set of test points as the default set to indicate which set of
test points to copy to manually created calibration work orders. The system also copies the default
set when creating PM equipment records.
11 P&ID Drawing—Enter the process and instrument diagram drawing number.
12 P&ID No—Enter the process and instrument diagram number.
13 Output UOM—Enter the unit of measure for the device output.
14 Choose one of these options to indicate the type of value for the specified Device Tolerance:
• Percentage—Select to apply the values entered in Device Tolerance as a percent value.
• Absolute—Select to apply the values entered in Device Tolerance as an absolute value.
16 Device Range—Enter numeric values indicating the potential range for the device, e.g., 250 to 450.
17 Process Tolerance—Enter the range of the process tolerance, e.g., 10 to 20.
18 Process Range—Enter the range of the process, e.g., 150 to 600.
19 S.O.P.—Enter the standard operating procedure for calibration.
20 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Next Cal. Due with the date of the next
calibration work order for the piece of equipment.
Note: The system does not display Next Cal. Due on the Calibration page of the Categories form.
Update calibration data as necessary. The system applies new data entered in Test Point UOM
and Device Tolerance to work order test points created after you make the update. The system
does not update the data on existing test point records.
Right-click, and then select View Calibration Results to view calibration results for the equipment
record.
If you are defining calibration data for a category, click Update Equipment. The system copies the
calibration data to all equipment records within the category. Prior to copying the calibration data,
the system deletes any calibration data for this category from related equipment records.
If one or more imported test points already exist on the destination record, the system displays a warning
message and re-sequences the imported test points to avoid duplication. You may then make any
corrections if necessary.
Records that do not have any associated test points will not be available to import from. Records whose
organization is not associated to the user will not be available to import from.
When importing from a work order to a work order, records whose organization does not match the
destination work order organization will not be available to import from.
Categories, assets, positions, systems, and work orders whose is > the Precision of the destination
record will not be available to import test points from Precision.
When importing test points to a work order from a category or equipment, the system always converts
any test point tolerances defined as Percentage to absolute values for display on the Calibration page
of the Work Orders form. This conversion is not necessary when importing test points from another
work order since the system will have already converted the work order test point tolerances to absolute
values.
unit of measure for the test point based on the test point data entered for the equipment listed on
the work order.
4 Equipment—Choose one of the following options if the work order is a multiple equipment work
order:
• Enter All Equipment to create the test point for each of the Related Work Orders associated
with all of the equipment records on the Calibration page of the Work Orders form.
Note: If the work order is a multiple equipment type work order and you click Add Test Point
without selecting an existing test point, the system automatically populates Equipment with All
Equipment. If you select an existing test point and then click Add Test Pointon a multiple
equipment work order, the system populates Equipment, Equipment Description, Equipment
Org., Related Work Order, Test Point UOM, Standard UOM, and Output UOM from the
selected record.
If All Equipment is selected for Equipment, then Device Tolerance, Device Reading, and
Status are protected, because you cannot distribute these values to all equipment on the work
order.
• Enter WO Header Equipment to create the test point for each equipment record on the Calibration
page of the Work Order on the work order header.
• Enter a specific Equipment record to create the test point for the Related Work Order associated
with the selected Equipment. See "Adding equipment to work orders to split work order costs"
on page 398.
5 Not Applicable—Select to indicate the test point is no longer applicable for the calibration process.
6 Test Point—Enter the test point value for the calibration, and then enter the unit of measure for the
test point in the adjacent field.
Complete steps 7 through 10 in the As Found section of the form to enter the calibration results.
7 Standard—Enter the standard value for the calibration, and then enter the unit of measure for the
standard in the adjacent field.
8 Device Tolerance—Enter the range of the device tolerance.
9 Output—Enter the value of the test point output, and then enter the output’s unit of measure in the
adjacent field.
10 Device Reading—Enter the reading of the device.
The system subtracts the Standard from the Device Reading to determine the Deviation. The
system automatically populates Status based on the calibration results you enter.
Complete step 11 in the As Left section of the form if recalibration is required.
Note: Click Copy to As Left to copy the data from the As Found section to the As Left section,
and then modify the fields as necessary.
11 Standard, Output, Device Tolerance, and Device Reading—Enter the calibration standard, output,
device tolerance, and device reading. The system subtracts the Standard from the Device Reading
to determine the Deviation. The system automatically populates Status based on the calibration
results you enter.
12 Click Submit.
Note: To add a new test point, click Add Test Point. The system inserts a new Test Point Details
record. Enter data as necessary, and then click Submit.
If you delete a test point for which the test point Equipment is associated with a MEC work order,
then the system removes the test point from the Related Work Order.
The system calculates the work order’s calibration status based on the status of each test point.
For multiple equipment work orders, the calibration status of the parent work order considers the
test points for all of its related work orders.
To run a calibration record report, click Run Calibration Report. See "Calibration record report" on
page 635.
5 Click Close.
the Parts Associated page of the Assets, Positions, or Systems form. See "Creating parts" on page
190 and "Associating parts" on page 64.
Note: If the work order for which you are defining standards used is a multiple equipment work
order, then the system displays the parts used as calibration standards associated with the selected
test point Equipment record.
4 Select the part for which to specify equipment and/or lot information. The system automatically
populates Part and Part Org.
5 Equipment—Enter the equipment record used for calibration.
Note: The system displays equipment records to which you associated the selected part via the
Part field on the Record View page of the Assets, Positions, or Systems form. See "Defining assets"
on page 85, "Defining positions" on page 89, and "Defining systems" on page 92.
If the work order for which you are defining standards used is a multiple equipment work order, you
can associate a test point with a specific equipment or with all equipment on the work order.
Define special projects in addition to the work defined in the work management and asset management
modules. Examples of special projects are painting a room or building a new production line. Break
large projects down into more manageable sub-projects, and assign individual work orders to each
step. You can also set up budget requirements and monitor costs for projects. Charge work orders and
purchase orders against projects. The system displays actual costs, committed costs, and planned
costs, eliminating guesswork.
7 Estimated Start Date—Enter the intended starting date for the project.
8 Estimated End Date—Enter the intended ending date for the project.
9 Shutdown—Enter a shutdown identification code to associate with the project if the project requires
the shutdown of equipment. The system automatically populates Shutdown WOs.
10 Status—Enter the status of the project.
Note: All projects start with a Status of Awaiting Approval.
11 Actual Start Date—Enter the actual starting date for the project.
12 Actual End Date—Enter the actual ending date for the project.
13 Class—Enter the class of the project. The system automatically populates Class Org., Capital
Planning Request, Capital Planning Request Org., Project WOs, and Shutdown WOs Created.
Note: The system automatically populates Capital Planning Request, Capital Planning Request
Org., Project WOs, and Shutdown WOs Created for projects created on the Capital Planning
Requests form.
14 Current Budget —Enter the total budget amount for the project. Budgets of child projects do not
roll up to the budget of the parent project. The system displays the estimated cost of completing the
project inEstimate to Complete and the total budget approved for the project in Budget Approved.
15 Budget Date—Enter the date the budget was established.
Note: You must enter a Budget Date that is before or equal to the current date.
Note: If you do not associate the budget of a shutdown work order with the project, the system does
not create the shutdown work order when you click Create Shutdown WOs on the Projects form. See
"Generating shutdown work orders" on page 594.
The system monitors the expenditures for parts and labor for the project and any child projects, and it
breaks the budget amount of the main project down into a budget amount for each subproject. It
validates these expenditures against the budget amount. Regard the budget values defined here as
sub-budget values, in comparison with the budgets defined on the Projects form. After the project is
complete, the system freezes all associated budget items.
Note: You do not need to create project budget codes for child projects.
To associate predefined budget codes with projects:
6 Estimate to Complete—Enter the estimated expenditures remaining for this project for the selected
budget.
Note: When creating an initial budget for the selected budget code, the system automatically
populates Estimate to Complete with the value entered in Budgeted Amount. If applicable, the
system automatically subtracts the value of any planned, on order, actual, and invoice difference
costs that may be incurred against this project/budget from the value entered in Budgeted Amount,
and then populates Estimate to Complete with the calculated value. Modify the value of Estimate
to Complete as necessary.
Additionally, the system calculates the sum of all the values entered for Estimate to Complete for
each budget on the Budgets page of the Projects form and then automatically populates Estimate
to Complete on the project record with this value. See "Defining project basics" on page 589.
7 Click Submit.
sub-budget values, in comparison with the budgets defined on the Projects form. After the project is
complete, the system freezes all associated budget items.
Note: You do not need to create project budget codes for child projects.
To associate predefined budget codes with projects:
6 Estimate to Complete—Enter the estimated expenditures remaining for this project for the selected
budget.
Note: When creating an initial budget for the selected budget code, the system automatically
populates Estimate to Complete with the value entered in Budgeted Amount. If applicable, the
system automatically subtracts the value of any planned, on order, actual, and invoice difference
costs that may be incurred against this project/budget from the value entered in Budgeted Amount,
and then populates Estimate to Complete with the calculated value. Modify the value of Estimate
to Complete as necessary.
Additionally, the system calculates the sum of all the values entered for Estimate to Complete for
each budget on the Budgets page of the Projects form and then automatically populates Estimate
to Complete on the project record with this value. See "Defining project basics" on page 589.
7 Click Submit.
Before creating a shutdown work order, you must associate the budget code of a shutdown work order
with the project on the Budgets page of the Project form. See "Associating predefined budget codes
with projects" on page 593.
To generate shutdown work orders:
Creating campaigns
A campaign is a list of jobs that may be performed on a given list of equipment as necessary to complete
work. Campaigns are comprised of two types of events:
• Survey—Maintenance personnel checks equipment specified on the work order to see if issue(s)
exist.
• Job—Work order to correct issue(s) found.
If equipment passes the survey, work on the equipment is unnecessary.
If equipment fails the survey, work on the equipment is necessary. All survey results are recorded on
the Equipment page of the Campaigns form, or the Survey Equipment page of the Work Orders form.
A campaign can have multiple jobs listed to complete work on necessary equipment, however only
one survey is allowed per campaign.
To create campaigns:
6 Class—Enter the class of the campaign. The system automatically populates the Class Org., Open
WOs, Closed WOs, and Total WOs.
7 Type—Enter the type for the campaign.
8 Survey Required—Select to require a survey campaign event to check all specified equipment for
necessary repairs.
9 Campaign Manager—Enter a manager for the campaign.
10 Project-Budget—Enter both the project and budget to associate to this campaign.
11 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
18 WO Class—Enter the work order class for the campaign event. The system automatically populates
WO Class Org.
19 Duration—Enter a duration for the work order for the campaign event.
20 Problem Code—Enter the code to identify the type of problem.
21 Safety—Select if this campaign event requires special safety precautions.
22 Trade—Enter the trade required to perform the activity.
23 Task—Enter the task code for the activity.
24 Material List—Enter the material list code for the material list containing the parts needed for the
work order.
25 Estimated Hours—Enter the estimated number of hours required to complete the activity.
26 People Required—Enter the number of people required to perform the activity.
27 Activity Duration—Enter a duration for the activity for the campaigning event.
28 Click Submit.
Select—Select the equipment to mark for a campaign after a survey work order, and then choose
one of the following options:
• To mark equipment as passed—click Mark as Passed.
• To mark the equipment as failed—click Mark as Failed.
• To mark the equipment as not evaluated—click Mark as Not Evaluated.
Copying campaigns
Copy child records of campaigns and campaign header information to a new campaign.
To copy campaign records to new campaigns:
6 User Defined Fields—Select to copy the user defined fields to the new campaign.
7 Campaign Events—Select to copy the campaign events to the new campaign.
8 Equipment—Select to copy the equipment to the new campaign.
9 Comments—Select to copy the comments to the new campaign.
10 Documents—Select to copy the documents to the new campaign.
11 Click Submit.
Specify report parameters and generate reports for the various modules within Infor EAM.
Generating reports
Generate reports from the menu bar. For most reports, the system displays a Parameters page in which
you enter selection criteria for the report. Some reports also include Fields and Group/Sort Order pages
in which you specify the way reports appear, similar to the system’s Dataspy.
Reports are available in Adobe Acrobat format (PDF). The Acrobat file provides a preview of the report
before running and enables you to print to your local printer.
Note: Infor EAM reports do not support numbers with more than 16 digits.
Function Procedure
Add a field Select the field in Available Fields, and then
click Add a field.
Remove a field Select the field in Visible Fields, and then click
Remove a field.
Add all fields Click Add all fields.
Remove all fields Click Remove all fields.
Reorder fields Select the field in Visible Fields, and then click
either Reorder up or Reorder down to move
the field up or down in the order.
Note: To remove sort criteria, choose the --No Sort-- selection from the drop-down list.
3 Click Save.
4 Choose one of the following options:
• Save the report parameters as the default parameters for the report—Enter the Name of
the saved parameters, and then select Default.
• Save the report parameters without setting them as the default parameters for the
report—Enter the Name of the saved parameters.
5 Click Submit.
Asset reports
Generate reports related to asset functions.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Asset Sustainability > Annual Energy Reduction Comparison
Parameters
Enter Equipment, Organization, and Ending Year (YYYY) for the report.
Note: The starting year for the report is always the year preceding Ending Year (YYYY).
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Asset Sustainability > Annual Energy Use
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Organization.
No. of Years—Enter the number of years for which to run the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Asset Failures by Service Life
Parameters
Enter Equipment, Organization, Class, Category, Primary Closing Code, and Secondary Closing
Code.
Plot Points Time Frame—Choose one of the following options:
• Month—Select to group the asset records by Service Life % month.
• Year—Select to group the asset records by Service Life % year.
Report Type
Basic
Calibration equipment
Description
Displays a list of all equipment that requires calibration and has been configured for calibration. The
report includes all equipment that is defined as a loop, instrument, or standard if any one of these
requires calibration. Standards are either parts tracked by asset or parts tracked by lot. The system
only prints part standards that are tracked by asset, because you do not have to associate a piece of
equipment with parts tracked by lot.
The System field in the report output displays all of the systems above the selected System/Equipment
in an equipment hierarchy. If the selected System/Equipment has more than one parent in a hierarchy,
the system displays each parent and separates each code with a forward slash (/), e.g.,
SYS1/SYS2/SYS3.
Additionally, if the equipment tolerance is a percentage rather than an absolute, the system designates
the tolerance as a percentage by printing a percent sign (%) following the devices to and from tolerance.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Calibration Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, System, Class, Category, Equipment Criticality, and Status.
Select one or more of the following options:
• Include in Service—Select to print a list of all calibration equipment that is currently in service.
• Include Out of Service—Select to print a list of all calibration equipment that is currently out of
service.
• Include Withdrawn—Select to print a list of calibration equipment that is withdrawn.
• Include Calibration Specifications—Select to print the calibration specifications entered for each
piece of calibration equipment on the Calibration page and Test Points page of the Assets, Positions,
and Systems forms.
Order By—Select to order by Department or Equipment.
Report Type
Consumer
Calibration history
Description
Displays a list of calibration work order results for calibration work orders for which the completion date
falls within the specified start and end date. The results shown for each work order will be related to
test points having the greatest deviation from the standard.
The System field in the report output displays all of the systems above the selected System/Equipment
in an equipment hierarchy. If the selected System/Equipment has more than one parent in a hierarchy,
the system displays each parent and separates each code with a forward slash (/), e.g.,
SYS1/SYS2/SYS3.
Additionally, if more than one standard is used for the work order, the system prints each standard and
its due date or lot expiration date on a separate line.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Calibration History
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Department, System, Class, Category, and Equipment
Criticality.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. End Date is
a required field.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Capital Performance Evaluation
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Code, Class, Category, Request Priority, Request Amount
Minimum, Reporting Currency, Request Status, and GAS Index Evaluation Period (Days).
Note: Request Amount Minimum selects requests where the estimated material cost plus the
estimated labor cost is greater than the minimum entered.
GAS Tracked Equipment—Select to include GAS-tracked equipment in this report.
Green Related Request—Select to include green-related requests in this report.
Sort By—Select to sort by GAS Cost, Return Amount, or Return %.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
CO2 analysis
Description
Displays CO2 reduction for equipment calculated for a specific date range. The reduction calculation
can be based on the equipment efficiency (design versus actual) or on a comparison with last year's
data.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > CO2 Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Commodity, Equipment, Class, and Category.
Max No. of Records—Enter the maximum number of equipment records to display.
Min Reduction %—Enter the minimum reduction percentage. The system displays the reduction %
greater than or equal to this value.
Max Reduction %—Enter the maximum reduction percentage. The system displays the reduction %
less than or equal to this value.
Bill Level Only—Select to include equipment for which Bill Level is checked.
Reduction % Based on Previous Year—Select to calculate the reduction percentage based on the
previous year. The previous year can only be calculated if the selection period is equal to or less than
one year.
Sort By—Select to sort by Best or Worst.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
CO2 emissions
Description
Displays equipment (in graphical form) in best and worst order based on CO2 emissions for the selected
year and compares the data with the previous two years
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > CO2 Emissions
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Commodity, and Reporting Year.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Asset Sustainability > CO2e Emissions by Greenhouse Gas
Parameters
Enter Equipment, Organization, and Commodity.
Select Start Date and End Date for the calendar year of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Cost of WOs Per Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, Department, and Reporting Currency.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Downtime Tracking
Parameters
Enter the Equipment, Department, Assigned To, Priority, and Organization.
Start Date—Enter the date to begin tracking the downtime for the equipment.
End Date—Enter the date to end tracking the downtime for the equipment.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Energy Star Ratings Chart
Equipment > Positions > Energy Star Ratings Chart
Equipment > Systems > Energy Star Ratings Chart
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Organization.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Equipment depreciation
Description
Displays a report of the total equipment depreciation expense and book value through the End Date.
Depending on the selection criteria entered, the system includes all equipment records with a
depreciation schedule of the selected Depreciation Type for which an Original Cost is specified that
does not have a Transfer Date.
If a piece of equipment is sold/scrapped, the system determines whether the Sold/Scrapped Date is
prior to the report End Date. If so, then the system displays the depreciation expense for the equipment
through the Sold/Scrapped Date and a Book Value of zero.
If you specify a future date as the End Date for the report, the system generates a report of the actual
depreciation expense/book value through the current system date, as well as the projected depreciation
expense/book value through the specified End Date.
If the depreciation method for a piece of equipment is units of output, the system generates a report
of the most recent depreciation expense/book value that is presently available based on the current
system date and units of output entered.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment Depreciation
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Type, Equipment Class, Category, Department, Profile,
Status, Location, Assigned To, Cost Code, Reporting Currency, and Depreciation Type.
Sort By—Select to sort by Organization, Department, or Equipment Class.
End Date—Enter the ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Equipment hierarchies
Description
Displays a list of equipment hierarchies.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment Hierarchies
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Parent Equipment Type, Parent Equipment, and Child Equipment Type.
Report Type
Consumer
Equipment history
Description
Details the date and reason work was performed on a piece of equipment or an equipment type.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment History
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Type, Equipment, Location, Problem Code, Failure Code,
Cause Code, Action Code, and Work Order.
Show Costs—Select to show work order costs.
Show MEC Details—Select to display MEC work order details for multiple equipment work orders.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment Performance by Cost Chart
Parameters
Enter Organization, Department, Class, Category, and Cost Code.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment Performance by Downtime Chart
Parameters
Enter Equipment, Department, Assigned To, Priority, Organization, and Class.
Downtime By—Choose one of the following options:
• Hours—Select to group the asset records by downtime hours
• Cost—Select to group the asset records by downtime costs.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment Transfer Log
Parameters
Enter the Transfer No.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Fault Trend Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Category, Location, Type, Equipment, Number of Months, Problem
Code, Action Code, Cause Code, and Failure Code.
Show Faults By—Select to sort by Problem Code, Action Code, Cause Code, or Failure Code.
Start Date—Enter the starting date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > GAS Index Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Equipment.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > List of Categories Per Class
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, and Category.
Report Type
Consumer
Hazard chart
Description
Print the hazard chart.
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Reliability Calculations
Note: You may also access this report on the Reliability Calculations tab of the Positions form.
Parameters
Enter H for Type to print the hazard chart.
Enter the Problem Code, Failure Code, Cause Code, Action Code, Sequence Number, Start Day,
and Scale Multiplier.
Report Type
Consumer
List of classes
Description
Displays a list of classes.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > List of Classes
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Entity, and Class.
Report Type
Consumer
List of equipment
Description
Displays a list of equipment.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > List of Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, Description, Class, Category, Location, Status,
Department, and Assigned To.
Sort By—Select to sort by Equipment, Class, or Location.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > List of Equipment Details
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, Status, Class, Category, Location, and Position.
Include All Child Equipment—Select to include all child equipment on the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Mean Time Between Failures
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Category, Equipment Type, Equipment, and Location.
Show Faults By—Select to sort by Problem Code, Action Code, Cause Code, or Failure Code.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Mean Time Between Failures Per Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Category, Equipment Type, Equipment, Location, Problem Code,
Action Code, Cause Code, and Failure Code.
Show Faults By—Select to sort by Problem Code, Action Code, Cause Code, or Failure Code.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Meter history
Description
Displays meter information and meter readings by piece of equipment.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Meter History
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Category, Location, Type, Equipment, Status, and Department.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > PM Repair Costs Chart
Note: You may also access this report on the PM Repair Costs Chart tab of the Positions and
Systems forms.
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Organization.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for which to retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Maintenance Pattern
Parameters
Enter Organization, Timeline Start Date, Timeline End Date, Maintenance Pattern, Class,
Equipment, Equipment Type, Department, Equipment Class, Category, Cost Code, and Assigned
To.
Select Include Sequence to include sequence details in the report.
Select Include Timeline to include timeline details in the report.
Select Include User Defined FIelds to include user defined fields in the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Print Reliability Survey
Parameters
Reliability Ranking—Enter the reliability ranking for which to print survey reports.
Report Type
Consumer
Reliability calculations
Description
Print the reliability calculations chart.
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Reliability Calculations
Note: You may also access this report on the Reliability Calculations tab of the Positions form.
Parameters
Enter the Type, Problem Code, Failure Code, Cause Code, Action Code, Sequence Number, Start
Day, and Scale Multiplier.
Report Type
Consumer
Reliability chart
Description
Print the reliability chart.
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Reliability Calculations
Note: You may also access this report on the Reliability Calculations tab of the Positions form.
Parameters
Enter the Type, Problem Code, Failure Code, Cause Code, Action Code, Sequence Number, Start
Day, and Scale Multiplier.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Table of Equipment with Custom Fields
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, Description, Class, Category, Location, Custom Field,
Value, Text, and Department.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Select Equipment > Reports > Asset Sustainability > Total Annual Energy Use.
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Organization.
Year (YYYY)—Enter the specific year for which to retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
Unreliability chart
Description
Print the unreliability chart.
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Reliability Calculations
Note: You may also access this report on the Reliability Calculations tab of the Positions form.
Parameters
Enter U for Type to print the unreliability chart.
Enter the Problem Code, Failure Code, Cause Code, Action Code, Sequence Number, Start Day,
and Scale Multiplier.
Report Type
Consumer
Warranty claims
Description
Displays a list of claims filed against an equipment warranty.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Warranty Claims
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Claim, Supplier, Equipment, Status, Warranty, System Level, Assembly
Level, and Component Level.
Summary—Select to print the warranty summary.
Settlement Details—Select to print closing details.
Filed Date—Select to print the filed date.
Activities—Select to print work order activities.
Sort By—Select to sort by Supplier, Equipment, or Warranty.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Warranty > Warranties > Warranty Claim vs. Settlement Chart
Parameters
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Weekly Booked Hours by Department
Parameters
Enter the Department, Employee, andOrganization.
Enter the Start Date for the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Assets > Work Order Repair Costs Chart
Note: You may also access this report on the Work Order Repair Costs Chart tab of the Positions
and Systems forms.
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Organization.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for which to retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
WO cost by equipment
Description
Includes a list of work order costs per piece of equipment.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > WO Cost by Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, Department, Class, Category, Location, Minimum Cost,
and Reporting Currency.
Applicable Exchange Rate—Select one of the following options:
• Actual—Select to calculate the conversion based on the exchange rate on the work order’s creation
date.
• Current—Select to calculate the conversion based on the active exchange rate.
The system calculates the conversions on the printed report.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > WO Cost by Type, Cost Code, or Dept
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Cost Code, Department, and WO Type.
Show Costs By—Select to sort by Department, Cost Code, or WO Type.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > WO Cost of Equipment Per Location
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Location Class, and Location.
Date Fromand Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
WO cost summary
Description
Includes itemized and total cost information (labor, materials, services, and tool costs) by equipment
for open and closed work orders.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > WO Cost Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Class, Category, Location, Type, Equipment, Department,
Trade, Reporting Currency, WO Status, Cost Code, WO Class, and Include WOs.
Current Exchange Rate—Select to calculate the conversion based on the active exchange rate.
Otherwise, the system calculates the conversion based on the exchange rate on the work order’s
creation date. The system calculates the conversions on the printed report.
Show Child Equipment—Select to show work order costs for children of the selected Equipment.
The system includes only the children for which costs roll up to the parent.
Note: You can select Show Child Equipment only if Equipment is entered.
Show Details—Select to display the work order details in addition to the work order cost information.
Group By—Select to group by Location, Department, Cost Code, Equipment, or Trade.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Asset Management Services > Print Customer Charges
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Customer, Department, Equipment, and Project.
Completed Work Orders—Select to include completed work orders only.
Released Work Orders—Select to include released work orders only.
Both—Select to include completed and released work orders.
Completed From and Completed To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Asset Management Services > Print Customer Contract
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Customer Contract, and Customer.
Pricing Schedules—Select to display pricing schedules on the report.
Arranged WO Types—Select to display arranged work order types.
Custom Tariffs/Part Charges—Select to display custom tariffs and part charges if Custom Trade
Rates and Custom Part Charges are selected on the related Pricing Schedule Record View page.
Related Customer Contracts—Select to display unfinished/approved related customer contracts on
the report.
Fixed Payments—Select to display fixed payments on the report
Calculated Work Orders—Select to display calculated work orders on the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Print invoice
Description
Prints an invoice for a specific customer and work order.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Asset Management Services > Print Invoice
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Invoice, Customer, Work Order, and Status.
Report Type
Consumer
Budget reports
Generate reports related to budget functions.
Budget analysis
Description
Displays all work orders that are associated with the selected budget along with actual, estimated, and
remaining parts, labor, and tool costs.
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > Budget Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Budget Structure, Budget Term, Cost Type, Cost Status, Period From,
Period To, Department, Department Group, WO Location, WO Location Group, Equipment,
Equipment Group, WO Type, WO Type Group, Cost Code, Cost Code Group, Project, and Project
Group.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > Budget Position Details
Parameters
Enter the Budget Structure, Budget Term, Period, WO Location, WO Location Group, Department,
Department Group, Equipment, Equipment Group, WO Type, WO Type Group, Cost Type, Cost
Type Group, Cost Code, Cost Code Group, Project, and Project Group.
Show Total (Or Positions)—Select to display remaining planned and on-order amounts. Unselect to
display actual planned and on-order amounts.
Free Budget—Select to sort by Spent, On Order, Planned, or All.
Report Type
Consumer
Budget summary
Description
Displays the calculated estimated, actual, and remaining costs for a selected budget.
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > Budget Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Budget Structure, and Budget Term.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > Budgets Consistency Control
Parameters
Enter the Budget Structure and Budget Term.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > List of Budget Codes
Parameters
Enter the Organization.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > List of Budgets (Lower Level)
Parameters
Enter the Budget Structure, Budget Term, Period, WO Location, WO Location Group, Department,
Department Group, Equipment, Equipment Group, WO Type, WO Type Group, Cost Type, Cost
Type Group, Cost Code, Cost Code Group, Project, and Project Group.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Budgets > List of Budgets (Top Level)
Parameters
Enter the Budget Structure and Budget Term.
Report Type
Consumer
Calibrations reports
Generate reports related to calibrations functions.
Calibration analysis
Description
Displays a list of completed calibration work orders by department that have resulted in the specified
minimum number of consecutive or non-consecutive calibration statuses of pass or fail.
The report allows you to identify patterns in the results of calibration work orders to determine whether
the frequency of calibration PMs should be adjusted, whether the equipment should be replaced, etc.
Using Min. # of Calibrations, the system determines the actual number of completed calibration work
orders to retrieve for the report. If the actual number of completed calibration work orders is less than
the value specified for Min. # of Calibrations, the system does not display any results. However, if
the number of completed work orders is greater than or equal to the value of Min. # of Calibrations,
the system displays all of the work orders.
Calibration work orders are considered consecutive if there are no other work orders for the equipment
containing test points that were completed between the work orders in question.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Calibrations > Calibration Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, System, Equipment, Class, Category, and Equipment
Criticality.
Min. # of Calibrations—Enter the minimum number of work orders to retrieve for each piece of
equipment based on the selection criteria. Min. # of Calibrations is a required field.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Calibrations > Calibration Due Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, System, Equipment, Class, Category, Equipment Criticality,
and Assigned To.
No Backlog—Select to not print work orders whose planned completion date is less than today’s date.
Show MEC Details—Select to display MEC work order details for multiple equipment work orders.
Sort By—Select to sort by Planned Comp. Date or Equipment.
Due By—Enter the due date for the calibration. Due By is a required field.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Calibrations > Calibration Record Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Department, PM Schedule, Equipment, Type, Equipment
Criticality, Location, Trade, Status, Assigned To, Assigned By, Person Responsible, and System.
Select one or more of the following options:
• Scheduled Date Range—Select to print a list of all calibration work orders for a scheduled date
range.
• Reprint—Select to reprint a list of all calibration work orders that have already been printed.
• Include Activities—Select to include all work order activities for all the work orders included in the
report output.
• Work Order Custom Fields—Select to include all work order custom fields that have been set up
to print on work orders for all the work orders included in the report output.
• Equipment Custom Fields—Select to include all equipment custom fields for all the equipment on
the work orders included in the report output.
• By Person Responsible—Select to sort the report output by the person responsible.
• Search MEC WOs—Select to search multiple equipment work orders.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Calibrations > Calibration Reverse Traceability
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Part, Lot, Department, Deviation, and UOM.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. End Date is
a required field.
Report Type
Consumer
Customer request
Description
Prints a copy of a customer request.
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Call Center > Customer Request
Parameters
Enter the Customer Request, Status, Assigned To, Customer, Employee, Department, Provider,
Service Category, Service Problem Code, and Equipment.
Customer Information—Select to display the customer's information on the report.
Action Requests—Select to include any action requests on the report.
Remarks—Select to print the customer's remarks on the report.
Custom/WO Custom Fields—Select to include all custom fields and work order custom fields on the
report.
Request Date and Promise Date—Enter the requested date and the promised date for the customer's
request.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Call Center > Knowledge Base Articles
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Knowledge Base Article, Status, Language, Department, Provider, Service
Category, and Service Problem Code.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Call Center > Penalty Deduction Detail
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Equipment, Service Problem Code, and Provider.
Include Work Order Custom Fields—Select to include work order custom fields in this report.
Include Service Problem Code Custom Fields—Select to include service problem code custom
fields in this report.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Operations > Reports > Call Center > Penalty Deduction Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Equipment, and Service Problem Code.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Contract reports
Generate reports related to contract functions.
Contract classes
Description
Displays a list of the different contract classes.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > Contract Classes
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Contract Class, and Language.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > List of Debit Discounts
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Contract, Store, Supplier, and Status.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > List of Existing Contracts
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, and Store.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > List of Purchases Under Contract
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Supplier, and Contract.
Select to include All Lines or only Open Lines.
Report Type
Consumer
Print contract
Description
Prints a copy of the contract.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > Print Contract
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Contract, Supplier, and Store.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Contracts > Request Discount Based on Purchases
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Part, Description, For Store, Number of Months, Supplier, and Part Class.
Report Type
Consumer
Fleet reports
Generate reports related to fleet functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Fleet > Fleet Billing Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Fleet Customer, and Bill.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work | Reports | Fleet | Vehicle Ticket Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Ticket, Status, Type, Fleet Customer, Vehicle, Received Vehicle, Issued
To, Cost Code, and Ticket Class.
Include PM Details—Select to print PM details.
Include Billing Details—Select to print billing details.
Print Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields.
Include Exceptions—Select to print exceptions.
Include Billing Adjustments—Select to print billing adjustments.
Print Attachments—Select to print document attachments associated with vehicle tickets in addition
to the vehicle ticket.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the vehicle ticket.
Select Records By—Select to sort by Issued Date, Returned Date, or Completed Date.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Start Date
and End Date are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
VMRS activities
Description
Prints a list displaying activity details for VMRS work orders.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Fleet > VMRS Activities
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Trade, Department, Work Order, Status, Reason for Repair,
Work Accomplished, Technician Part Failure, Manufacturer, System Level, Assembly Level, and
Component Level.
Note: The values available for Assembly Level are based on the system-level code. The values
available for Component Level are based on a combination of the system-level code and the
assembly-level code.
Show MEC Details—Select to display MEC work order details for multiple equipment work orders.
Activity Start Date and Activity End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve
data.
Report Type
Consumer
Healthcare reports
Generate reports related to healthcare functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Work Orders
Parameters
Enter Organization, Work Order, Department, PM Schedule, Type, Equipment, WO Type, Trade,
Equipment Criticality, Status, Assigned To, Assigned By.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to print the report.
Include Instruction List—Select to include a list of instructions in the report.
Include Work Order Custom Fields—Select to include the custom fields from the work order in the
report.
Include Work Order User Defined Fields—Select to include the user defined fields from the work
order in the report.
Include Equipment Custom Fields—Select to include the custom fields from the equipment in the
report.
Include Equipment User Defined Fields—Select to include the user defined fields from the equipment
in report.
Include Equipment Tracking Details—Select to include the equipment tracking details in the report.
Include Work Order Compliance Details—Select to include the work order compliance details in the
report.
Print Attachments—Select to print files attached to the work order with the report. Attached files may
originate from the following sources: the associated work order, equipment, projects, departments,
parent work orders, and locations.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the work order.
Booked Hours—Select to print the booked hours section details in the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Equipment List Detail- Healthcare
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Department, Status, Type, and Class.
Include Totals—Select to calculate and include totals for all numeric fields in the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Labor productivity-healthcare
Description
Print the labor productivity healthcare report.
Menu Path
Administration > Reports > Labor Productivity- Healthcare
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Employee, Trade, and Department.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report parameters selected.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Group By—Select to group the report data by None, Day, or Week.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Medical Equipment Work Orders by Criticality
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Criticality, and Equipment Class.
Date From and Date To—Enter the dates for which to retrieve data.
Show Totals—Select to display subtotals and grand totals.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > PM Completion Report for Life Support Equipment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Class, Equipment Category, and Criticality.
Date From and Date To—Enter the dates for which to retrieve data.
Show Totals—Select to display subtotals and grand totals.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Work Order List-Detail
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, WO Type, Department, Status, , Equipment Type, Equipment
Class, Equipment Category, Assigned To, Priority, Criticality, Action Code, Problem Code,
Failure Code, and Problem Code.
Date From and Date To—Enter the dates for which to retrieve data.
Show Totals—Select to display subtotals and grand totals.
Report Type
Basic
Hospitality reports
Generate reports related to hospitality functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Actual Labor Hours Against Estimated-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property, and Profession.
Group By—Select one of the following options:
• None—Select to not group by day or week.
• Day—Select to group by day.
• Week—Select to group by week.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Annual Energy Use-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Equipment and Property.
No. of Years—Enter the number of years for which to run the report.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report parameters selected.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
CO2 emissions-hospitality
Description
Displays equipment (in graphical form) in best and worst order based on CO2 emissions for the selected
year and compares the data with the previous two years.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > CO2 Emissions
Parameters
Enter the Property, Equipment, Commodity, and Reporting Year.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Display Graph in Gray Scale—Select to display the graph report in gray scale.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Capital Performance Evaluation-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property, Equipment, Request Priority, Request Amount Minimum, Reporting Currency,
Request Status, and GAS Index Evaluation Period (Days).
Note: Request Amount Minimum selects requests where the estimated material cost plus the
estimated labor cost is greater than the minimum entered.
GAS Tracked Equipment—Select to include GAS-tracked equipment in this report.
Green Related Request—Select to include green-related requests in this report.
Sort By—Select to sort by GAS Cost, Return Amount, or Return %.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Administration > Reports > Degree Day Analysis-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter Property and Region .
Include History—Select to include historical data to allow a comparison between the actual temperature
data vs the historical temperature data.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to generate the report.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Administration > Reports > GAS Index Analysis-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property and Equipment.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Degree Days vs. Energy Consumption Type-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property, Commodity, Region, Start Date, and End Date.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > Degree Days vs. Energy Costs-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter Property, Commodity, and Region.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to generate the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Work Orders Healthcare
Parameters
Enter Organization, Work Order, Department, PM Schedule, Type, Equipment, WO Type, Trade,
Equipment Criticality, Status, Assigned To, Assigned By.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to print the report.
Task Instructions—Select to include a list of instructions in the report.
Work Order Custom Fields—Select to include the custom fields from the work order in the report.
Work Order User Defined Fields—Select to include the user defined fields from the work order in the
report.
Equipment Custom Fields—Select to include the custom fields from the equipment in the report.
Equipment User Defined Fields—Select to include the user defined fields from the equipment in
report.
Equipment Tracking Details—Select to include the equipment tracking details in the report.
Work Order Compliance Details—Select to include the work order compliance details in the report.
Print Attachments—Select to print files attached to the work order with the report.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the work order.
Booked Hours—Select to print the booked hours section details in the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Incident Response Time Chart
Parameters
Enter the Property, From Status, and To Status.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for which to retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Incident Summary Chart
Parameters
Enter the Work Order, WO Priority, Status, Source, Room, Assigned To, First Name, Last Name,
VIP Status, Problem Code, Incident Details, and Property.
Select one of the following options by which to group the report details:
• Problem Code—Select to group by problem code.
• Incident Type—Select to group by incident type.
• Room—Select to group by room.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for which to retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Backlog Report-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property, Department, Profession, Type, Equipment, PM, Facility, WO Type, Priority,
Equipment Criticality, Status, Assigned To, and Scheduling Group.
Sort By—Select to sort by Start Date, Equipment, or Location.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
WO cost list-hospitality
Description
Displays the costs of a work order.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Cost List-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property and Work Order.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
WO cost summary-hospitality
Description
Includes itemized and total cost information (labor, materials, services, and tool costs) by equipment
for open and closed work orders.
Menu Path
Equipment > Reports > WO Cost Summary-Hospitality
Parameters
Enter the Property, Type, Equipment, Profession, Reporting Currency, Current Exchange Rate,
WO Status, and Include WOs.
Current Exchange Rate—Select to calculate the conversion based on the active exchange rate.
Otherwise, the system calculates the conversion based on the exchange rate on the work order’s
creation date. The system calculates the conversions on the printed report.
Show Child Equipment—Select to show work order costs for children of the selected Equipment.
The system includes only the children for which costs roll up to the parent.
Note: You can select Show Child Equipment only if Equipment is entered.
Show Details—Select to display the work order details in addition to the work order cost information.
Group By—Select to group by Equipment or Profession.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Inspection reports
Generate reports related to inspection functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Inspections > Inspection Route Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Type, Equipment, Location, Department, PM, Class, Category,
and Route.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Inspections > List of Inspections Results
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Category, Equipment Type, Equipment, Aspect, Point Type, Point,
Finding, Standard Work Order, Result, Minimum Value, and Maximum Value.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date by which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Inspections > List of Points to be Inspected
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Type, Equipment, Location, Department, Class, Category,
PM, Route, and Aspect.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date by which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Inspections > Status of Inspection Points
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Route, Work Order, PM, Equipment Type, Equipment, Location,
Department, Class, Category, and Route Status.
Report Type
Consumer
Materials reports
Generate reports related to materials functions.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Average Monthly Usage Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Part, Part Description, Number of Months, Preferred Supplier, and
Stock Class.
Report Type
Consumer
Consignment activity
Description
Displays a list of consignment activity.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Consignment Activity
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, and Supplier.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Goods Received Note
Parameters
Enter the Organization, PO Receipt, Transaction Code, From, From Code, To, To Code, Purchase
Requisition, Purchase Order, and Packing Slip.
Printed—Select to print transactions that have been previously printed.
Date—Enter the date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Goods Return Note
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Return, Supplier, and Return Status.
Reprint—Select to print a list of goods returned that have been printed previously.
Report Type
Basic
Inventory standard
Description
Displays a list of inventory items.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Inventory Standard
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Part, Class, Manufacturer, Preferred Supplier, Tracking Method, Store,
ABC Class, Reorder Qty., UOM, Stock Method, Minimum Quantity, Maximum Quantity, Bin, and
Reorder Level.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Kit Template
Parameters
Enter Organization, Kit Part, Part, and Store.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > List of Expired Kits
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Kit Part, Store, Lot, Class, and Category.
Expires By—Select the expiration date for the lot.
Report Type
Consumer
List of kits
Description
Displays a list of kits parts determined by the Track as Kit checkbox on the part record.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > List of Kits
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Kit Part, Store, Lot, Class, and Category.
Include Kit Content List—Select to include the contents of the kit in the report.
Include Kit Costs—Select to include the costs associated to the kit in the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > List of Outstanding Requisition Items
Parameters
Enter the Organization, For Store, From Store, From Supplier, Part, Requisition, Status, Originator,
Buyer,
Quotation Indicator, Cost Code, and Task.
Req Items on Order—Select to print requisition items that are on order.
Requisitioned Items Not Yet Ordered—Select to print requisition items that have not been ordered.
All Requisition Items—Select to print all requisition items, regardless of the order status.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Basic
List of stock
Description
Displays stock quantity, reorder level, reserved quantity, and quantity on order grouped by store and
sorted by store, part, and part organization.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > List of Stock
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Part, Part Class, and Supplier.
Non-consignment—Select to print non-consignment items.
Consignment Item—Select to print consignment items.
Selection Options—Select one of the following options:
• All Stock—Select to print all stock records.
• Stock Below Reorder Level—Select to print stock that is below the reorder level.
• Stock At/Below Minimum Level—Select to print stock this is at or below the minimum level.
• Stock Requiring New Order—Select to print stock requiring a new order.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Monthly Usage Trends
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Part, and Part Description.
Month From and Month To—Enter the starting and ending month for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Parts Currently Reserved/Allocated
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Department, and Part.
Sort By—Select to sort by Part, WO/Activity, or Store.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Part stockouts
Description
Print a list of stockouts (R5STOCKOUTS) for parts.
Menu Path
Material > Reports > Part Stockouts
Parameters
Enter the Store, Part, andClass.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Physical Inventory Discrepancy
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Physical Inventory, Part, Store, and Status.
Include Null Quantities—Select to include items with null quantities on the report.
Include Non-Discrepancy Items—Select to include items without any discrepancies on the report.
Group By—Select to group by Store or Part.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Print Build Kit List
Parameters
Session ID—Enter the session ID for which to generate the report.
Include Front Page—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Kits > Breakup Kit
Parameters
Enter Kit Part, Store, and Kit Lot.
Click Retrieve Parts.
Enter Store, Bin, Repair Bin and relevant parts information.
Click Print Kit Restock List.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Print Physical Inventory List
Parameters
Enter the Physical Inventory.
Select one or more of the following options:
• Print Quantity—Select to print the quantity.
• Order By Bin—Select to sort by bin.
• Print Assets—Select to print assets.
• Discrepancies Only—Select to print stocktake discrepancies only. Stocktake discrepancies occur
when there are discrepancies between Expected Qty. and Physical Qty. of inventory items.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Print Pick Ticket
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Activity, From Pick Ticket, To Pick Ticket, and Store.
Sort By—Select to sort by Pick Ticket or Work Order.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date by which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Basic
Print requisition
Description
Select the originator, requisition type, requisition number, status and/or buyer to print a specific
requisition. Otherwise, the report includes all requisitions. Includes option to convert totals to Euro
currency.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Print Requisition
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Originator, Requisition Type, Requisition, Status, and Buyer.
Quotation—Select to print the quotation number if a quotation is associated with the requisition.
Date—Enter the requisition date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Purchase History Per Item/Supplier
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Part, Work Order, and Task.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Return summary
Description
Displays comprehensive information, per purchase order, about approved returns to suppliers.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Return Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Store, Part, and Purchase Order.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Stock Issues History by Part
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, From Part, To Part, Class, and Number of Months.
Report Type
Basic
Stock transactions
Description
Lists all approved inventory transactions for a specified period of time.
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Stock Transactions
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Part, Part Class, Iss/Recv Entity, Iss/Recv Party, Counter Entity, Counter
Party, Transaction Type, and Consignment Supplier.
Non-Consignment—Select to print non-consignment items.
Consignment Item—Select to print consignment items.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Start Date
and End Date are required fields.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Materials > Reports > Stock Value Listing by Part Type
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Part, Store, Part Class , Stock Class, Supplier, Commodity, Manufacturer
Part Number, Manufacturer, Category, Currency, and Part Type.
Report Type
Basic
Project reports
Generate reports related to project functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > Cost Summary By Project and Area
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > List of WOs for Project
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Note: If you are using multi-organization security (MOS), and you select a master Project in your
selection criteria, the system only retrieves those work orders created in the specific organizations to
which you have access.
Include Completed—Select to include completed work orders on the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > Project Budget Code Cost Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
ReportsWork > Reports > Projects > Project Cost Breakdown
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Project, and Budget Code.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > Project Cost Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Report Type
Consumer
Project POs
Description
Displays a summarized list of purchase orders created to procure materials and external services.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > Project POs
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Note: If you are using multi-organization security (MOS), and you select a master Project in your
selection criteria, the system only retrieves those purchase orders created for work orders in the specific
organizations to which you have access.
Include Completed—Select to include completed purchase orders on the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Projects > Project Summary Chart
Note: You must select a project for which to generate the report, and then click the Project Summary
Chart tab.
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Project.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page with the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Purchasing reports
Generate reports related to purchasing functions.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Approved POs Awaiting Delivery
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Cost Code, Purchase Order, Part, Store, and Task.
Start Date—Enter the starting date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Blanket Order List
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Blanket Order, For Store, and Class.
Comments—Select to print comments on the report.
Release Information—Select to include release information on the report.
Terms/Clauses—Select to include terms and clauses information on the report.
Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields on the report.
Approvers—Select to print information about the authorized approvers on the report.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
List of invoices
Description
Displays supplier invoice information.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > List of Invoices
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Supplier.
Select to sort by Date Approved, Matched, or Date Recorded.
Start Date—Enter the starting date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Pricing variance
Description
Displays a list of purchase orders where discrepancies exist between the purchase order and the
invoice.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Pricing Variance
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Purchase Order, Buyer, Class, and Variance Type.
Group By—Select to group the report data by Purchase Order, Class, Supplier, or Buyer.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Print PO
Description
Includes a purchase order header and both part and service line items. By default, the report selects
the current revision of purchase orders with a status of "Ready for printing" or "Approved" and those
that do not have "Printed" selected. Print purchase orders that do not have a status of "Ready for
printing" or "Approved," or those that already have "Printed" selected by specifying a purchase order
number on the parameter form.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Print PO
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Store, Purchase Order, and Buyer.
Print Attachments—Select to print document attachments associated with purchase orders in addition
to the purchase order.
Include All Revisions—Select to include all revisions to the purchase order.
Show Internal Part#—Select to include the internal part number.
Include Cost Code—Select to include the cost code.
Reprint—Select to print purchase orders that have been printed previously.
Note: The system prints only the requisition total in Euro currency.
Date—Enter the order date for which to retrieve data.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the purchase order.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Purchase History Per PO/Supplier
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, and Status.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
PO cost summary
Description
Displays cost information for purchase orders.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > PO Cost Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Class, Status, Supplier, Cost Code, Buyer, Project, Store, Currency, and
PO Status.
Include Details—Select to display the purchase order details.
Group By—Select to group the report data by Store, Supplier, Cost Code, Buyer, or Project.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
PO status
Description
Displays a list of purchase order information including cost and receipt information with optional totals.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > PO Status
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Purchase Order, Status, Class, Supplier, Part, Trade, and Catalog
Reference.
Include Totals—Select to include the purchase order totals on the report.
Order Date—Enter the order date for which to display purchase orders.
Due Date—Enter the due date for which to displays purchase orders.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > POs Awaiting Invoicing
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Supplier, Purchase Order, and Store.
Include Matched—Select to include invoices that have a status of Matched.
Report Type
Basic
Quotation summary
Description
Displays a summary of the quotations from all suppliers associated with an RFQ; allows you to easily
compare all supplier responses received from quotations.
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Quotes > Quotation Summary
Parameters
Enter the RFQ, Quotation Status, Part, Supplier, Quotation, Trade, Task, and Organization.
Show RFQs—Select to sort Per Part/Service or Per Supplier.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Quotes > Request for Quotation
Parameters
Enter the RFQ, Quotation, Quotation Status, Part, Supplier, Trade, Task, and Organization.
Include Quotation Comments—Select to include quotation comments in this report.
Include Part/Services Comments—Select to include part/services comments in this report.
Include Cancelled Quotations—Select to include cancelled quotations in this report.
Include Response Values—Select to include response values in this report.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Quotes > Request for Quotation Summary
Parameters
Enter the RFQ, Status, Part, Supplier, Organization, Task, and Trade.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Purchasing > Reports > Vendor Lead Time
Parameters
Enter the Supplier, Organization, Purchase Order, Status, and Part.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Work reports
Generate reports related to work functions.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Actual Labor Hours Against Estimated
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, and Department.
Group By—Select one of the following options:
• None—Select to not group by day or week.
• Day—Select to group by day.
• Week—Select to group by week.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Process > Generate/Release WOs
Parameters
No parameters
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Booked Labor By Activity
Parameters
Enter Organization and Work Order.
Report Type
Consumer
Call Center WO
Description
Displays a work order with fields commonly used by off-site call center contractors who do not have
access to the system
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Call Center WO
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Status, Provider, Department, Service Problem Code, WO
Type, Priority, Equipment, Location, Trade, and Date Range Type.
Include Child Work Orders—Select to include child work orders on the report.
Include Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields on the report.
Print Attachments—Select to print attachments associated with the work order. Attached files may
originate from the following sources: the associated work order, equipment, projects, departments,
parent work orders, and locations.
Include MEC Work Orders—Select to include MEC work orders on the report.
Print MEC Attachments—Select to print MEC attachments.
Barcode—Select to print the barcode for the work order.
Include Customer Requests—Select to print customer requests associated with the work order.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the work order.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Projects > Cost Summary By Transaction Date
Parameters
Enter Organization, Location, Department, Cost Code, Equipment, Equipment Type, Class,
Reporting Currency, Status, Include WOs and Trade.
Include Front Page—Select to include a front page on the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Show Details—Select to display the work order details in addition to the work order cost information.
Group By—Select to group the report by Location, Department, Cost Code, Equipment, or Trade.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date the costs were incurred for which to
generate the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Customer Invoice Details
Parameters
Enter Organization, Invoice, Customer, Contract, Status, and Contract Type.
Enter Created Start Date and Created End Date for which to generate the report.
Select to generate the invoice details report on the Charge Category Adjustments, Subcategory
Adjustment or Both.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Customer Request Chart
Parameters
Enter Type, Assigned To, Department, Employee, Provider, Service Category, Service Problem
Code, and Status.
Request Date and Promise Date—Enter the requested date and the promised date for the customer's
request.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Daily Hours Worked Per Employee
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Employee, and Hour Type.
If you leave Employee and Hour Type blank, the system retrieves all employee data working all types
of hours.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Daily Trade Schedule
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, and Department.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
Delinquent PM summary
Description
Displays a list of employees that are assigned to past due PM work orders. Also displays the total count
of past due PM work orders and total past due work hours.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Delinquent PM Summary
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, and Trade.
Select Include Details to include work order details in the report.
Equipment profile
Description
Print details for a piece of equipment, or a list of work orders, or PM schedules associated to the
equipment.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Equipment Profile
Parameters
Enter the Equipment, Organization, Type, Class, Category, and Cost Code.
Enter the Work History Start Date and Work History End Date.
Expired warranties
Description
Displays a list of all warranties that have expired.
Menu Path
Work | Reports | Expired Warranties
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Type, Equipment, and Location.
Near Threshold—Select to include warranties that are near their threshold.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Future Maintenance Cost
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, Equipment Type, Equipment Class, and Department.
Include Work Orders—Select to include work orders in this report.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Hours Needed for Tasks
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, and Task.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Labor Required Per Day or Trade
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, and Department.
Select one of the following options:
• Per Day—Select to sort by day.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > List of All PM Schedules
Parameters
Enter the Organization.
Sort By—Select one of the following options:
• PM—Select to sort by PM.
• Nesting Reference—Select to sort by nesting reference.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Permits > List of Permit Issues
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Permit, Work Order, Equipment, and Type.
Include Inactive Permits—Select to include inactive permits in the report.
Sort By—Select to sort by Equipment or Work Order.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > List of WOs Bypassed Due to Nesting
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Department.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > List of Work Orders
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, Equipment, Assigned To, and Priority.
Select to group the work order report by Department, Equipment, Assigned To, or Priority.
Scheduled Start Date and Scheduled End Date—Enter the scheduled start date and end date to
retrieve the data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Long Term WO List
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, WO Type, Priority, Trade, Department, Location, PM, Work
Order, Project, Type, Assigned To, and Assigned By.
Search MEC WOs—Select to search multiple equipment work orders.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Start Date
and End Date are required fields.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Material Requirements Analysis
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, PM, Equipment, WO Type, Priority, Trade, Location, Project,
Type, and Work Order.
Direct Purchase Due Date is After Start Date—Select to include stock items where the direct purchase
date is after the work order start date.
Qty Required > Qty in Stock—Select to include stock items where the quantity required for the work
order is greater than the quantity in stock.
Search MEC WOs—Select to include MEC work orders on the report.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Meter Based PM Due Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, PM, Meter UOM, WO Class, and Department.
Sort By—Select to sort by Equipment, PM, or Estimated Due Date.
Due By—Enter the due date for which to print the report. Due By is a required field.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Monthly Scheduling Details
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Department.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Scheduled Labor—Select to display labor previously scheduled to work orders for the organization
and department.
Employee Exceptions—Select to display employee labor exceptions for the department. Exceptions
include days the employees cannot work due to employee time off and company holidays.
Planned Parts—Select to display parts planned for work orders for the organization and department.
Scheduled Tools—Select to display tools scheduled for work orders for the organization and
department.
Report Type
Consumer
Part failures
Description
Displays the percentage of parts that failed versus parts that were issued. Data for this report comes
from failures listed on the Part Failures page and the Parts page of the Work Orders form.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Part Failures
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Part, Asset ID, Problem Code, Failure Code, Action Code, and Cause
Code.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending dates for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Permits > Permits for WOs
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Permit Reference, Permit, and Work Order.
Report Type
Consumer
PM compliance
Description
Includes compliance details for PM work orders.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > PM Compliance
Parameters
Enter Organization, PM, Department, Equipment, Assigned To, and Assigned By.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to generate the report.
Report Type
Consumer
PM forecasting
Description
Displays a printed representation of a PM forecasting session similar to what is displayed on the actual
PM Forecasting form.
Menu Path
Work > WO Planning > PM Forecasting
Parameters
None
Report Type
Basic
PM schedule profile
Description
Displays a list of PM schedule details and activity information along with optional task instructions and
route information.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > PM Schedule Profile
Parameters
Enter the PM Schedule, Organization, Type, Class, Trade, and Equipment.
Select Include Task Instructions to print with the report.
Select Include Route Equipment to print with the report.
Enter the Start Date and End Date for the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Asset Management Services > Print Customer Contract
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Customer Contract, and Customer.
Pricing Schedules—Select to display pricing schedules on the report.
Arranged WO Types—Select to display arranged work order types.
Custom Tariffs/Part Charges—Select to display custom tariffs and part charges if Custom Trade
Rates and Custom Part Charges are selected on the related Pricing Schedule Record View page.
Related Customer Contracts—Select to display unfinished/approved related customer contracts on
the report.
Fixed Payments—Select to display fixed payments on the report
Calculated Work Orders—Select to display calculated work orders on the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Permit to Work
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Permit to Work, Equipment, PTW Type, Department, and Risk.
Required Start Date and Required End Date—Enter the required starting and ending date for which
to retrieve data.
Include Comments—Select to include the permit to work comments.
Include Safety Comments—Select to print safety comments for the permit to work.
Include LOTO Comments—Select to print lockout/tagout comments for the permit to work.
Include User Defined Fields—Select to print user defined fields added to the permit to work.
Include LOTO Tags—Select to print tags for lockout/tagout procedures implemented for the permit to
work.
Include Hazard Rating System—Select to print health hazards, flammability, instability, and special
hazard records for the permit to work.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Short WO Cards
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Department, PM Schedule, Type, Equipment, Location,
Priority, WO Type, Trade, Project, Equipment Criticality, Status, Customer, Property, Building,
Floor/Unit, Assigned To, Assigned By, Person Responsible, From Point, To Point, Standard WO,
and Manufacturer.
Scheduled Date Range—Select to print the work order card for the scheduled date range.
Reprint—Select to reprint the work order card.
Include Child Work Orders—Select to include child work orders on the work order card.
Work Order Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields added for work orders on the work order
card.
Equipment Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields added for equipment on the work order card.
Work Order User Defined Fields—Select to print user defined fields added for work orders on the
work order card.
Equipment User Defined Fields—Select to print user defined fields for equipment on the work order
card.
By Responsible Person—Select to print the work order activity details by the person responsible on
the work order card.
Hide Cost Values—Select to hide cost values on the work order card.
Prevent Update Print Flag—Select to prevent users from marking the records returned printed.
Print Attachments—Select to print document attachments associated with work orders in addition to
the work order card.
Print Images—Select to print images associated with work orders in addition to the work order card.
Note: You can only print document attachments that are Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
(.PDF) files.
Print MEC Attachments—Select to print MEC document attachments associated with work orders in
addition to the work order card.
Search MEC Work Orders—Select to search multiple equipment work orders.
Show Defer Maintenance Activities—Select to display all work order activities where Defer
Maintenance is selected.
Include Actual Parts—Select to print parts added for work orders on the work order card.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Print Work Order
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Department, PM Schedule, Type, Equipment, Location,
Priority, WO Type, Trade, Project, Equipment Criticality, Status, Customer, Property, Building,
Floor/Unit, Assigned To, Assigned By, Person Responsible, From Point , and To Point.
Scheduled Date Range—Select to print work orders based on the Target Date.
Reprint—Select to print work orders that have been printed previously.
Include Child Work Orders—Select to print child work orders on the work order card.
Work Order Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields added for work orders on the work order
card.
Equipment Custom Fields—Select to print custom fields added for equipment on the work order card.
Print Attachments—Select to print document attachments associated with work orders in addition to
the work order card.
Note: You can only print document attachments that are Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
(.PDF) files.
By Responsible Person—Select to group report data by the person responsible.
Barcode—Select to print the barcode on the work order card.
Include Linear Reference Details—Select to print linear reference details on the work order card.
Include MEC Work Orders—Select to print MEC work orders on the work order card.
Print MEC Attachments—Select to print MEC document attachments associated with work orders in
addition to the work order card.
Print Attachments—Select to print files attached to the work order with the report. Attached files may
originate from the following sources: the associated work order, equipment, projects, departments,
parent work orders, and locations.
Print Images—Select to print all images associated with the work order.
Include Customer Requests—Select to print customer requests on the work order card.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Proof of delivery
Description
Displays proof that a work order was delivered or performed.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Proof of Delivery
Parameters
Work Order—Enter the work order for which to run the report.
Include Front Page—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Mark Confidential—Select to print a confidential banner in the title of the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Qualifications > Qualification Expiration Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Employee Code, Employee Class, Employee Type, Trade, Department,
Qualification, and Qualification Class.
Sort By—Select to sort by Employee, Trade, Organization, Department, or Qualification.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Qualifications > Qualification Requirement Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Employee, Employee Class, Employee Type, Trade, Trade Class, Task,
Department, and Qualification.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > WO Planning > PM Forecasting > Forecasting tab
Parameters
None
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Select Work > Reports > Safety Review Required.
Parameters
Enter Organization.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting date and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Include Safety Records—Select to print safety records.
Include Permit Records—Select to print permit records.
Include LOTO Records—Select to print lockout/tagout records.
Include Out of Service—Select to print all PM, equipment, standard work order, and part records
marked Out of Service, but which meet the specified report criteria.
Report Type
Consumer
Schedule attainment
Description
Displays a summary of scheduled activities. View the number of activities that were scheduled and
worked on the same date, the number of activities that were scheduled but not started on the same
date, the number of activities that were worked on and not scheduled on the same date, as well as the
percentage of activities scheduled that were worked on the same date.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Schedule Attainment
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, Department, and Person Responsible.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Scheduled activities
Description
Displays information for scheduled activities.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Scheduled Activities
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Trade, Department, Maintenance Equipment, and Person
Responsible.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Scheduled – Actual Detail
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, Department, and Person Responsible.
Show Details of Activities Where—Select one of the following sort options: Scheduled but Not
Worked on the Same Date, Worked and Scheduled on the Same Date, or Worked but Not
Scheduled.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Shift employee
Description
Displays a list of employees on a shift grouped by department.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling
Shift Employee
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, Trade, and Shift.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Short Customer Invoice
Parameters
Enter Organization, Invoice, Customer, Contract, Status, and Contract Type.
Enter Created Start Date and Created End Date for which to generate the report.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Short Term WO List (Activities)
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, WO Type, Priority, Trade, Department , Location, PM, Work
Order, Project, Type, Equipment Criticality, and Status.
Include Multiple Equipment—Select to include multiple equipment on the report.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Short Term WO List (WOs)
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment, WO Type, Priority, Trade, Department, Location, PM, Work
Order, Project, Type, Equipment Criticality, Status, Assigned To, and Scheduling Group.
Search MEC WOs—Select to search multiple equipment work orders.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Tool usage
Description
Displays a list of work orders per tool.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Tool Usage
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Work Order, Department, and Tools.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
WO backlog report
Description
Displays a list of backlogged work orders.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Backlog Report
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Department, Trade, Type, Equipment, PM, Location, WO Type, Priority,
Equipment Criticality, Status, Assigned To, and Scheduling Group.
Warranty—Select to display the equipment warranty associated with the work order.
Show MEC Work Orders—Select to display multiple equipment work orders.
Sort By—Select to sort by Start Date, Equipment, or Location.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
WO aging
Description
Provides counts of work orders, per work order type, that are 1-10, 11-30, 31-60, 61-90, or over 90
days overdue.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Aging
Parameters
Enter the Organization and WO Type.
Report Type
Consumer
WO cost list
Description
Displays the costs of a work order.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Cost List
Parameters
Enter the Organization and Work Order.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Basic
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Cost Summary Graph
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Equipment Class, Category, Location, Type, Equipment , Department,
WO Class, Cost Code, Trade, Reporting Currency, WO Status, Include WOs, and Graph Type.
Current Exchange Rate—Select to print the current exchange rate.
Include Service—Select to print service details.
Include Labor—Select to print labor details.
Include Material—Select to print materials details.
Include Tools—Select to print tools details.
Group By—Select to group by Location, Department, Cost Code, Equipment, or Trade.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO On-Time Delivery by Employee
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Employee Code, Task, Class, Requested By, Problem Code, Priority,
Department, Work Order, and WO Type.
Report Type—Select to print a Summary, Detail, or Complete version of the report.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO On-Time Delivery by Trade
||
Parameters
Enter the Organization, Trade, Task, Assigned To, Class, Requested By, Problem Code, Priority,
Department, Work Order, and WO Type.
Report Type—Select to print a Summary, Detail, or Complete version of the report.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
WO statistics
Description
Displays statistical backlog information including the number of work orders: backlogged according to
Date From; scheduled to begin within the date range; backlogged at Start Date but completed within
the date range; and scheduled to begin within the date range and completed within the date range.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > WO Statistics
Parameters
Enter the Organization and WO Type.
Show Totals—Select to display the work order totals on the report.
Date From and Date To—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data. Date From
and Date To are required fields.
Report Type
Consumer
Work by employee
Description
Displays a list of all work orders where booked labor for an employee has been applied.
Menu Path
Work > Reports > Scheduling > Work by Employee
Parameters
Enter the Employee, Work Order, Equipment, Organization, and Status.
Start Date and End Date—Enter the starting and ending date for which to retrieve data.
Report Type
Consumer
Geographical Information Systems are important to companies with equipment spread over a large
area such as local governments/schools, oil and gas companies, utilities, etc. GIS systems are widely
used to show equipment spatially via maps. These maps provide a better understanding of the location
of the equipment, directions to the equipment, work history of the equipment, and the surrounding area
of the equipment in question.
Integrate Infor EAM (Infor EAM) with Environmental Systems Research Institute’s (ESRI)
GIS package so that you have the advantages of a GIS system paired with those of Infor EAM.
This chapter documents procedures completed in both the Infor EAM and ESRI GIS systems. As a
result, section headings include (Infor EAM) or (ESRI), if applicable, to identify in which system the
task should be performed.
• A GIS feature must reside within a layer that contains the GISOBJID attribute before you can create
a corresponding equipment record.
• The system creates equipment records based on the field mappings defined for the feature’s layer.
If a field mapping has not been defined, the system populates the field based on the GIS profile
defined on the user’s default preference record for the layer.
Note: If a field mapping for an attribute exists, the system always populates the equipment field
based on the data of the attribute, even if the attribute value is empty and the GIS profile value
contains data.
Field mappings are not defined for Layer, Location X, and Location Y. The system creates
equipment records based on an implied mapping where GIS is the owner and the data is automatically
mapped to the Layer, Location X, and Location Y fields in Infor EAM. If a feature is a line or polygon
feature, the system populates the Infor EAM Location X and Location Y based on the feature’s
center point.
• If more than one GIS attribute is mapped to a single Infor EAM field, the system concatenates the
data into the single field based on the Sequence and Delimiter values on the mapping record.
Likewise, if a GIS attribute that contains concatenated data is mapped into more than one Infor EAM
field, the system parses the data based on the Sequence and Delimiter values on the mapping
record.
• The system automatically defines the equipment as an Asset record if a field mapping does not
exist for the equipment type.
• The system assigns the equipment code of the equipment record based on any existing field mapping.
If a feature attribute is mapped to the equipment code field, the system assigns the equipment code
based on the field mapping even if the AUTOANUM installation parameter is set to Yes. If no field
mapping exists for the equipment code, the system automatically generates an equipment code
even if AUTOANUM is set to No.
• The Infor EAMClass, Location, Position, Parent, PO, and Part can be unique per Infor EAM
organization. This organization may or may not be the same organization of the equipment record.
If there is a mapping record for Class, Location, Position, Parent, PO,or Part, the system must
also populate the organization of Class, Location, Position, Parent, PO, or Part. If you map data
into these fields, you must also map the organization field for each of them.
If a field mapping does not exist for the organization of Class, Location, Position, Parent, PO,or
Part, the system populates the information based on the following:
• If the mapped value for Class, Location, Position, Parent , PO , or Part belongs to a single
organization—The system copies the organization.
• If the mapped value for Class , Location , Position , Parent , PO , or Part belongs to multiple
organizations—The system attempts to populate the organization based on the GIS profile defined
on the user’s default preference record for the layer.
• If the mapped value for Class , Location, Position , Parent, PO, or Part > belongs to multiple
organizations and there is not a default GIS profile—The system attempts to populate the
organization based on the organization of the equipment record.
6 Synchronize features with equipment records so that the corresponding feature is created within
GIS.
2 Click .
3 Layer—Select the layer for which to view features without corresponding equipment records.
4 Consider only features selected on the map—Select to only compare features that are selected
on the map.
5 Consider only features with a GISOBJID—Select to only compare features that reference a
GISOBJID number.
Note: Unselect Consider only equipment with a GISOBJID to compare features without a
GISOBJID number, which enables you to create equipment records for existing features that were
not previously integrated.
6 Click View Discrepancies. The system displays features for which there are no corresponding
equipment records.
7 Select—Select the features for which you want to create corresponding equipment records.
The system automatically selects all of the features. Remove individual features from the list by
unselecting the line.
Note: To select all lines at once, click Select All. To unselect all lines at once, click Unselect All.
8 Click Create Equipment. The system creates corresponding equipment records within Infor EAM.
The system populates Result and Creation Date/Time and unselects all features for which
corresponding equipment records were created.
Note: If the system cannot create a corresponding equipment record for a selected feature, it displays
the reason in Result. The feature remains selected.
You must have insert privileges in Infor EAM to create an equipment record. Contact your system
administrator for more information.
The system assigns the feature’s existing GISOBJID number to the equipment record. If the feature
does not have a GISOBJID number, the system automatically generates one.
The system automatically populates the equipment record’s Layer, Location X, and Location Y.If
the feature is not a point feature, the system automatically populates Location X and Location Y
for its corresponding equipment record based on the center of the feature.
4 Layer—Select the layer for which to view equipment records without corresponding features.
5 Consider only equipment with a GISOBJID—Select to only compare equipment records that reference
a GISOBJID number. The GISOBJID number is referenced on the Infor EAM equipment record
in the GIS ID field.
Note: If you unselect Consider only equipment with a GISOBJID, the system compares
equipment records that do not have a GIS ID but do reference a GIS Profile or GIS layer.
6 Click View Discrepancies. The system displays equipment records for which there are no
corresponding features.
The system automatically populates Layer, Location X, and Location Y for each equipment record
if available.
Note: The system only displays equipment records for which you have query web service
permissions. Contact your system administrator for more information.
7 Select—Select the equipment records for which you want to create corresponding features.
The system automatically selects all of the equipment records. Remove individual records from the
list by unselecting the line.
Note: To select all lines at once, click Select All. To unselect all lines at once, click Unselect All.
8 Layer—Select a layer for each equipment record for which you want to create corresponding features.
9 Location X and Location Y—Enter the X and Y coordinates for each equipment record for which
you want to create corresponding features.
Note: Highlight the equipment record within the list, click Record, and then click the location on the
map within ESRI’s ArcMap page on which to place the feature. The system determines the X and
Y coordinates and automatically populates Location X and Location Y.
If the selected layer contains line or polygon features, click on the map more than once to include
all necessary coordinates for the feature. The system saves the additional X and Y coordinates.
If you enter Location X and Location Y with the Record button and then need to edit the fields
with the Record button, you must first right-click on the equipment record, and then select Clear
Map Coordinates.
10 Click Create Feature(s). The system creates corresponding features within ESRI’s GIS for each
selected equipment record and highlights the newly created features on the map. The system
populates Result and Creation Date/Time and unselects all equipment records for which
corresponding features were created.
Note: If the system cannot create a corresponding feature for a selected equipment record, it displays
the reason in Result. The equipment record remains selected.
GISOBJID/GIS ID), provides you with a list of discrepancies, and enables you to synchronize the
attribute values.
Field mappings are not defined for a feature/equipment record’s layer, location X, and location Y. The
system synchronizes based on an implied mapping where GIS is the owner and the data is automatically
mapped to the Layer, Location X, and Location Y fields in Infor EAM. If a feature is a line or polygon
feature, the system populates the Infor EAM Location X and Location Y based on the feature’s center
point. Contact your system administrator for more information.
Note: Infor EAM recommends synchronizing features and equipment prior to synchronizing attributes.
To synchronize attributes:
7 Select—Select the features for which you want to synchronize attribute discrepancies.
The system automatically selects all of the features. Remove individual features from the list by
unselecting the line.
Note: To select all lines at once, click Select All. To unselect all lines at once, click Unselect All.
9 Click Close.
3 Highlight the feature for which to view discrepancy details, and then click the Details tab.
The system automatically populates Layer, Equipment, FID, Description, and Org. and displays
a list of field mapping records for the feature.
Note: The system only displays discrepancy mapping records with an Action of Copy. Contact
your system administrator for more information.
4 View the discrepancy records. The system displays the GIS Attribute and its data in GIS Value
and the corresponding Infor EAM Attribute and its data in Infor EAM Value. The Owner indicates
the system from which the data will be copied during synchronization.
Note: If multiple GIS attributes are mapped to a single Infor EAM attribute or vice-versa, the system
lists the attributes on separate lines but groups them together.
During synchronization, the system concatenates or parses data according to the Sequence and
Delimiter defined on the field mapping record. Contact your system administrator for more
information. If the system must parse data because one field is mapped to multiple fields, it verifies
that the number of fields to which to map data matches the instances of concatenated data in the
source field. If it does not, the system does not synchronize the data. If, however, the source field
in the owner system contains a null value, the system copies the null value to the multiple fields in
the other system and overwrites any data that those fields originally contained.
5 New Owner Value—Enter a value to override the current data contained within the owner system.
During synchronization, the system writes the new value to the owner system and then copies the
value to the other system.
Note: You cannot enter a New Owner Value if there is a discrepancy with a Layer, Location X, or
Location Y. These values are populated automatically based on the feature’s actual map location.
Click or to view the details of the next or previous discrepancy record within the list on the
Synchronize Attributes page.
7 Click Close.
Grid Function
Equipment BEGEQ
Equipment and related cost details BEGEQC
Equipment and related event details BEGEQE
Work order and related activity details BEGWAC
Work order and related equipment details BEGWEQ
Note: The system only queries those grids to which you have Query access. If you do not have access
to a grid, contact your system administrator to grant you access to its related function.
6 Click Select Custom Fields to select the custom fields to display on the Results page. The system
displays the Select Custom Fields popup.
Note: The displayed fields are based on the selected Grid.
7 Select the custom fields to display on the Results page, and then click Submit. The system closes
the Select Custom Fields popup.
Note: Search response time increases as the selected number of custom fields increases.
8 Click Apply. The system runs a search based on the criteria and displays Infor EAM data that
satisfies the filter on the Results page.
10 Click Apply. The system runs a search based on the criteria and displays Infor EAM data that
satisfies the filter on the Results page.
5 Enter the file name, select a file type, and then click Save.
Note: The default file type is .CSV. If you save the file as a .DBF file, the file is available within the
GIS map as a data table.
6 Click Close.
To create an Infor EAM work order within GIS, you must have permission to create work orders within
Infor EAM. Contact your system administrator for additional information.
To create Infor EAM work orders within GIS:
Defining activities
To define activities:
6 Estimated Hours—Enter the estimated number of hours required to complete the activity.
7 People Required—Modify the number of people required to perform the activity as necessary.
8 Completed—Select if the activity is completed.
9 Task—Enter the task code for the activity. The system updates the value forPeople Required to
correspond with the Taskas necessary.
10 Material List—Enter the code identifying the material list that contains the parts needed for the
activity.
11 Activity Comments—Enter comments or instructions for the activity.
12 Click Add to List.
13 Enter comments, custom fields, and linear reference information for the work order.
14 Click Submit. The system saves the work order and any information entered on the Activities,
Comments, Custom Fields, and/or Linear References pages.
Associating comments
To associate comments:
3 From Point—Enter the point on the linear equipment record from which to display events.
4 To Point—Enter the point on the linear equipment record to which to display events.
5 View the events information in the Events list.
Note: The Dataspy available on this popup is defined on the Events page of the Assets, Positions,
or Systems form of Infor EAM.
6 Click Close.
Infor EAM searches GIS maps based on active and buffer layers. The active layer is the layer in which
a search originates. If your search involves multiple layers, the buffer layer is the layer in which the
equipment for which you are searching resides, e.g., your GIS map contains a Pipe layer and a Hydrant
layer. You want to locate a fire hydrant based on the location of a specific pipe. Select the Pipe layer
as your active layer and the Hydrant layer as your buffer layer. The system searches for the pipe in
the Pipe layer and returns fire hydrants found within the Hydrant layer. See the following image:
Note: If you are performing a search based on an address, you do not need to specify an active layer.
The system originates its search in the address layer, which is defined by installation parameter
GISADDR.
Once you have performed a map search, use the GIS Map Search toolbar to modify the map view.
Note: If you click on any form within Infor EAM to enter the GIS Map Search form, the system
automatically displays the previous map search as long as it occurred within the same user session,
e.g., you perform a map search in the GIS Map Search form, and then open the Assets form. From
the Assets form, click . The system displays the GIS Map Search form with your previous search
displayed on the map.
If you use geocoding services, the system performs address searches based on the primary geocode
as defined in installation parameter GISSERV. If the system does not find any records that match your
search criteria, it performs the search based on the secondary geocode as defined in installation
parameter GISGEOSV. Contact your system administrator for more information.
• Equipment—The system displays the Equipment field. The system populates the equipment
lookup with GIS-integrated equipment records in Infor EAM that are installed, in use, and are
associated with the organizations to which you have rights. Enter the equipment for which to
search.
• Asset—The system displays the Asset field. The system populates the asset lookup with
GIS-integrated asset records in Infor EAM that are installed, in use, and are associated with the
organizations to which you have rights. Enter the asset for which to search.
• Position—The system displays the Position field. The system populates the position lookup
with GIS-integrated position records that are associated with the organizations to which you have
rights. Enter the position for which to search.
• System—The system displays the System field. The system populates the system lookup with
GIS-integrated system records that are associated with the organizations to which you have
rights. Enter the system for which to search.
Note: If you enter a linear equipment record in Equipment, Asset, Position, or System, the system
automatically displays and populates From Point and To Point. Edit the equipment’s From Point
and To Point via the map.
3 Radius—Enter the radius in which to search, and then select the unit of measure
(Feet,Meters,Kilometers, Miles) in the adjacent field.
Note: If your search is for a linear equipment record, enter a radius and unit of measure to create
a buffer around the linear equipment record on the map. The system searches for all GIS-integrated
equipment records that fall within the from and to point along the linear equipment record.
If your search is for a linear equipment record, the system highlights the length of the equipment
record defined between the From Point and To Point and GIS-integrated equipment records that
fall within the linear equipment record’s buffer.
Double-click an equipment record to view the record details if you opened the GIS Map Search
form via the menu bar.
• To expand the Equipment Within Search Area list or the Work Orders Within Search Area
list—Click or .
4 Search For—Select to perform your search based on Address, Equipment, Asset, System, or
Position, and then enter the related fields as necessary.
5 Dataspy—Select a dataspy.
Note: Click Edit to create a Dataspy.
Complete steps 5 and 6 only if you selected to base your search on equipment.
Note: If you selected Address in Search For, you do not need to specify an Active Layer. The
system originates its search in the address layer as defined by installation parameter GISADDR.
8 Buffer Layers—Select the layer in which the equipment for which you are searching resides.
10 Radius—Enter the radius in which to search, and then select the unit of measure in the adjacent
field.
11 Select additional Buffer Layers and specify a GIS Filter and Radius for each layer, as necessary.
Note: Click to add an additional line. You may add a maximum of ten lines.
12 Click Search. The system displays the search results in the Equipment Within Search Area list and
on the map.
Note: If you use geocoding services and you entered a street name and number in Address, Arc
IMS may return more than one address matching your search criteria. If multiple addresses match
your search criteria, the system displays the Matching Addresses popup. The popup lists the
addresses that match the search criteria and displays a Match Score, which ArcIMS assigns, for
each address. The closer the Match Score is to 100, the more likely the corresponding address is
the address for which you are searching. Select the address or addresses to view on the map, and
then click Submit. The system displays the map.
If your search is for a linear equipment record, the system highlights the length of the equipment
record defined between the From Point and To Point and GIS-integrated equipment records that
fall within the linear equipment record’s buffer.
Double-click an equipment record to view the record details if you opened the GIS Map Search
form via the menu bar.
• To expand the Equipment Within Search Area list or the Work Orders Within Search Area
list—Click or .
Button Function
Button Function
outlines the current extent of the
main map within the overview
map in red.
Note: If you click and drag to se-
lect an area within the overview
map, the system highlights the
area within the overview map and
updates the extent of the main
map.
Button Function
• Select by Polygon—Select
at least three points to form a
polygon over the desired map
area.
• Select by Line—Select to
draw a line between at least
two points on map.
• Select by Circle—Select to
form a circle over the desired
map area.
Previous Search—Displays a
list of the last five searches if they
occurred within the current user
session and were initiated by
clicking Search.The first search
displayed in the list is the most
recent search performed. Select
a search, and the system dis-
plays the selected map and GIS
Map Search form.
Note: The system displays the
map based on your current set-
tings and visible layers.
Button Function
place a map marker or click and
drag to draw a line on the map.
Button Function
Select features on the map to perform basic GIS Map Search functions on multiple equipment records,
e.g., create a route work order.
Note: You can also select equipment records on the Equipment Within Search Area list. Click , and
then select the equipment records in the list. The system automatically highlights the corresponding
equipment record on the GIS map. Press SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple equipment records at one
time.
To select equipment records on the GIS map:
3 Click the plus sign (+) next to the FID# for which you want to view attributes.
4 View the attributes.
1 Click Edit.
2 Click New.
3 Enter a title for the GIS Filter in the text box.
4 Edit the GIS Filter criteria as necessary. Edit GIS Filter criteria in the same manner that you edit
Dataspy criteria.
Note: Click Cancel New to cancel the creation of a new GIS Filter and return to the previous view.
Select Default Dataspy to save the selected GIS Filter as the default filter for the active layer
specified on the GIS Map Search form. You can have one default filter for each of your active layers.
5 Click Save. The system applies the GIS Filter to the GIS map search.
6 Enter the information necessary to add the first activity to the work order.
7 Click Submit. The system saves the information to the database and displays a message asking
whether or not you want to associate the GIS map with the work order.
8 Click Yes to associate the map with the work order. The system creates a PDF file of the currently
displayed map and attaches the PDF to the work order as a linked document.
5 Click Submit. The system displays a message asking whether or not you want to associate the GIS
map with the work order.
6 Click Yes to associate the map with the work order. The system creates a PDF file of the currently
displayed map and attaches the PDF to the work order as a linked document.
7 Enter additional information on each page of the Work Orders form as necessary, and then click
Close.
6 Select the work order activity for which to schedule. The system displays the information for the
work order activity in the Labor Details section.
7 Click Add Schedule.
The system automatically populates WO-Activity-Trade with the work order, activity, and trade for
the selected work order activity. The system also populates Scheduled Date with the scheduled
start date of the work order activity, Act. Est. Hours with the number of hours planned for the work
order activity, Act. Sched. Hours with the number of hours scheduled for the work order activity,
and Act. Actual Hours with the total hours booked to date for the work order activity.
8 Employee—Enter the employee who will complete the work order activity.
The system automatically populates Department.
9 Scheduled Date—Enter the date for which to schedule the work order activity. You cannot schedule
work for any date earlier than today’s date.
10 Scheduled Hours—Enter the estimated number of hours to complete the work. The number of
hours must be between 0 and 24.
11 Start Time and End Time—Enter the scheduled start time and end time of the work order activity.
12 Shift—Enter the shift responsible for completing the work order activity.
13 Department—Enter the department responsible for completing the work order activity.
14 Maintenance Equipment—Enter equipment on which to perform maintenance during the work
order activity.
15 Comment—Enter comments about the work order activity.
16 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a schedule, select the schedule to delete, and then click Delete Schedule. You
may delete an existing labor schedule that is scheduled for the current date or later if you have
made an error entering the data and if you have access rights for deleting the labor schedule. You
may only delete labor schedules that have not been frozen or completed.
4 Route—Enter a unique code identifying the route, and then enter a description of the route in the
adjacent field.
5 Organization—Enter the organization to which the route belongs if you use multi-organization
security.
Note: Click View GIS Map to view the current route map.
If you are not going to create a work order and activity for the route, select Link GIS Map to WO
on the View GIS Map popup to link the GIS map to all work orders for the route. Click Submit. The
system saves the record and closes the popup. Click Finish on the Create Route page. The system
saves the record.
6 Click Next to create a work order and activity for the route.
Note: If PM Revision Control is On, the system disables Next because you cannot approve a route
and, therefore, cannot create a work order for the route. Contact your system administrator for more
information. Click Finish to save the route without creating a work order. The system saves the
route with a status of Unfinished.
The system automatically populates Equipment with the first piece of equipment within the route
and populates Department, Location, Cost Code, and Assigned To if available on the equipment
record.
Note: The system only displays Linear Reference Details if the equipment record for which to create
the work order is a linear equipment record.
9 Enter the information necessary to add the first activity to the work order.
10 Click Finish. The system saves the route, work order, and work order activity records, and
automatically sets the status of the route to Approved.
Locating equipment and work orders on the GIS map (Infor EAM)
You can locate one or more pieces of equipment on the GIS map.
To locate equipment and work orders on the GIS map:
6 Click Submit.
Note: The system saves the current map settings and visible layers, e.g., if you edit the zoom extent
of the map and click Submit, the system opens the map to that zoom extent the next time you view
the map.
Map will be saved if GISMAPS is set to Organization or Department.
4 Associate GIS Map With WO—Select to associate the current GIS map with the work order.
The system saves a copy of the current map as a PDF with the work order, flags it to print whenever
the work order is printed, and displays it on the Document page of the Work Order form.
Note: You can edit the view of the map, e.g., zoom in, using the GIS Map Search toolbar.
5 Click Submit.
Creating maps
Create GIS map records to identify the image service when using ArcIMS or the map service when
using ArcGIS Server from which the map inside Infor EAM will be based.
Note: This screen is only accessible when GISMAPS installation parameter is set to Organization or
Department.
To create GIS maps:
The fleet management module allows you to manage fleet motor pools and the fleet billing process.
Use the fleet management module to create vehicle tickets and view and modify fleet bills.
For more information on the American Trucking Association’s Vehicle Maintenance Reporting System
(VMRS) and defining VMRS in the system, see "Defining VMRS codes" on page 380.
To access Databridge functions within Infor EAM, you must first set up Databridge menus for user
groups. See "Setting up menus for user groups" in the System Administrator’s Guide.
Term Definition
Vehicle A specific type of asset used in the fleet manage-
ment module
Example: To classify a van in a fleet as a vehicle
in the system, select Vehicle on the Assets form.
Term Definition
sued to and returned by employees, as well as
other attributes of the vehicles such as mileage,
parking location, and fuel levels.
Term Definition
Adjustment Adds credits and debits to previous bills. Adjust-
ments are reflected on the subsequent fleet bill.
To correct a ticket that was billed to an incorrect
cost code, enter a New Cost Code. Adjustments
can be added to pool, loaner, and assignment ve-
hicles.
Example: If a fleet customer was overcharged for
mileage during the previous billing period, then
provide a credit that will reimburse the fleet cus-
tomer on the next fleet bill.
Term Definition
fleet customers are billed that amount for usage
charges.
Fleet Customer A group that is used and billed for fleet vehicles.
Example: Create a fleet customer to correspond
to a specific department within a company, i.e., a
specific company will set up the Water and Sewer
department as one fleet customer and the Parks
and Recreation department as another fleet cus-
tomer within its fleet management module.
If periods associated with Period End Dates that are before the most recent Period End Date remain
unbilled when you manually initiate the billing process, the system generates bills for the earliest unbilled
period, and then generates bills for the next earliest unbilled period until all unbilled periods (which are
past due) have been processed.
You can also choose to view the current charges for a fleet customer by clicking Current Charges on
the Billing History page of the Fleet Customers form. The system will calculate and display all charges
up to the current system date. Viewing the current charges provides an idea of the amount of charges
for the period to date. See Viewing Billing Histories for Fleet Customers Chapter 7 Fleet Management
Configuration of the System Administrator’s Guide.
Finally, you can regenerate the last bill for a specific fleet customer by clicking Regenerate Bill on the
Fleet Bills form. The system displays the fleet bills associated with the last fleet billing period. Use the
regeneration process to correct a billing mistake and regenerate the bill instead of entering a billing
adjustment. The changes are reflected on the subsequent bill. See "Modifying fleet bills" on page 750.
5 Vehicle—Enter the vehicle to associate with the vehicle ticket. The system automatically populates
the vehicle description, Vehicle Org., Shop, Vehicle Status, Issued Fuel Level, Issued Parking
Location, and Issued Mileage.
6 Received Vehicle—Enter the received vehicle to associate with the vehicle ticket. The system
automatically populates the received vehicle description, Received Vehicle Org., and Received
Vehicle Status.
Note: You can only specify a Received Vehicle for loan tickets.
7 Issued To—Enter the employee to which to issue the vehicle. The system automatically populates
Cost Code, Fleet Customer, Fleet Customer Org., License No., and Phone No.
8 Cost Code—Enter the cost code with which to associate the vehicle ticket.
9 License No.—Enter the employee’s driver’s license number.
10 Other—Enter the visiting employee to which to issue the vehicle.
Note: You must enter an employee in Issued To and/or Other.
18 Est. Return Date/Time—Enter the estimated date and time that the vehicle is expected to be
returned.
Use the following fields for returning previously issued vehicles:
19 Returned Fuel Level—Enter the amount of fuel in the vehicle at the time it is returned.
20 Returned Parking Location—Enter the location of the vehicle at the time it is returned.
21 Returned Mileage—Enter the mileage of the vehicle at the time it is returned.
22 Returned Date/Time—Enter the date and time that the vehicle is returned. The system automatically
populates Hours Used and Mileage Used.
23 Hours—Enter the number of hours for which to bill the vehicle.
24 Mileage—Enter the number of miles for which to bill the vehicle.
25 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Ticket, Issued Date/Time, and Issued
By. The system also automatically populates the Billing Code and Markup Code associated with
the Vehicle, Class, Category, Type, and the Fleet Customer.
Note: If exceptions have been associated with the vehicle ticket, Exceptions is selected.
Upon saving a vehicle ticket with a status of Returned, the system automatically populates Returned
To, Hours Cost and the currency, Mileage Cost and the currency, Exceptions Cost and the
currency, Total Cost and the currency, and Period End Date.
Upon saving a vehicle ticket with a status of Completed, the system automatically populates
Completed Date/Time.
Click Assignment Billing to view billing details for each period in which the assignment ticket has
been billed.
Note: When filtering the billing details, Subtotals and Totals may change; they are relative to the
specific fleet bill lines in the grid. Adjustments totals will not change, as they are related to the entire
bill.
To view billing details for fleet bills:
5 New Cost Code—Enter a new cost code to correct a ticket that was billed to an incorrect cost code.
Note: You cannot adjust cost code values and pool or loaner adjustment amounts on the same
fleet bill. If you enter a New Cost Code, the system protects all other fields except Ticket and
Comments. If you clear the New Cost Code, the system re-enables all of the protected fields. If
you enter pool and loaner adjustment amounts, the system protects New Cost Code. If you clear
the pool or loaner adjustment amounts, the system re-enables New Cost Code.
Fuel Markup Billed and the currency, Insurance Billed and the currency, Insurance Markup
Billed and the currency, and Exceptions Billed and the currency.
5 New Cost Code—Enter a new cost code to correct a ticket that was billed to an incorrect cost code.
Note: You cannot adjust cost code values and assignment adjustment amounts on the same fleet
bill. If you enter a New Cost Code, the system protects all other fields except Ticket and Comments.
If you clear the New Cost Code, the system re-enables all of the protected fields. If you enter
assignment adjustment amounts, the system protects New Cost Code. If you clear the assignment
adjustment amounts, the system re-enables New Cost Code.
The Infor EAM Microsoft (MS) Project Interface facilitates work order scheduling and resource assignment
by allowing you to schedule work and resources in MS Project and then update the Infor EAM database
with the information.
See the MS Project documentation for information on standard MS Project functionality.
1 Insert the Infor EAM MS Project Interface CD into the proper drive.
2 Choose the folder specific to your version of MS Project:
• MS Project 2003-2007—Select this folder if you have MS Project 2003 or 2007 installed on your
machine.
• MS Project 2010—Select this folder if you have MS Project 2010 installed on your machine.
3 Execute the SETUP.EXE file. The system displays the Language Installation dialog box.
Note: If you would like to use English as the language for the installation, execute the msproject.msi
file. The installation wizard will skip the language selection option in step #4 and display the Welcome
dialog box.
4 Select the language to be used in the installation, and then click OK.
5 Click Next.
6 Click I accept the terms in the License Agreement, and then click Next.
7 Folder—Enter the folder in which to install the Infor EAM MS Project Interface.
8 Click Next.
9 Click Install.
10 Wait for the system to complete the installation, and then click Finish.
11 Click Close.
1 Select Infor > Infor EAM MS Project Interface > Choose Language.
2 Select the language to be used in the Infor EAM MS Project Interface, and then click OK.
1 Open MS Project.
2 Choose Infor > Infor EAM.
3 Click Set connection information.
4 Host Name—Enter the URL for the Infor EAM server.
5 Username—Enter the user code used to log in to Infor EAM. If necessary, include the tenant after
the user code, e.g., user@tenant.
6 Password—Enter the password used to log in toInfor EAM.
7 Click Save.
Note: Click Test to test the connection information.
1 Open MS Project.
2 Choose Infor > Infor EAM .
3 Set the connection information for the Infor EAM MS Project Interface. See "Setting up connection
information" on page 756.
4 Click Create new scheduling session.
5 Description—Enter a description of the session.
6 Organization—Select the organization with which to associate the session if you use
multi-organization security.
7 Include Header Task—Select to display both the work order header tasks and work order activity
sub-tasks.
8 Set Task Duration To Est. Hours—Select to populate Duration of the activity task to the estimated
hours of the Infor EAM work order activity.
9 Click Save and go to Step 2.
10 From—Enter the beginning date of the work order activity start dates included in the session.
11 To—Enter the ending date of the work order activity start dates included in this session.
12 Click Save and go to Step 3.
13 Choose one or more of the following criteria for filtering work orders to include in the session:
• Project—Click Project, and then select the projects to include in the list of work orders.
• Department—Click Department, and then select the departments to include in the list of work
orders.
• WO Type—Click WO Type, and then select the work order types to include in the list of work
orders.
• WO Status—Click WO Status, and then select the work order statuses to include in the list of
work orders.
• Priority—Click Priority, and then select the priorities to include in the list of work orders.
• Trade—Click Trade, and then select the trades to include in the list of work orders.
• Equipment—Click Equipment, and then enter the first letter(s) in the spelling of the pieces of
equipment to include in the list of work orders. Click Refresh. Select the pieces of equipment to
include in the list of work orders.
• Equipment Class—Click Equipment Class, and then select the equipment classes to include
in the list of work orders. The system displays the selected criteria in the preview-pane.
• Assigned By—Click Assigned By, and then select the supervisors to include in the list of work
orders.
14 Click Display Results. The system displays a list of unlocked work order activities that matches
the activity start date range and the criteria you selected. Select the work order activities to include
in the new scheduling session.
Note: Check Select to select all of the work order activities.
You cannot select work order activities that are associated with existing open sessions.
You cannot select work order activities with Estimated Hours equal to 0.
17 Click Display Results. The system displays a list of employees that matches the criteria you selected.
Select the employees to include in the new scheduling session.
Note: Check Select to select all of the employees.
20 Click Display Results. The system displays a list of suppliers that matches the criteria you selected.
Select the suppliers to include in the new scheduling session.
Note: Check Select to select all of the suppliers.
22 Choose one or more of the following criteria for filtering maintenance equipment to include in the
session:
• Department—Click Department, and then select the departments to include in the list of
maintenance equipment.
• Class—Click Class, and then select the classes to include in the list of maintenance equipment.
• Category—Click Category, and then select the categories to include in the list of maintenance
equipment.
23 Click Display Results. The system displays a list of maintenance equipment that matches the
criteria you selected. Select the maintenance equipment to include in the new scheduling session.
Note: Check Select to select all of the maintenance equipment.
1 Open MS Project.
2 Choose Infor > Infor EAM .
3 Set the connection information for the Infor EAM MS Project Interface. See "Setting up connection
information" on page 756.
4 Click Import existing scheduling session.
Note: To import data from Infor EAM, the current project in MS Project must be empty.
6 Click Import.
1 Open the MS Project file that contains the open scheduling session for which to add a work order.
Note: You must first create or import a scheduling session in order to add a work order.
1 Open the MS Project file that contains the open scheduling session for which to add a work order
activity.
Note: You must first create or import a scheduling session in order to add a work order activity.
2 Select the work order for which to add an activity, and then click Create work order activity. The
system automatically populates Work Order, Work Order Description, and WO Org.
3 Activity—Enter an activity.
4 Trade—Enter the trade required to perform the activity.
5 Task—Enter the task code for the activity.
6 Material List—Enter the material list code for the material list containing the parts needed for the
work order.
7 Activity Start Date—Enter the starting date for the activity.
8 Activity End Date—Enter the ending date for the activity.
9 Estimated Hours—Enter the number of estimated hours for the activity.
10 People Required—Enter the number of people required to perform the activity.
11 Click Submit.
Note: Click Reset to clear the form.
Click Comments to add or edit comments.
1 Open MS Project.
2 Choose Infor > Infor EAM .
3 Set the connection information for the Infor EAM MS Project Interface. See "Setting up connection
information" on page 756.
4 Click Import Existing Work Order.
5 Work Order—Select the work order to import into MS Project. The system automatically populates
the work order details.
Note: Work Orders must have at least one activity to be imported.
An open scheduling session must exist to import existing work orders. If no open scheduling session
exists for the project file, create or import a scheduling session prior to importing existing work
orders.
6 Click Import.
1 Open the MS Project file that contains the open scheduling session that you want to export to Infor
EAM.
Note: You must first create or import a scheduling session in order to export a scheduling session.
Canceling sessions
Cancel an existing scheduling session.
Note: Canceling the session will not delete the work order activities and resource (employee, supplier,
maintenance equipment, and tool) records from the current project, but after canceling the session,
you cannot export the updated tasks back to Infor EAM.
To cancel sessions:
1 Open the MS Project file that contains the open scheduling session that you want to cancel.
Note: You must first create or import a scheduling session in to order cancel a scheduling session.
The asset management services module is used by maintenance organizations that operate as a
business unit and charge the cost of maintenance work to the customers for whom the work is performed.
Work charged to one customer may be carried out at different places.
Time, material, and labor costs are defined in pricing schedules and then applied to customer contracts,
which specify how maintenance work is charged to the customer. The contracts are then used to
calculate work order costs and to generate invoices and reports.
• Cancelled—All fields are editable except Organization. Cancelled status indicates that the
customer contract has been cancelled and can only be selected if no invoiced payments or work
order charges exist.
Note: You cannot modify the status of customer contracts if there are any existing approved or
invoiced fixed charges, or if there are any existing calculated work orders. A calculated work order
is a work order that is associated with a customer contract for which customer charges have been
calculated. See "Understanding the calculation of customer charges" on page 771.
6 Class—Enter the class of the contract. The classes shown belong to the AGR entity
7 Customer—Enter the customer to whom to charge the work.
8 Pricing Schedule—Enter the pricing schedule for time and material costing.
9 Choose one of the following options:
• Apply the contract to equipment—Specify the Equipment for which to apply the contract. The
contract also applies to any child equipment, unless the cost rollup attribute is set for the child
equipment.
• Apply the contract to a project—Specify theProject to which the contract applies. The contract
also applies to any child projects.
• Apply the contract to an event—Specify the Work Order to which the contract applies.
Note: MEC work orders are not displayed in the Work Order lookup.
10 Start Date and End Date—Enter the date on which the contract period begins and the expiration
date of the contract. If you do not enter a date, there is no time limitation on the contract.
Note: If the contract has a fixed charge due date, the Start Date must be on or before the fixed
charge due date, and the End Date must be on or after the fixed charge due date.
5 Status—Select the status of the fixed charge. Changing the status of a fixed charge may affect
additional system checks and field changes as follows:
• Unfinished—All fields are editable. However, when you submit the fixed charge with Unfinished
status, the system protects Line. Select Unfinished if the fixed charge or the customer contract
is not approved.
• Approved—The system protects all fields except Status. Select Approved to create an invoice
for this payment.
• Cancelled—The system protects all fields except Status. Select Cancelled to cancel the invoice
for this payment.
• Due Date—Enter the date when records can be invoiced. Leave this field blank for the record
to be invoiced every time invoices are generated.
• Price—Enter the gross price (not including tax) in internal currency units.
6 Click Submit.
10 Tool Usage %—Enter the percentage of the work order tool usage costs that is charged to the
customer.
11 Services % —Enter the percentage of the work order services costs that is charged to the customer.
12 Additional Charge—Enter an additional fee to associate with the pricing schedule, e.g., if you
assess a standard trip charge regardless of the work performed, enter that amount.
Note: Additional Charge is not displayed if the MULTIORG installation parameter is set to YES.
If you are using multi-organization security, you must add additional charges for each organization
on the Additional Charges page. See "Adding additional charges (MOS)" on page 769.
13 Time Rounding (min.)—Enter the number of minutes to round charged time of booked hours, e.g.,
a value of 15 indicates rounding to quarters of an hour.
14 Minimum Time (min.)—Enter the minimum number of minutes to charge per labor booking.
15 Custom Trade Rates—Select to apply a markup for specific trade rates.
Note: If you enter Labor Cost %, you cannot select Custom Trade Rates.
16 Custom Part Charges—Select to apply part charges depending on the type of part used.
Note: If you enter Stock Items %, you cannot select Custom Part Charges.
6 Click Submit.
5 Organization— Enter the organization for which to add the fixed/added price.
6 Click Submit.
Note: A work order must have some costs associated with it to generate a customer charge.
If the system cannot find an approved contract that matches, the system generates an error message
that can be viewed on the Comments page of the Approve Customer Charges form for the current
work order charge record. Also, if there is an error message for the work order charge record, the
Status of the record will always be changed to Data Error.
If there are multiple, valid customer contracts associated with a work order, the system generates
charges for the customer contract for which the most specific data is defined.
If there is more than one valid customer contract, the system generates charges for the customer
contract associated with a pricing schedule for which specific values are defined on the WO Criteria
page of the Pricing Schedules form.
• Next, the system retrieves any additional charges for pricing schedules associated with the customer
contract.
Note: The system only adds the value of an additional charge to a work order once. It does not
include any additional charges for which there are already existing charges on a work order, unless
the value of the Additional Charge has been updated on the pricing schedule after a work order
charge has been generated. If the Additional Charge has been updated, then the first work order
charge record contains the original value of the Additional Charge, and the system generates a new
work order charge for the difference between the values of the two additional charges.
• If Custom Trade Rates is selected for a pricing schedule associated with a customer contract, the
system bypasses any trade rates and uses only the rates specified on the Custom Trade Rates
page of the Pricing Schedules form.
• If Custom Part Charges is selected for a pricing schedule associated with a customer contract, the
system calculates charges using the values specified for Charge % on the Custom Part Charges
page of the Pricing Schedules form to calculate charges rather than the value specified for Stock
Items Charge %.
• If there are existing labor hours on a work order, the system rounds the hours based on the values
specified for Time Rounding (min) and Minimum Time (min) on the pricing schedule.
Note: The system does not track which transactions belonging to a work order have already been
billed. Therefore, if you re-generate work order charges for a customer contract, the system simply
calculates the total work order charges again and subtracts the values that have already been
approved or invoiced to calculate the necessary charges for the new work order charge record.
Caution: The system generates customer charges for all work orders, not just the work order
selected on the List View page.
3 Status—Enter the status of the customer charges. See the following for a description of the possible
customer charge statuses:
• Approved—Work order charge will be invoiced. All fields are protected except Status.
• Data Error—System generated status. Work order charge will not be invoiced. You can update
Status, Continue Charging, and Corrections as necessary.
• Exclude from invoicing—Work order charge will not be invoiced. You can update Status,
Continue Charging, and Corrections as necessary.
• Invoiced—System generated status indicating that the charges are invoiced. All fields are
protected.
• Unapproved—Default status of the calculations. You can update Status, Continue Charging,
and Corrections as necessary.
Note: After you generate the invoice, the system automatically changes Status to Invoiced.
4 Continue Charging—Select to enable the system to continue generating invoice charges for the
same work order. If selected, the system creates a new Charge Number when generating customer
charges, assigns a new incremental number to a newly calculated charge record, and displays the
difference in price between the actual and the existing calculation(s).
Note: Continue Charging is automatically selected for calculations for non-completed work orders.
Note: If you did not specify any generation criteria, charges for all work orders of type JOB or PPM
with a status of Released or Completed will be generated. The system verifies that the work order(s)
have no parent work order and that the customer charges do not have a Status of Approved,
Excluded from invoicing, or Invoiced.
Caution: Customer invoices are only related to asset management services and should not be
confused with the invoice voucher functionality in the Purchasing Management module. See
"Recording invoice vouchers" on page 339.
Note: If a single customer is referenced on more than one customer contract and the customer contracts
are from different organizations, the system generates invoices for each of the customer contract
organizations.
You can also generate invoices for customers that are marked as Out of Service. See "Creating
customers" on page 484.
Note: View the customer invoice created on the Customer Invoices form. See "Viewing invoices
for AMS-Customers" on page 770.
7 Approved Customer Charges—Select to generate invoices for only those customer charges with
a status of Approved.
Note: Any corrections made on the Approve Customer Charges form are reflected on the invoice
after it is generated. See "Approving and generating customer charges" on page 772.
8 Fixed Charges—Select to generate invoices for fixed charges. If you created a fixed charge schedule
for a customer contract, you must select Fixed Charges to include the schedule on an invoice. See
"Creating fixed charge schedules for customer contracts" on page 766.
9 Original Invoice—Enter the customer invoice to recalculate. If you specify an invoice to recalculate,
the system generates a new invoice with the latest customer charges.
Note: The system displays all customer invoices, including those with Cancelled status. You can
use a wild card, e.g., "%", with partially-specified text strings anywhere within the field to retrieve
strings containing the specified text.
The recalculate invoice functionality does not make corrections to the original invoice. The system
generates an updated invoice.
10 Start Date and End Date—Enter the start and end dates for which to generate invoices.
Note: If no date range is specified, the system generates invoices for all Approved customer invoices.
The date range specified refers to the date on which the work order was completed. The date range
does not apply to released work orders.
11 Unapproved Customer Charges—Select to generate invoices for customer charges with a status
of Unfinished.
12 Click Generate.
Note: View details about the generated invoices on the Customer Invoice Lines Overview form.
See "Viewing customer invoice lines" on page 778.
3 Right-click on the form and then choose Create Invoice for WO.
4 Work Order—Enter the work order for which to create an invoice.
5 Click Submit.
system allows the following status changes (and their user-status equivalents): Invoiced to Cancelled;
Invoiced to Ready for Printing; Ready for Printing to Cancelled; and Ready for Printing to Invoiced.
Budgets track expenses and set spending limits for specified time periods or items. Budgets coordinate
with existing inventory. They also can be defined for predetermined time frames such as months,
quarters, or years.
2 Select the budget group for which to assign an item, and then click the Items tab.
3 Item—Enter an item. The system automatically populates description and Organization.
4 Click Submit.
Defining budgets
Create and update budgets on the Budgets form. The budget combines a specific budget structure
and term. Set a current amount and a person responsible.
To define budgets:
5 Date Created—Change the creation date if necessary. Date Created can be in the past or future.
6 Status—Choose one of the following options:
• In Process—Select for budgets not yet approved.
• Temporary value—Select for budgets not yet approved.
• Final value—Select for budgets not yet approved.
• Approved/frozen—Select to approve or freeze the budget. You must create the Budget Details
before you can select this status. See "Defining budget details" on page 783.
If you select Approved/frozen, the system automatically populates Original Amount, Approved
By, and Date Approved.
If the status changes from Approved/frozen to any other status, the above fields are not affected
and updated the next time the Budget is approved.
Temporary value, Final value, and Approved/frozen are available in update mode only.
3 Click Add Budget. The system enables the Budget Details section. The system automatically
populates Current Budgetand Calculated Budget.
Note: If you click Add Sub-Level Budget, the fields will display in the same manner but appear
beneath the main budget heading for the next lower level in the budget structure.
5 Budget Amount—Enter the amount for the currently selected budget. The system automatically
populates the budget amount currency.
6 Click Submit.
Calculating budgets
Calculate a budget to gather costs from work orders. Depending on the scope of the budget, you may
want to run the calculation process during down times, such as in the evening or on the weekends.
Note: Budgets are not automatically updated when you incur costs.
To calculate budgets:
6 Click Submit.
Copying budgets
The copy budget feature copies a Budget structure and term, including all the lower-level budget details.
To copy budgets:
7 Plus or Minus %—Enter the amount to adjust the budget, e.g. 10% over last year’s budgeted
amount.
8 Calculate Zero-based Budget—Select to calculate a zero-based budget.
9 Reset Amounts to Zero—Select to set the copied term’s actual non-PM costs plus expected PM
costs for the term to which you are copying. Resetting amounts to zero will include all maintenance
due next term as well as the same amount of breakdowns as occurred in the most recent term.
10 Click Submit.
6 Reset Amounts to Zero—Select to reset budget amounts to zero on all new records.
7 Plus or Minus %—Enter a percentage by which to adjust new values.
8 Click Submit.
Purchasing contracts detail agreements for parts. Details include such information as suppliers,
time-frames, and buyer facts as well as percentage discounts arranged for each contract according to
order or duration.
7 Approved/active—Select if the contract has been approved. In order to be considered active, the
contract may or may not be approved but the system date is in the range created by the start and
end dates.
8 Cancelled—Select if the contract no longer effects purchase order changes.
9 Contract Class—Enter the contract class for the purchasing contract. The system automatically
populates Organization.
10 Supplier—Enter the supplier for the purchasing contract. The system automatically populates
Supplier Org., Language, and Currency.
11 Language—Select the language for the purchasing contract.
12 Currency—Select the currency for the purchasing contract.
13 Store—Enter the store to which items on the purchasing contract should be sent.
14 Person Responsible—Enter the name of the employee responsible for the purchasing contract.
15 Start Date—Enter the starting date for the purchasing contract.
16 End Date—Enter the ending date for the purchasing contract.
17 Supplier Reference—Enter the reference number for the supplier.
18 Contact—Enter the name of the contact person for the purchasing contract.
19 Copy From—Enter an existing purchasing contract to copy.
Note: The Copy From contract must have the same Currency as the new contract.
The Call Center module handles incoming customer requests for action, information, or comments.
Use the call center module to query a knowledge base for information to help customers, or to facilitate
the search process; search a GIS map to retrieve equipment for a work order; create a new work order;
link a request to an existing work order; or record customer comments.
This module easily facilitates the call taker’s need for speed. Sections of the main Call Center form can
be expanded or collapsed, with minimal need to open additional forms.
Term Definition
Action Request A request made by a customer that becomes a
work order or is linked to an existing work order
Address Alias A popular name for an address, e.g., Haywood
Mall or Cleveland Park
Attribute A person, place, or thing associated with GIS lay-
ers and based only on the customer’s address,
e.g., a council person, a school district, or tax map
ID
Bulletin Board A place in the system where you can view internal
notices for your call center
Bulletin Board Notices The actual notice that call center employees read
or consult on the bulletin board
Calendar Group A user-defined group for equipment with the same
calendar periods
Calendar Group Period A user-defined period of availability for a group of
equipment, e.g., Spring Semester (03/01/08-
04/30/08), Monday-Friday, 08:00-16:00
Term Definition
Contact An address, employee, or customer used to iden-
tify the source of contact
Contact Number The number the system automatically assigns a
new contact
Customer Request The record of an individual interaction with a cus-
tomer, e.g., call record
Department A department that offers information or service to
customers through the call center
Knowledge Base (KB) Article A searchable article that helps the call center em-
ployee facilitate customer requests. Knowledge
Base Articles often contain a call script or other
instructions.
Layer When associated with a service problem code,
GIS layers are used to filter features on the GIS
map, e.g., street lights, water lines, etc.
Provider An additional level of a department structure, used
to route work to specific service providers within
a single department
Service Category An additional level of a department structure, used
to filter service problem codes or KB articles based
on categories of service problem codes.
Service Delivery Matrix A pre-defined combination of Department,
Provider, Service Category, and Service Problem
Code associated to equipment to filter lookups and
knowledge base articles.
Service Problem Code A code that identifies a specific problem or request.
Service problem codes are required when creating
a work order from a customer request.
employees to perform a KB search for each customer request so that standard procedures are followed
(e.g., call scripts).
Information requests
Customers may contact the call center asking for information, e.g., when is the concert in the park?.
Perform a search of the knowledge base for the requested information. The knowledge base is a
database of articles created by supervisors of the call center to help facilitate the information request
process.
A knowledge base article can consist of a call script or phone numbers to read to the customer, an
external URL link that will answer the request, or a link to another KB article. Consult the article and
relay the requested information to the customer. Typically, information requests do not generate work
orders. After the requested information is relayed to the customer, the call usually ends. However, if
the customer requires any work to be performed after the information request, the call becomes an
action request.
Action requests
Action requests usually involve a problem the customer has. To solve action requests, create a customer
request, which typically becomes a work order, or link the customer request to an existing work order,
e.g., a customer contacts the call center to request the removal of a washing machine from their
driveway. Create a customer request for the problem, filling in the customer’s information as needed.
If this is the first report of the problem, create a work order. However, if the problem has already been
reported, then create a customer request from the new customer and link it to the existing work order.
Departmental hierarchies
• Departments—A department is the umbrella under which providers, service categories, and service
problem codes fall. It is the top of the hierarchy. An example of a department is "Environmental
Services."
• Providers—Providers refer to the levels within a department directly above a service category that
handles the service needed. An example of provider is "Solid Waste."
• Service Categories—Service categories fall under a provider and help filter service problem codes.
Service categories represent the service needed. An example of a service category is "Residential
Garbage Pickup."
• Service Problem Codes—Service problem codes identify specific problems and any information
needed to provide solutions. A service problem code is required in order to create a work order from
a customer request. An example of a service problem code is "Appliance Pickup." The appliance
pickup problem is assigned a "code" that tells the system that a stove, washer, dryer, or other
appliance needs to be picked up when that code is entered into the system. This service problem
code has a standard work order for appliance pickup.
Comments
Occasionally, customers call with comments, but no desire for information or need for work performance.
The comment may be about the new call center, an especially helpful employee, or other messages
that require no follow-up or action. The call center employee records the comment.
5 WO Type—Select a type of work order to create for the service problem code.
6 Standard WO—Enter the standard work order with which to associate the service problem code.
7 Priority—Select the priority for work orders created from this service problem code.
8 Class—Enter the class with which to associate the service problem code. The system automatically
populates Class Org.
9 Equipment—Enter the equipment to associate with the service problem code. The system
automatically populates Equipment Org.
Note: Equipment can also be selected on the Call Center form or GIS map when processing an
action request.
14 Penalty Factor—Enter the penalty factor with which to associate the service problem code.
15 Equipment Usability—Enter the code identifying the equipment's usability. The system automatically
populates Equipment Usability Org.
Note: Equipment Usability is used in penalty reports when penalty amounts depend upon
equipment usability.
1 Open the Service Problem Codes form. The system displays the List View page.
2 Select the service problem code for which to associate a layer, and then click the Layers tab.
3 Click Add Layer.
4 Layer—Select a layer with which to associate the service problem code.
5 Click Submit.
Note: To delete a layer from a service problem code, select the layer to delete, and then click Delete
Layer.
Creating providers
Providers facilitate knowledge base searches in the call center and provide additional levels of reporting
for a department.
To create providers:
Note: Service Delivery Matrix must be selected for Service Problem Code Validation on the Call
Center Setup form before a service delivery matrix can be created for selected equipment.
To create service delivery matrixes for equipment:
14 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Created By, Date Created, Last Updated
By, and Date Last Updated.
2 Click New Record. The system automatically populates Created By and Date Created.
3 Organization—Enter the organization to which the bulletin board notice belongs.
4 Language—Select the language in which to create the notice.
Note: To create a notice in more than one language, create separate bulletin board notices for each
language.
5 Importance—Select the level of importance for the notice. The system displays icons on the bulletin
board indicating the selected level of importance.
6 Knowledge Base Article—Enter the article to which a hyperlink should be displayed on the bulletin
board.
7 Start Date—Enter the start date for displaying the notice on the bulletin board.
8 End Date—Enter the end date for displaying the notice on the bulletin board.
Note: If you do not enter a Start Date and End Date, the system displays the notice on the bulletin
board until an End Date is entered or the notice is deleted.
9 Open Request Status when WO Closes—Select the status to assign to open customer requests
when the work order to which they are linked is closed.
Note: This refers only to customer requests that are open.
• Open—Select to keep the customer request open when the work order closes.
• Follow-up—Select to flag the customer request for follow up when the work order closes.
• Closed—Select to close the customer request when the work order closes.
• Cancelled—Select to cancel the customer request when the work order closes.
10 Follow-up Request Status when WO Closes—Select the status to assign to follow-up customer
requests when the work order to which they are linked is closed:
Note: This refers only to customer requests marked for follow-up.
• Open—Select to open the customer request when the work order closes.
• Follow-up—Select to flag the customer request for follow-up when the work order closes.
• Closed—Select to close the customer request when the work order closes.
• Cancelled—Select to cancel the customer request when the work order closes.
Note: You may define more statuses to meet your call center requirements. Contact your system
administrator for more information.
11 Top Ten Lookback Days—Enter the number of days for which to calculate the top ten knowledge
base articles, e.g., enter 10 to view the top ten articles for the last 10 days, or enter 6 to view the
top ten articles for the last 6 days.
12 Minimum Penalty—Enter the minimum penalty amount that must be met before a penalty can be
deducted from the maintenance fee.
13 Service Problem Code Validation—Select one of the following options:
• Department Structure—Select to define a hierarchy of department, provider, service category,
and service problem code on the Department Structure page of the Departments form.
Equipment and service problem code do not restrict one another, e.g., a service problem code
for tree removal does not need to be linked to every possible parcel within a city. Call takers may
select tree removal as the service problem code, and then select the property location for the
problem.
• Service Delivery Matrix—Select to configure a matrix of valid department, provider, service
category, and service problem code combinations for equipment on the Service Delivery Matrix
page of the Equipment form. If selected, only equipment with service delivery matrix flagged
can be selected.
Note: Service Delivery Matrix is very restrictive and requires more maintenance.
Note: The equipment must be flagged as Service Delivery Matrix in order for the lookups and KB
search to be filtered on the equipment.
14 Event Log Type Filter—Select to restrict event types in the Event Log popup on the Call Center
form. See "Defining event log type filters" on page 802.
15 Allow Request to be Closed while WO is Open—Select to allow the call taker to close the customer
request while the work order is open.
Note: If unselected, the system does not allow a status change to Closed on customer requests
linked to open work orders.
18 Use Department Structure Values Only Once—Select to use each value in the department
hierarchy of provider, service category and service problem code only once.
Note: Provider, Service Category, and Service Problem Code can appear in the department
structure only once. If you select a service problem code, the system automatically populates
Department, Provider, Service Category, and Service Problem Code based on the associated
department structure. Unselect to use a service problem code for more than one department, service
category, or provider.
Follow these steps to select options for the duplicate work order check on the Action Request
section.
19 Enable Duplicate WO Check—Select to enable the system to check for duplicate work orders.
The system displays the duplicate work orders in Work Order on the Work Orders popup on the
Call Center form. When duplicate work orders exist, users can link to an existing work order or
create a new one.
20 Days to Show Closed WOs—Enter the number of days to show a work order when the work order
has closed.
Note: Specify the Days to Show Closed WOs to reduce the number of possible duplicate work
orders to display for the equipment. Leave it blank to show only work orders that are still open. Enter
0 to show work orders that were closed today or enter 1 for yesterday, etc.
21 Days to Show Open WOs—Enter the number of days to show the work order after the work order
was created, e.g., enter 0 to show work orders created on the current date only, enter 1 to show
work orders created one day prior to the current date, or leave it blank to include all open work
orders.
22 WO Types—Enter the work order types to allow call takers to link to customer requests, e.g., enter
Breakdown and Repairable Spare to allow the call takers to select work orders of Breakdown and
Repairable Spare type only. Enter null to allow call takers to link customer requests to all work order
types.
23 WO Statuses—Enter the work order statuses of which to allow call takers to link customer requests.
24 Match WO Header Equipment Only—Select to display work orders when at least one equipment
record on the Call Center form matches the WO header equipment.
25 Match Equipment on WO Header or Equipment Tab—Select to display work orders when at least
one equipment record on the Call Center form appears on the WO header or the Equipment page
of the Work Orders form.
26 Match Service Category—Select to display work orders when Service Category matches the
service category of the customer request.
27 Match Service Problem Code—Select to display work orders when Service Problem Code
matches the service problem code of the customer request.
Follow these steps to select options for the Knowledge Base popup.
28 KB Results Per Page—Enter the number of knowledge base articles to display per page after a
knowledge base article search.
29 Show Service Category in Knowledge Base—Select to display the service category in the
knowledge base.
30 Show Provider in Knowledge Base—Select to display the provider in the knowledge base.
Follow these steps to select options for the GIS Map Search popup.
31 Show Service Problem Code in Knowledge Base—Select to display the service problem code
in the knowledge base.
32 Highlight on Map—Select to have the option to highlight addresses on the map.
33 Identify Features—Select to have the option to identify features on the map.
34 Show Children—Select to have the option to show child equipment on the map.
35 View Nearest Address—Select to have the option to view the nearest address on the map.
36 Schedule WOs—Select to have the option to schedule work orders from the map.
37 Click Save Record. The system automatically populates Date Last Updated and Last Updated
By.
4 Enter data in that contains, e.g., if you chose to search by Phone, enter the phone number, and
then click Search to begin the search process.
Note: If exactly one match is found, the system populates the information in the Customer
Information section.
If more than one match is found, select the correct match from the Customer Information lookup.
If no match is found, the system copies the search criteria information to the Customer Information
section.
5 Click Close.
• Full Text Search—Select to search the contents of the knowledge base for the search criteria
entered.
1 Perform a knowledge base search. See "Performing a knowledge base search" on page 809.
2 Click Total Articles Found to view all articles from the search.
3 Click Articles w/ Service Problem Codes to view only the articles that have a service problem
code.
1 Perform a knowledge base search. See "Performing a knowledge base search" on page 809.
2 Click the saved search to display the article.
Note: The system displays your 5 most recent searches during the period of login. The search is
cleared when you log out.
Viewing my favorites
To view my favorites:
1 Perform a knowledge base search. See "Performing a knowledge base search" on page 809.
2 Click the title of the article to display the article.
Note: If you log out, the system does not delete this list.
4 Equipment—Enter the equipment on which to perform work. The system automatically populates
Equipment Org. and Equipment Description.
Note: Click View Customer Equipment to view and select from equipment associated with this
customer.
Click Additional Equipment to view and select from all equipment associated with this customer.
The system automatically populates Multiple Equipment if more than 1equipment is selected.
5 Service Problem Code—Enter the service problem code. The system can automatically populate
Service Problem Code for the work order based on the selected knowledge base article. See
"Performing a knowledge base search" on page 809.
6 Temporary Fix Promise Date—Enter the date by which the work will be fixed temporarily.
7 WO Class—Enter the class of the work order.
8 Equipment Usability —Enter the code identifying the equipment's usability. The system automatically
populates Equipment Usability Org.
Note: Equipment Usability is used in penalty reports when penalty amounts depend upon
equipment usability.
9 Permanent Fix Promise Date—Enter the date by which the work will be fixed permanently.
10 Click View Map.
11 Perform a GIS map search. See "Performing a GIS map search (Infor EAM)" on page 721 for
information on searching the GIS map.
12 Choose one of the following options:
• Return Equipment—Click to return equipment to the action request.
• Return Work Order—Click to return a work order to the action request. The system associates
the customer request with this existing work order.
• Close—Click to close the GIS Map Search page.
• Associate Map—Click to attach the map to the customer request as a .PDF file.
• Update Work Address—Click to update the work address on the Call Center form with the
selected equipment. This is used when the equipment is a physical address.
Note: If you attach the map to the customer request, click the Documents tab to view it.
If your system does not have the GIS module, select Equipment from the list of values.
13 Enter linear reference information. The system only displays Linear Reference Details if the equipment
record for which to create the work order is a linear equipment record. See "Defining regular work
order headers" on page 389.
14 Click Create WO.
15 Choose one of the following options:
• Link work order to customer request—Select the Work Order, and then click Link to Request.
The system automatically populates Work Order, WO Class, Work Order Org., WO Priority,
and selects Duplicate.
• Generate a new work order—Click Create New WO. The system creates the new work order
and automatically populates Work Order.
System administrators can create user-defined screens that utilize the underlying web services on
which the system is architected. See "Defining web service prompts" in the System Administrator's
Guide. The Web Service Prompt Engine displays the screen representing the prompt definition. The
Web Service Prompt Engine also processes data entered for the prompt transactions through the
underlying web services.
Because the Web Service Prompt Engine uses web services, the data is processed directly to the
underlying tables as the transactions are submitted. Therefore, you receive immediate feedback if the
transaction is successful as well as if it contains validation or web service errors. These errors can then
be corrected in 'real time' and re-submitted.
Once a web service prompt has been created, the system administrator must place the corresponding
screen into the user groups menu structure. That process makes the new screen available through the
menu structure, and the new screen appears like all other screens within the system. The screen name
is equivalent to the prompt description. You need only query permissions for the new screen.
Note: User defined fields are available for web service prompts. The fields display in a list of all fields
under the appropriate web service. These user defined fields inherit properties from the associated
reference form. Right-click in Screen Designer mode to define options for user defined fields. See
"Entering user defined fields" on page 50.
The following apply to screens based on web service prompts:
• They are standalone record view screens with no tabs and no Dataspy filtering features
• Common tabs and pop-ups (Comments, Documents, Addresses, etc.) are not available
• The only toolbar options available are Previous Screen, Save, Reset Screen, and Help
• Right-click options are not available
• Dataspy, Export to Excel, Quick Filter, and Save Layout options are not available
• The system does not automatically display the lookup defined on the selected screen for a chosen
field. The system administrator must associate a Query Code or define a Retrieved Value for each
lookup field unless the field is a User Defined Field with lookup definitions defined on the inherited
screen.
Note: Key fields defined in the 'update' web service prompt are displayed. These fields are used to
uniquely identify a database record. For example, if updating equipment, you must enter the
equipment code and organization.
4 Enter the key field data. When you tab out of the last key field or click Save, the system uses the
key field information to retrieve the field data defined in the 'update' prompt definition. The key fields
are protected by the system.
5 Update other fields as necessary.
6 Click Save.
4 Enter the key field data. When you tab out of the last key field or click Save, the system uses the
key field information to identify the database record for deletion.
5 Click Save.
Entities for which you store data and create work orders. kit
"Equipment" is a generic, all-encompassing term for
A collection created from a stock of parts within a store.
assets, positions, systems, and locations, which form a
When a kit is built, component parts are removed from
hierarchy of equipment information:
inventory and the kit itself is added to inventory. Kits are
1 Locations individually identified by a unique Lot number.
2 Systems
3 Positions knowledge base
For example, a motor, a line in a factory, a street, etc. A database of information from which call center
employees can search for needed information, to solve
fields to remember a customer's problem or request. Within a knowledge
base there are articles, links to websites that offer more
This tab refers to the fields and their values that the information, and directions for call center employees to
system will remember and display as the user moves follow.
from screen to screen.
lockout box
fixed charge
A physical location for employees to safely store all the
Can be added to customer contracts to create a set price keys used for a lockout/tagout procedure during which
to be added to a customer invoice based upon a specified mechanical equipment is disconnected from electricity.
due date. The keys are safely stored and locked to prevent
unexpected startup of the equipment while employees
GIS are performing maintenance. The unexpected startup of
An acronym for Geographical Information Systems. equipment while maintenance is performed could cause
bodily injury or death to employees performing the work.
hazard The keys are safely stored and locked during this time
to prevent such injuries or fatalities.
A biological, chemical, physical, mechanical,
environmental agent or situation that threatens life, health, lockout/tagout
property, or the environment. In EAM hazards typically
refer to workplace hazards or potential hazards OSHA regulations on lockout/tagout procedures for
employees may encounter based on their workplace equipment, which require that machines are properly shut
operations such as falling when working at heights, down and that they are not restarted until service or
drowning when welding under water, or electrocution maintenance on the machine is completed. Tagging and
when working with high voltage equipment. locking out (e.g., securing that mechanical equipment is
disconnected from to electricity) while employees are
performing required maintenance and work orders,
prevents bodily injury and death by employees who might
A site and/or system identification for service companies The chronological order of work to be completed on a
and original equipment manufacturer of an asset. maintenance pattern based on either a time or
meter-based interval for releasing work orders.
permit to work
statement of conditions
Details the hazards and precautions required to remove
or prevent a potential hazard to your employee's safety. A statement of conditions on healthcare equipment as
required by The Joint Commission to document that a
policy fire safe environment of care and compliance is
maintained.
Guidelines created by your organization to record a
corporate or enterprise-wide initiative. For example, this strategy
enterprise is committed to reducing energy consumption
and thereby reducing its carbon footprint. Utilized to record a corporate or organizational strategic
initiative such as the corporate commitment to reduce
precaution electrical consumption by an amount and a date. The
strategy does not specify how this will be accomplished.
A measurement your operation or employees can take For example, a strategy can be to reduce electrical
to prevent workplace hazards which have the potential consumption by 35% before fiscal year 2014. To
to cause bodily injury and even death. Examples of accomplish the strategic initiative, the following can be
precautions include wearing a safety harness to prevent done:
falling when working at heights, wearing proper
• Average 35% reduction across the enterprise.
equipment to prevent drowning, or switching off electricity
to prevent electrocution. • Minimum reduction of 25% per facility.
reliability ranking
target
A method by which users assess equipment criticality or
The focus of an objective or initiative.
risk to overall production.